Handbook

manual key, remote control 195 Starting and switching off the engine, 198 "Keyless entry and Starting" 198 Parking brake 201 Hill start assist 202 5-speed manual gearbox 203 6-speed manual gearbox 203 gear shift indicator 204 Automatic gearbox 205 electronic gearbox 210 Stop & Start 214 Head-up display 218 Memorising speeds 220

PEUGEOT - Car PDF Manual, Electric Wiring Diagram & Fault Codes DTC

File Info : application/pdf, 607 Pages, 9.08MB

Peugeot Traveller Owner Manual ?t=1612525582

Handbook PEUGEOT Traveller

On-line handbook

Select one of the following means of access to view your handbook on-line...
Find your handbook on the Peugeo t website, under "MyPeugeo t".
This personal space offers advice and other useful information for the care and maintenance of your vehicle.

Scan this code for direct access to your handbook.

If the "MyPeugeo t" function is not available on the Peugeo t public website for your country, you can find your handbook at the following address: http://public.servicebox.peugeot.com/ddb/
Select: the language, the vehicle, its body style, the print edition of your handbook appropriate for the date of registration of your vehicle.
Referring to the handbook on-line also gives you access to the latest information available, easily identified by the bookmark, associated with this symbol:

Welcome

This handbook has been designed to help you to make the most of your vehicle in all situations and in complete safety. Take the time to read through it so as to familiarise yourself with your vehicle.
This handbook covers all of the variations in equipment available across the whole range. Your vehicle will be fitted with only some of the equipment described in this document, depending on its trim level, version and the specification for the country in which it was sold. The descriptions and illustrations are given as indications only. Automobiles PEUGEO T reserves the right to modify the technical characteristics, equipment and accessories without having to update this edition of the handbook.
This document forms an integral part of your vehicle. Remember to pass it on to the new owner in the event of the sale of the vehicle.

Thank you for choosing this vehicle.
This handbook has been designed to enable you to make the most of your vehicle in all situations.

Key safety warning

additional information

contributes to the protection of the environment

Contents

Labels

. O verview
10
. E co-driving

Instruments

Instrument panels

Indicator and warning lamps

Distance recorders

Lighting dimmer

Trip computer

Touch screen

Setting the date and time

Access

Key

Key, remote control

"Keyless E ntry and Starting"

Locking / unlocking from inside

Front doors

Manual sliding side door(s)

E lectric sliding side door(s)

Hands-free sliding side door(s)

Side-hinged rear doors

Tailgate

Tailgate rear screen

Alarm

E lectric windows

E ase of use and comfort

Steering wheel adjustment

Front seats

2-seat front bench seat

Fixed one-piece bench seat

Fixed rear seat and bench seat

Rear seat and bench seat on rails

101

Individual seat(s) on rails

105

Interior fittings

110

Seating area fittings

115

Panoramic sunroof

120

Folding and sliding table

121

Manual air conditioning

125

Dual-zone automatic air conditioning

127

Front demist - defrost

131

Door mirrors

demist - defrost

132

Rear screen

demist - defrost

133

Rear Heating - Air Conditioning

136

Programmable Heating / Ventilation

137

Courtesy lamps

140

Lighting and visibility

Mirrors

141

Lighting control stalk

144

Daytime running lamps

147

Automatic illumination of headlamps

147

Automatic headlamp dipping

151

Interior mood lighting

153

Manual headlamp beam height adjustment 153

Wiper control stalk

154

Automatic rain sensitive wipers

155

Safety

Hazard warning lamps

158

E mergency or assistance call

158

Horn

159

E lectronic stability

control (E SC)

159

G rip control

162

Seat belts

164

Airbags

168

Child seats

173

Deactivating the passenger's front airbag 176

ISO FIX mountings

183

Manual child lock

190

E lectric child lock

190

Child lock on rear windows

191

Contents

Driving

Driving recommendations

192

Starting-switching off the engine,

manual key, remote control

195

Starting and switching off the engine,

198

"Keyless E ntry and Starting"

198

Parking brake

201

Hill start assist

202

5-speed manual gearbox

203

6-speed manual gearbox

203

G ear shift indicator

204

Automatic gearbox

205

E lectronic gearbox

210

Stop & Start

214

Head-up display

218

Memorising speeds

220

Speed limit recognition

221

Speed limiter

225

Cruise control

228

Dynamic cruise control

232

Collision Risk Alert and Active

Safety Brake

239

Lane departure

warning system

245

Fatigue detection system

247

Blind spot monitoring system

249

Parking sensors

252

Reversing camera, interior mirror

254

180° rear vision

255

Under-inflation detection

258

Practical information

Fuel tank

261

Diesel misfuel prevention

262

Snow chains

264

Towing a trailer

265

E nergy economy mode

266

Accessories

267

Roof bars / Roof rack

268

Changing a wiper blade

269

Bonnet

271

Diesel engine

272

Checking levels

273

Checks

276

AdBlue® and SCR system

(BlueHDi Diesel)

278

In the event of a breakdown

Warning triangle (stowing)

282

Tool box

282

Temporary puncture

repair kit

285

Changing a wheel

291

Changing a bulb

298

Changing a fuse

311

12 V battery

316

Towing

320

Running out of fuel (Diesel)

322

Technical data

Dimensions

323

E ngines

324

Weights

324

Identification markings

327

. Audio equipment and telematics

E mergency or assistance

328

PEUGEO T Connect Nav

331

PEUGEO T Connect Radio

419

Bluetooth® audio system

473

. Alphabetical index

overview
E xterior
Panoramic sunroof Accessories

120 267-268

Speed limit recognition
Collision Risk Alert Active Safety Brake

221-224 239-242 242-244

Changing a wiper blade
Automatic wiping Front demisting, defrosting

269 155-156
131

O pening the bonnet

271

Automatic illumination of headlamps 147

Automatic headlamp

dipping

151-152

Direction indicators

146

Adjusting the headlamp

beam height

153

Changing front bulbs

298-304

Headlamp wash

156

Parking sensors Towing

252-253 320-321

Front foglamps Daytime running lamps Cornering lighting

145, 299, 304 147, 300 150

Key

Key, remote control

45-50

Changing the battery, reinitialisation 51

Keyless E ntry and Starting

52-62

Changing the cell battery,

reinitialisation

Starting - switching off the engine 198-200 - key, remote control - Keyless E ntry and Starting

remote control

Locking - unlocking from inside

Alarm

83-85

Filler cap, fuel tank Misfuel prevention Running out of Diesel fuel,
priming

261-262 262-263
322

Front doors AdBlue® tank Tool box

65 278-281 282-284

U nder-inflation detection Tyres, pressures E SC system ABS, E BFD DSC, ASR G rip control Snow chains

258-260 259-260, 327
159-161 159-160
161 161, 162-163
264

E xterior (continued)

Side-hinged doors Tailgate Tailgate screen Demisting-defrosting
the rear screen

79-80 81 82
133

Accessories Roof bars / Roof rack

Changing rear bulbs
Rear lamps (side-hinged doors)
Rear lamps (tailgate)
3rd brake lamp - side-hinged doors - tailgate

298, 305-310
298, 305-307
298, 308-310 306, 309

Number plate lamp - side-hinged doors - tailgate
Reversing camera
Rear vision

306, 309
254 255-257

Towing Trailer towbar Rear parking sensors

320-321 194, 265 252-253

Warning triangle
Temporary puncture repair kit
Spare wheel, jack, changing a wheel
Inflation, pressures

267-268 268
282 285-290 291-297 297, 327

overview

E lectric door mirrors
Demisting-defrosting the mirrors
Blind Spot Monitoring System
Fatigue detection system
Lane Departure Warning System

141-142 132
249-251 247-248 245-246

Direction indicator side repeaters 300

Manual sliding side door(s)
E lectric sliding side door(s)
Hands-free sliding side door(s)
Manual child lock
E lectric child lock
Rear window child lock

66-67 68-71 75-78
190 190 191
5

overview
Instruments and controls

Air vents

134

Dashboard fuses O pening the bonnet

311-314 271

5/6-speed manual gearbox G ear shift
indicator Automatic gearbox E lectronic gearbox Stop & Start Hill start assist

203
204 205-209 210-213 214-217
202

Courtesy lamps
Interior mood lighting - courtesy lamp - panoramic roof
Rear view mirror
Reversing camera on interior mirror
E mergency or assistance call

140 153
143 254 158, 328-329

Parking brake

201

Touch screen (PEUGEO T

Connect Nav)

41-43, 331-418

Touch screen (PEUGEO T

Connect Radio)

41-43, 419-472

Bluetooth® audio system 44, 473-495

Setting the date and time

Manual air conditioning Dual-zone air
conditioning Rear heating, air conditioning Air recirculation Front demist - defrost Rear screen demist - defrost

125-126
127-130 136
125, 130 131 133

12 V accessory socket

113

U SB port - JACK auxiliary socket 113-114

Deactivating the passenger front airbag

170, 176

Instruments and controls (cont.)

Instrument panel Warning lamps Coolant temperature Service indicator O il level indicator AdBlue® range indicators Distance recorder G ear shift
indicator Lighting dimmer Trip computer Setting the time and date Fatigue detection system

13-14 15-28
29 29-31
32 33-35
36
204 37
38-40 44
247-248

Head-up display

E lectric windows

Adjusting the electric

mirrors

141

Lighting control Direction indicators

144-147 146

G rip control
Programmable heating ventilation
Alarm
Adjusting the headlamp beam height
Lane Departure Warning System
Blind Spot Monitoring System
Automatic headlamp dipping

161, 162-163 137-139 83-85 153 245-246 249-251 151-152

Memorising speeds Speed limiter Cruise control Dynamic cruise control

218-219
220 225-227 228-231 232-238

overview

Setting the time and date (touch screen) 44

Setting the time and date (audio system) 44

Rear vision

255-257

Memorising speeds

220

Speed limit recognition

221-224, 227, 230, 234

Collision Risk Alert

239-242

Active Safety Brake

242-244

Deactivating Stop & Start

216

Wiper control Trip computer

154-156 38-40

Locking - unlocking from inside

E lectric sliding door(s)

68-71

E lectric child lock

190

Hazard warning lamps

158

Reinitialising the

under-inflation detection

258-260

Deactivating Stop & Start

216

Deactivating the DSC/ASR

system

161

Adjusting the steering wheel Horn

87 159
7

overview

Interior

Interior fittings

110-114

- cup or can holder - mats - sun visors

- glove box - storage box - upper storage box

- accessory socket, U SB port, JACK auxiliary socket - 230 V sockets

Tool box

282-283

Front seats, adjustments, head restraint 87-92

- manual adjustments - electric adjustments - head restraints

- heated seats

Seat belts

164-166

Fixed one-piece bench seat

95-97

Rear seat and bench seat

98-100

Rear seat and bench seat on rails

101-104

Individual rear seat(s) on rails

105-108

Seat labels

10, 102, 103, 109

Sliding and folding table

121-124

Seating area fittings - luggage retaining net - high load retaining net - load space cover - rear windows - side blinds
Accessories

115-118 267-268

Rear view mirror Surveillance mirror Front courtesy lamp Changing courtesy
lamp bulbs

143 143 140
307, 310

Torch

119

Temporary puncture

repair kit

282-284, 285-290

Spare wheel, jack, changing

a wheel, tools

282-284, 291-297

Front, side, curtain airbags
Passenger front airbag deactivation
12 V accessory sockets U SB port JACK auxiliary socket

168-172
170, 176 113 113 114

2-seat front bench seat Heated bench seat Aircraft type table 230 V socket

93-94 94 112 114

Rear heating - air conditioning

136

Panoramic roof

120

Child seats

173-175, 179-182, 189

ISO FIX mountings

183-189

Rear side windows

118, 291

Side blinds

118

Fixed one-piece bench seat

95-97

Rear seat and bench seat

98-100

Rear seat and bench seat on rails

101-104

Individual rear seat(s)

on rails

105-108

Seat labels

10, 102, 103, 109

Rear courtesy lamp
Changing courtesy lamp bulbs

140 307, 310

Maintenance - Technical data

Running out of fuel,

(primimg pump)

322

Checking levels

273-275

- oil

- brake fluid

- power steering fluid

- coolant

- screenwash, headlamp wash fluid

- additive (Diesel with particle filter)

Checking components - battery - air filter - passenger
compartment filter - oil filter - particle filter - brake pads - discs

276-277

Changing bulbs - front - rear

298-310

O pening the bonnet U nder the bonnet E ngines AdBlue®

271 272 324-326 278-281

overview

12V battery

316-320

Load reduction, economy mode 266

E ngine compartment fuses

311-312, 315

Weights

324-326

Dimensions

323

Identification markings

327

overview
Labels
183

109

190

102-103

124

271

139

318 109
176 10

eco-driving

E co-driving
E co-driving is a range of everyday practices that allow the motorist to optimise their fuel consumption and CO 2 emissions.
Optimise the use of your gearbox
With a manual gearbox, move off gently and change up without waiting. During acceleration change up early.
With an automatic or electronic gearbox, give preference to automatic mode and avoid pressing the accelerator pedal heavily or suddenly.
The gear shift indicator invites you to engage the most suitable gear: as soon as the indication is displayed in the instrument panel, follow it straight away. For vehicles fitted with an electronic or automatic gearbox, this indicator appears only in manual mode.

Drive smoothly
Maintain a safe distance between vehicles, use engine braking rather than the brake pedal, and press the accelerator progressively. These practices contribute towards a reduction in fuel consumption and CO 2 emissions and also help to reduce the background traffic noise.
If your vehicle has cruise control, make use of the system at speeds above 25 mph (40 km/h) when the traffic is flowing well.

Switch off the demisting and defrosting controls, if not automatic. Switch off the heated seat as soon as possible.
Switch off the headlamps and front foglamps when the level of light does not require their use.
Avoid running the engine before moving off, particularly in winter; your vehicle will warm up much faster while driving.

Control the use of your electrical equipment
Before moving off, if the passenger compartment is too warm, ventilate it by opening the windows and air vents before using the air conditioning. Above 30 mph (50 km/h), close the windows and leave the air vents open. Remember to make use of equipment that can help keep the temperature in the passenger compartment down (sunroof and window blinds...). Switch off the air conditioning, unless it has automatic regulation, as soon as the desired temperature is attained.

As a passenger, if you avoid connecting your multimedia devices (film, music, video game...), you will contribute towards limiting the consumption of electrical energy, and so of fuel. Disconnect your portable devices before leaving the vehicle.

eco-driving

Limit the causes of excess consumption
Spread loads throughout the vehicle; place the heaviest items in the bottom of the boot, as close as possible to the rear seats. Limit the loads carried in the vehicle and reduce wind resistance (roof bars, roof rack, bicycle carrier, trailer...). U se a roof box in preference. Remove roof bars and roof racks after use.

Observe the recommendations on maintenance
Check the tyre pressures regularly, when cold, referring to the label in the door aperture, driver's side. Carry out this check in particular: - before a long journey, - at each change of season, - after a long period out of use. Don't forget the spare wheel and the tyres on any trailer or caravan.

When refuelling, do not continue after the third cut-off of the nozzle to avoid any overflow.
At the wheel of your new vehicle, it is only after the first 1 800 miles (3 000 kilometres) that you will see the fuel consumption settle down to a consistent average.

At the end of winter, remove snow tyres and refit your summer tyres.

Have your vehicle serviced regularly (engine oil, oil filter, air filter, passenger compartment filter...) and observe the schedule of operations recommended in the manufacturer's service schedule.

With a BlueHDi Diesel engine, if the SCR system is faulty your vehicle becomes polluting; go to a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop without delay to have the emissions of nitrogen oxides brought back to the legal level.

LCD text instrument panel

Instruments
1

Dials and screens
1. Analogue speedometer (mph or km/h). 2. Fuel gauge. 3.E ngine coolant temperature gauge. 4. Cruise control or speed limiter settings. 5. Digital speedometer (mph or km/h).

6.G ear shift indicator. G ear with an automatic or electronic
gearbox. 7. Service indicator, then total distance
recorder (miles or km), trip recorder (miles or km), display of messages, ... 8. Rev counter (x 1 000 rpm or tr/min).

Control buttons
A. Reset the service indicator. Temporarily recall information on: - servicing, - remaining driving range with the emissions fluid (AdBlue®).
B. Main lighting dimmer. C. Reset the trip recorder.

Instruments
Matrix instrument panel

Dials and screens
1. Analogue speedometer (mph or km/h). 2. Fuel gauge. 3.E ngine coolant temperature gauge. 4. Cruise control or speed limiter settings. 5.G ear shift indicator. G ear with an automatic or electronic
gearbox.

6. Display area: alert or state of function messages, trip computer, digital speedometer (mph or km/h), ...
7. Service indicator, then total distance recorder (miles or km). These functions are displayed in turn when the ignition is switched on.
8. Trip recorder (miles or km). 9. Rev counter (x 1 000 rpm or tr/min).

Control buttons
A. Reset the service indicator. Display the alert log. Recall information on: - servicing, - remaining driving range with the emissions fluid (AdBlue®).
B. Main lighting dimmer. C. Reset the trip recorder.

Indicator and warning lamps
Visual indicators informing the driver that a system is in operation or is switched off (indicator lamp), or has a fault (warning lamp).
When the ignition is switched on
Certain warning lamps come on for a few seconds when the vehicle's ignition is switched on. When the engine is started, these same warning lamps should go off. If they remain on, before moving off, refer to the information on the warning lamp concerned.
Associated warnings
Certain warning lamps may come on in one of two modes: fixed (continuous) or flashing. O nly by relating the type of illumination to the operation of the vehicle can it be determined whether the situation is normal or a fault has occurred. In the event of a fault, the illumination of the warning lamp may be accompanied by an audible signal and/or a message.

Warning lamps
When the engine is running or the vehicle is being driven, illumination of one of the following warning lamps indicates a fault which requires action on the part of the driver. Any fault resulting in the illumination of a warning lamp must be investigated further using the associated message. If you encounter any problems, contact a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop.

Instruments
Operation indicator lamps
If one of the following indicator lamps comes on in the instrument panel and/or instrument panel screen, this confirms that the corresponding system has come into operation.

Deactivation indicator lamps
If one of the following indicator lamps comes on, this confirms that the corresponding system has been switched off intentionally. This is may be accompanied by an audible signal and the display of a message.

Instruments

Warning / indicator lamp

State

Cause

STOP

fixed, associated with another warning lamp, accompanied by an audible signal and a message.

Illumination of this warning lamp is related to a serious fault detected with the engine, the braking system, the power steering, etc., or a major electrical fault.

Action / Observations
You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so. Park, switch off the ignition and call a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop.

Parking brake

fixed.

Braking

fixed.

The parking brake is applied or not properly released.

Release the parking brake to switch off the warning lamp, keeping your foot on the brake pedal. O bserve the safety recommendations. For more information on the Parking brake, refer to the corresponding section.

The brake fluid level has dropped significantly.

You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so. Top-up with brake fluid listed by PEUGEO T. If the problem persists, have the system checked by a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop.

fixed, associated

The electronic brake force distribution You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so.

with the ABS warning (E BFD) system has a fault.

Have it checked by a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified

lamp.

workshop.

Warning / indicator lamp

State

Seat belt(s) not fastened / unfastened

fixed or flashing accompanied by an audible signal.

Cause
A seat belt has not been fastened or has been unfastened.

Instruments
Action / Observations Pull the strap then insert the tongue in the buckle.

Battery charge* fixed.

Engine oil pressure

fixed.

The battery charging circuit has a fault (dirty or loose terminals, slack or cut alternator belt, ...).

The warning lamp should go off when the engine is started. If it does not go off, contact a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop.

There is a fault with the engine lubrication system.

You must stop as soon it is safe to do so. Park, switch off the ignition and contact a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop.

Maximum coolant temperature

fixed with the needle in the red zone.

The temperature of the cooling system is too high.

You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so. Wait until the engine has cooled down before toppingup the level, if necessary. If the problem persists, contact a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop.

* Depending on the country of sale. 17

Instruments

Warning / indicator lamp

State

Cause

Action / Observations

Door(s) open

fixed, associated with a message identifying the door, if the speed is below 6 mph (10 km/h).

A front, side or rear door (side-hinged rear door or tailgate) is still open. If fitted to your vehicle, the tailgate screen is still open.

Close the door in question. If your vehicle has side-hinged rear doors and the right hand door is still open, this will not be signalled by this warning lamp.

fixed, associated with a message identifying the door, together with an audible signal if the speed is above 6 mph (10 km/h).

Low fuel level

fixed, with the needle in the red zone.

When it first comes on there remains less than 8 litres of fuel in the tank.

You must refuel as soon as possible to avoid running out of fuel. This warning lamp will come on every time the ignition is switched on, until a sufficient addition of fuel is made. Fuel tank capacity: approximately 69 litres. Never continue to drive until you run out of fuel as this could damage the emission control and injection systems.

Warning / indicator lamp

State

Cause

Engine

fixed, associated with A major engine fault has been

auto-diagnosis the STO P warning

detected.

+ system

lamp.

Action / Observations

Instruments

You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so. Park, switch off the ignition and contact a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop.

Engine auto-diagnosis system

fixed.

The emission control system has a fault.

The warning lamp should go off when the engine is started. If it does not go off, contact a PEUGEO T dealer or qualified workshop without delay.

flashing.

The engine management system has a fault.

Risk of destruction of the catalytic converter. Have it checked by a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop.

fixed, associated with A minor engine fault has been

Have it checked by a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified

the SE RVICE warning detected.

workshop.

lamp.

Diesel engine pre-heating

fixed.

The ignition switch is at the 2nd position (igntion on). Or The "START/STOP" button has been pressed.

Wait until the warning lamp goes off before starting. O nce it goes off, starting is immediate, on condition that: - the clutch pedal is pressed fully down with a manual
gearbox, - pressure is maintained on the brake pedal with an
automatic or electronic gearbox. The period of illumination of the warning lamp is determined by the ambient conditions (up to about thirty seconds in extreme conditions). If the engine does not start, switch the ignition off and then on, wait until the warning lamp goes off again, then start the engine.

Instruments

Warning / indicator lamp

State

Cause

Under-inflation

fixed, accompanied by The pressure in one or more tyres is an audible signal and too low. a message.

Action / Observations
Check the tyre pressures as soon as possible. This check should preferably be carried out when the tyres are cold. You must reinitialise the system after the adjustment of one or more tyre pressures and after changing one or more wheels. For more information on Under-inflation detection, refer to the corresponding section.

+
Foot on the brake pedal
Foot on the clutch

flashing then fixed,

The system has a fault: the tyre

accompanied by the pressures are no longer monitored.

Service warning lamp.

Check the tyre pressures as soon as possible. Have the system checked by a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop.

fixed. fixed.

The brake pedal must be pressed.

With an automatic or electronic gearbox, press the brake pedal, engine running, before releasing the parking brake, to release the selector lever and come out of position P or N. If you wish to release the parking brake without pressing the brake pedal, this warning lamp will remain on.

In the STO P mode of Stop & Start, the change to START mode is denied because the clutch pedal is not fully down.

If your vehicle has a manual gearbox, you must declutch fully to allow the change to engine START mode.

Warning / indicator lamp

State

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)

fixed.

Cause
The anti-lock braking system has a fault.

Action / Observations

Instruments

The vehicle retains conventional braking. Drive carefully at reduced speed and contact a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop without delay.

Collision Risk Alert / Active Safety Brake

flashing.

The system is operating.

fixed, accompanied by a message and an audible signal

The system has a fault.

The system brakes briefly so as to reduce the speed of collision with the vehicle ahead.
Have the system checked by a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop.

Particle filter (Diesel)

fixed, accompanied by The system has been deactivated

a message.

(via the menu).

For more information on the Collision Risk Alert / Active Safety Brake system, refer to the corresponding section.

fixed, accompanied by an audible signal message on the risk of blockage of the particle filter.

This indicates that the particle filter is starting to become saturated.

As soon as driving conditions allow, regenerate the filter by driving at a speed of at least 35 mph (60 km/h) until the warning lamp goes off.

fixed, accompanied by an audible signal and and a message that the particle filter additive level is too low.

This indicates the low level of the additive reservoir.

Have the reservoir topped-up as soon as possible by a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop.

Instruments

Warning / indicator lamp

State

Airbags

on temporarily.

fixed.

Cause
This warning lamp comes on for a few seconds when you turn on the ignition, then goes off.
O ne of the airbag or seat belt pretensioner systems has a fault.

Action / Observations
This warning lamp should go off when the engine is started. If it does not go off, contact a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop.
Have them checked by a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop.

Passenger's front airbag

fixed in the seat belt and front passenger's airbag warning lamps display.

The control switch, located at the passenger's end of the dashboard, is set to the "OFF" position. The passenger's front airbag is deactivated. You can install a rearward facing child seat, unless there is a fault with the airbags (airbag warning lamp on).

Turn the control switch to the "ON" position to activate the passenger's front airbag; in this case, you must not install a child seat in the rearward facing position on this seat.

Passenger's front airbag

fixed.

The control switch, located at the passenger's end of the dashboard, is at the "ON" position. The passenger's front airbag is activated. In this case, do not install a rearward facing child seat on the front passenger seat.

Turn the control switch to the "OFF" position to deactivate the passenger's front airbag. You can install a rearward facing child seat, unless there is a fault with the airbags (airbag warning lamp on).

Warning / indicator lamp

State

Dynamic stability control (DSC/ASR)

fixed.

Dynamic stability control (DSC/ASR)

flashing.

fixed.

Power steering

fixed.

Cause
The button is pressed and the indicator lamp comes on. The DSC/ASR is deactivated. DSC: dynamic stability control. ASR: anti-slip regulation.

Action / Observations

Instruments

Press the button to activate the DSC/ASR. Its indicator lamp goes off. The DSC/ASR system is activated automatically when the vehicle is started. If deactivated, the system is reactivated automatically from around 30 mph (50 km/h). For more information on the Electronic stability programme (ESC) and in particular, DSC/ASR, refer to the corresponding section.

The DSC/ASR regulation is operating.
The DSC/ASR system has a fault.
The power steering has a fault.

The system optimises traction and improves the directional stability of the vehicle in the event of loss of grip or trajectory.
Have the system checked by a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop.
Drive carefully at reduced speed. Have it checked by a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop.

Instruments

Warning / indicator lamp

State

AdBlue® (BlueHDi Diesel)

fixed, on switching on the ignition, accompanied by an audible signal and a message indicating the remaining driving range.

Cause
The remaining driving range is between 350 miles (600 km) and 1500 miles (2400 km).

flashing, accompanied by an audible signal and a message indicating the remaining driving range.

The remaining driving range is between 0 and 350 miles (600 km).

Action / Observations Have the AdBlue® tank topped-up as soon as possible: go to a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop, or carry out this operation yourself.
You must top-up the AdBlue® tank to avoid a breakdown: go to a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop, or carry out this operation yourself.

flashing, accompanied by an audible signal and a message indicating that starting is prevented.

The AdBlue® tank is empty: the starting inhibition system required by legislation prevents starting of the engine.

To be able to start the engine, you must top-up the AdBlue® tank: go to a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop, or carry out this operation yourself. It is essential to add at least 3.8 litres of AdBlue® to the fluid tank.

For topping-up the AdBlue® fluid or for more information on AdBlue®, refer to the corresponding section. 24

Warning / indicator lamp

State

Cause

SCR emissions fixed, on switching

A fault with the SCR emissions

control system on the ignition,

control system has been detected.

+ (BlueHDi Diesel) associated with the

SE RVICE and engine

diagnostic warning

lamps, accompanied

by an audible signal

and a message.

Action / Observations

Instruments

This alert disappears once the exhaust emissions return to normal levels.

flashing, on switching on the ignition, associated with the SERVICE and engine diagnostic warning lamps, accompanied by an audible signal and a message indicating the remaining driving range.

After confirmation of the fault with the emissions control system, you can drive for up to 650 miles (1 100 km) before the engine starting inhibition system is triggered.

Contact a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop without delay, to avoid a breakdown.

flashing, on switching on the ignition, associated with the SE RVICE and engine diagnostic warning lamps, accompanied by an audible signal and a message.

You have exceeded the authorised driving limit following confirmation of a fault with the emissions control system: the engine starting inhibition system prevents starting of the engine.

To be able to start the engine, you must call on a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop.

Instruments

Warning / indicator lamp

State

Service

on temporarily.

fixed.

Cause
A minor fault has occurred for which there is no specific warning lamp.

Action / Observations
Identify the fault by means of the associated message, for example: - low engine oil level, - low screenwash/headlamp wash fluid level, - discharged remote control battery, - low tyre pressures, - saturation of the particle filter (FAP) on Diesel
vehicles. - ... For more information on Checks and in particular the particle filter, refer to the corresponding section. For any other faults, contact a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop.

A major fault has occurred for which Identify the fault by reading the message and contact

there is no specific warning lamp.

a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop.

fixed, associated with The servicing interval has been

flashing and then fixed exceeded.

display of the service

spanner.

Rear foglamps fixed.

The rear foglamps are on.

O nly on BlueHDi Diesel versions. Your vehicle must be serviced as soon as possible.
Turn the ring on the stalk rearward to switch off the rear foglamps.

Warning / indicator lamp

State

Automatic wiping

fixed.

Cause
The wiper control has been pushed down.

Action / Observations

Instruments

Automatic front wiping is activated. To deactivate automatic wiping, operate the control stalk downwards or put the stalk into another position.

Automatic headlamp dipping
Stop & Start
Blind spot monitoring system

fixed.

The lighting control stalk is in the "AUTO" position, and the function has been activated. The main beam headlamps come on if the exterior lighting and driving conditions permit.

The camera, located at the top of the windscreen, manages the operation of main beam, depending on the ambient lighting and driving conditions. For more information on Automatic headlamp dipping, refer to the corresponding section.

fixed.
flashes for a few seconds, then goes off.

When the vehicle stops (red lights, traffic jams, ...) the Stop & Start system has put the engine into STO P mode.

The warning lamp goes off and the engine restarts automatically in START mode, as soon as you want to move off.

STO P mode is temporarily unavailable, or START mode is invoked automatically.

For more information on Stop & Start, refer to the corresponding section.

fixed.

The blind spot monitoring system has For more information on the Blind spot monitoring

been activated.

system, refer to the corresponding section.

Instruments

Warning / indicator lamp

State

Lane departure fixed. warning system

Cause
The lane departure warning system has been activated.

Action / Observations
The lane departure warning system is on. For more information on the Lane departure warning system, refer to the corresponding section.

Front foglamps
Sidelamps
Left-hand direction indicator Right-hand direction indicator Dipped beam headlamps

fixed.

The front foglamps are switched on using the ring on the lighting control stalk.

Turn the ring on the lighting control stalk rearward once to switch off the front foglamps.

fixed.

The lighting stalk is in the "Sidelamps" position.

flashing with buzzer.

The lighting stalk has been pushed down.

flashing with buzzer.

The lighting stalk has been pushed up.

fixed.

The lighting stalk is in the "Dipped beam headlamps" position.

Main beam headlamps

fixed.

The lighting stalk has been pulled towards you.

Pull the stalk to return to dipped beam headlamps.

For more information on the Lighting control stalk, refer to the corresponding section. 28

Engine coolant temperature
With the engine running, when the needle is: - in zone A, the temperature of the engine
coolant is correct, - in zone B, the temperature of the engine
coolant is too high; the maximum temperature and the central STOP warning lamps come on, accompanied by an audible signal and a warning message in the touch screen. You MUST stop as soon as it is safe to do so. Wait a few minutes before switching off the engine. Contact a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop.

Checking the level
After driving for a few minutes, the temperature and pressure in the cooling system increase. To top-up the level: F wait at least one hour for the engine to
cool, F unscrew the cap two turns to allow the
pressure to drop, F when the pressure has dropped, remove
the cap, F top-up the level to the "MAX" mark.

Instruments
Service indicator
System which informs the driver when the next service is due, in accordance with the manufacturer's servicing schedule.

The point at which the next service is due is calculated from the last indicator zero reset, depending on the distance travelled and the time elapsed since the last service.
For BlueHDi Diesel versions, the degree of deterioration of the engine oil is also taken into account (depending on the country of sale).

Be aware of the risk of burns when topping-up the cooling system. Do not fill above the maximum level (indicated on the header tank).
29

Instruments

More than 1 800 miles (3 000 km) remain before the next service is due
When the ignition is switched on, no service information appears in the screen.
Between 600 miles (1 000 km) and 1 800 miles (3 000 km) remain before the next service is due
For 5 seconds after the ignition is switched on, the spanner symbolising the service operations comes on. The distance recorder display line indicates the distance remaining before the next service is due. Example: 1 700 miles (2 800 km) remain before the next service is due. For 5 seconds after the ignition is switched on, the screen indicates:

Less than 600 miles (1 000 km) remain before the next service is due
Example: 560 miles (900 km) remain before the next service is due. For 5 seconds after the ignition is switched on, the screen indicates:
5 seconds after the ignition is switched on, the distance recorder resumes its normal operation. The spanner remains on to indicate that a service must be carried out soon.

Service overdue
For 5 seconds after the ignition is switched on, the spanner flashes to indicate that the service must be carried out as soon as possible. Example: the service is overdue by 180 miles (300 km). For 5 seconds after the ignition is switched on, the screen indicates:
5 seconds after the ignition is switched on, the distance recorder resumes its normal operation. The spanner remains on.

5 seconds after the ignition is switched on, the spanner goes off; the distance recorder resumes its normal operation. The screen then indicates the total distance.

For BlueHDi Diesel versions, this alert may also be accompanied by the fixed illumination of the service warning lamp when the ignition is on.

The distance remaining may be weighted by the time factor, depending on the driving conditions. Therefore, the spanner may also come on if you have exceeded the period since the last service, indicated in the manufacturer's service schedule. For BlueHDi Diesel versions, the spanner may also be brought on earlier than expected, depending on the degree of deterioration of the engine oil (depending on the country of sale). The rate of deterioration of the engine oil depends on the driving conditions in which the vehicle is used.

Resetting the service indicator
After each service, the service indicator must be reset to zero. If you have carried out the service on your vehicle yourself, switch off the ignition:

Instruments
If you have to disconnect the battery following this operation, lock the vehicle and wait at least five minutes for the reset to be registered.

Retrieving the service information
You can access the service information at any time.
F Press this button.

F Press and hold this button,
F Switch on the ignition; the distance recorder display begins a countdown,
F When the display indicates "=0", release the button; the spanner disappears.

The service information is displayed for a few seconds, then disappears.

Instruments

Engine oil level indicator
O n versions fitted with an electric oil gauge, information on the oil level is displayed in the instrument panel for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on, at the same time as the service information.
The level read will only be correct if the vehicle is on level ground and the engine has been off for more than 30 minutes.

Dipstick
To locate the dipstick and the oil filler cap for the Diesel engine, refer to the corresponding section.

Oil level incorrect
This is indicated by a message in the instrument panel. If the low oil level is confirmed by a check using the dipstick, the level must be topped-up to avoid damage to the engine.

There are 2 marks on the dipstick: - A = max; never exceed this
level, - B = min; top-up the level via
the oil filler, using the grade of oil suited to your engine.

Oil level correct
This is indicated by a message in the instrument panel.

Oil level indicator fault
This is indicated by a message in the instrument panel. Contact a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop.

AdBlue® fluid range indicators
O nce the AdBlue® tank is on reserve or after detection of a fault with the SCR emissions control system, when the ignition is switched on, an indicator displays an estimate of the distance that can be covered, the range, before engine starting is prevented. In the event of simultaneous system fault and low AdBlue® level, the shortest range figure is the one displayed.
The engine start prevention system required by regulations is activated automatically once the AdBlue® tank is empty.

Instruments

In the event of the risk of non-starting related to a lack of AdBlue®

Remaining range greater than 1 500 miles (2 400 km)
When switching on the ignition, there is no automatic display of range in the instrument panel.

Remaining range between 350 and 1500 miles (600 and 2 400 km)

Pressing this button will display the remaining range. You can access this information in the touch screen, if your vehicle has one.
F Select the "Driving" menu. F Select "OPTIONS".
F Then select "Diagnostic".
The range is then displayed temporarily.

When switching on the ignition, this warning lamp comes on, accompanied by an audible signal and the display of a message (e.g.: "Top up emissions additive: Starting prevented in 900 miles") indicating the remaining range expressed in miles or kilometres. When driving, the message is displayed every 200 miles (300 km) until the fluid has been topped-up. G o to a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop to have the AdBlue® topped-up. You can also top-up the tank yourself.
For more information on AdBlue® and the SCR system, and in particular on topping-up the AdBlue®, refer to the corresponding section.

Above 3 000 miles (5 000 km), the value is not specified.

Instruments

Remaining range between 0 and 350 miles (0 and 600 km)
When switching on the ignition, this warning lamp flashes, accompanied by an audible signal and the display of a message (e.g. "Top up emissions additive: Starting prevented in 350 miles") indicating the remaining range expressed in miles or kilometres. When driving, the message is displayed every 30 seconds until the fluid has been topped-up. G o to a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop to have the AdBlue® topped-up. You can also top-up the tank yourself. O therwise you will not be able to restart your engine.

Breakdown related to a lack of AdBlue® When switching on the ignition, this warning lamp flashes, accompanied by an audible signal and the display of the message "Top up emissions
additive: Starting prevented". The AdBlue® tank is empty: the system required by regulations prevents engine starting.
To be able to start the engine, we recommend that you call on a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop for the top-up required. If you carry out the top-up yourself, it is essential to add at least 3.8 litres of AdBlue® to the tank.

For more information on AdBlue® and the SCR system, and in particular on topping-up the AdBlue®, refer to the corresponding section.

Instruments
In the event of a fault with the SCR emissions control system
A system that prevents engine starting is activated automatically from 650 miles (1 100 km) after confirmation of a fault with the SCR emissions control system. Have the system checked by a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop as soon as possible.

In the event of the detection of a fault

During an authorised driving phase (between 650 miles and 0 miles) (1 100 km and 0 km)

Starting prevented

These warning lamps come on, accompanied by an audible signal and the display of the message "E missions fault". The alert is triggered when driving when the fault is detected for the first time, then when switching on the ignition for subsequent journeys, while the fault persists.
If it is a temporary fault, the alert disappears during the next journey, after self-diagnosis of the SCR system.

If a fault with the SCR system is confirmed (after 30 miles (50 km) covered with the permanent display of the message signalling a fault), these warning lamps come on, accompanied by an audible signal and the display of a message (e.g.: "E missions fault: Starting prevented in 150 miles") indicating the remaining range expressed in miles or kilometres. While driving, the message is displayed every 30 seconds while the fault with the SCR system persists. The alert is repeated when switching on the ignition. You should go to a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop as soon as possible. O therwise, you will not be able to restart your engine.

E very time the ignition is switched on, these warning lamps come on, accompanied by an audible signal and the display of the message "E missions fault: Starting prevented".
You have exceeded the authorised driving limit: the starting prevention system inhibits engine starting.
To be able to start the engine, you must call on a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop.

Instruments
Distance recorders
The total and trip distances are displayed for thirty seconds when the ignition is switched off, when the driver's door is opened and when the vehicle is locked or unlocked.

When travelling abroad, you may have to change the units of distance: the display of road speed must be in the official units (miles or km) for the country. The change of units is done via the screen configuration menu, with the vehicle stationary.

Total distance recorder
It measures the total distance travelled by the vehicle since its first registration.

Trip distance recorder
It measures the distance travelled since it was reset to zero by the driver.
F With the ignition on, press this button until zeros appear.

Lighting dimmer
This system allows the brightness of the instruments and controls to be adjusted to suit the ambient
light level.

Instruments You can also switch off the screen. To do this:

F Press on the Settings button.

At the instrument panel

With the touch screen
F Press on the Settings button.

F Select Switch off screen.

F Select "OPTIONS". F Select "Screen configuration".

The screen goes off completely. Press on the screen again (anywhere on its surface) to activate it.

F With the exterior lighting on, press this button to raise the level of brightness.
F With the exterior lighting on, press this button to lower the level of brightness.
As soon as the lighting reaches the required level of brightness, release the button.

F Select the "Brightness" tab.
F Adjust the brightness by moving the cursor.
F Press on "Confirm" to save and quit.

Instruments
Trip computer
System that gives you information on the current journey (range, fuel consumption...).

- The current information with: the range, the current fuel consumption, the Stop & Start time counter.

Display of information

FO r, depending on equipment, press the thumbwheel on the steering wheel.

- Trip "1" with: the average speed, the average fuel consumption, the distance travelled, for the first trip.
Depending on equipment, a 2nd trip is available.
- Trip "2" with: the average speed, the average fuel consumption, the distance travelled, for the second trip.

F Press the button on the end of the wiper control stalk to display the different trip computer tabs in turn.

Trips "1" and "2" are independent but their use is identical. For example, trip "1" can be used for daily figures, and trip "2" for monthly figures.

Trip reset
With LCD text instrument panel

F When the desired trip is displayed, press the reset button in the instrument panel for more than two seconds.
With LCD text or matrix instrument panel

FO r, depending on equipment, press the thumbwheel on the steering wheel for more than two seconds.

F When the trip is displayed, press the button on the end of the wiper control stalk.

Instruments
1
39

Instruments

A few definitions
Range
(miles or km) The distance which can still be travelled with the fuel remaining in the tank (related to the average fuel consumption over the last few miles (kilometres) travelled).
This value may vary following a change in the style of driving or the relief, resulting in a significant change in the current fuel consumption.
When the range falls below 20 miles (30 km), dashes are displayed. After filling with at least 8 litres of fuel, the range is recalculated and is displayed when it exceeds 60 miles (100 km).
If dashes are displayed continuously while driving in place of the digits, contact a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop.
40

Current fuel consumption
(mpg or l/100 km or km/l) Calculated over the last few seconds.

Distance travelled
(miles or km) Calculated since the last trip reset.

This function is only displayed from 20 mph (30 km/h).
Average fuel consumption
(mpg or l/100 km or km/l) Calculated since the last trip reset.

Average speed
(mph or km/h) Calculated since the last trip reset.

Touch screen
U se the buttons on either side of the touch screen for access to the menus, then press the virtual buttons in the touch screen.

Menus

U se this button to confirm.

U se this button to quit.

Instruments
1

As a safety measure, the driver must only carry out operations requiring sustained attention with the vehicle stationary.

Driving. Allows certain functions to be switched on and off and their settings adjusted. Radio Media.
Connected navigation.
Adjust volume/Mute. O n/O ff.

Settings. Allows configuration of the display and the system. Connectivity.
Telephone.
For more information on the touch screen, refer to the Audio and telematics section.

Instruments

Driving menu
The systems with settings that can be adjusted are detailed in the table below. For more information on a driving assistance system refer to the corresponding section.

Button

Corresponding function

Comments

Under-inflation initialisation Reinitialisation of the under-inflation system.

Blind spot monitoring system
Stop & Start system

Activation/Deactivation of the function. Activation/Deactivation of the function.

Lane departure warning system
or

Activation/Deactivation of the function.

Automatic headlamp dip

Activation/Deactivation of the function.

Button

Corresponding function
Vehicle settings To deactivate/activate a function, press O FF/O N. To modify a setting (lighting duration, ...) or find additional information, press the symbol for the function.

Instruments
Comments
Access to other functions with settings that can be adjusted. Select or deselect the tabs at the bottom of the touch screen to sort the display of the desired functions. - Lighting:
- "Directional headlamps": activation/deactivation of the directional headlamps. - "G uide-me-home lighting": activation/deactivation of the automatic guide-me-home lighting. - "Welcome lighting": activation/deactivation of the exterior welcome lighting. - "Mood lighting": activation/deactivation of the interior mood lighting. - Access: - "Hands-Free Access": activation/deactivation of the motorized opening and closing of a side
door by the hands-free system, - "Locks your vehicle after the motorized closing of a side door, using hands-free access.":
activation/deactivation of the locking of your vehicle after the motorized closing of a side door by the hands-free system. - Assistance (driving aids): - "Rear wiper in reverse": activation/deactivation of the operation of the rear wiper in reverse. - "Recommended speed display": activation/deactivation of the speed limit recognition system, allowing a speed setting to be given to the cruise control or speed limiter. - "Collision risk alert and automatic braking": activation/deactivation of collision risk alerts. - "Fatigue Detection System": activation/deactivation of the driver fatigue detection system.

Diagnostic Parking sensors Adjust speed settings

List of current alerts. Activation/Deactivation of the function. Memorisation of speed settings for the speed limiter or active cruise control.

Instruments

Setting the time and date

With the audio system

With the touch screen
F Press on Settings for acces to the different menus.

F Select "OPTIONS".

You can choose to synchronise the time and date with the G PS navigation system (if fitted to your vehicle) so that these settings are adjusted automatically.

F Press the MENU button for access to the main menu.

F Select "Setting the time-date".

F Press the "7" or "8" button to select the Personalisation-configuration menu, then confirm by pressing the "OK" button.
F Press the "5" or "6" button to select the Display configuration menu then confirm by pressing the "OK" button.

F Select the "Date" or "Time" tab.
F Modify the settings in the associated "Date" or "Time" fields then press on "Confirm".
F Press on "Confirm" to save and quit.

F Press the "5" or "6" and "7" or "8" buttons to set the date and time, then confirm by pressing the "OK" button.

Key

Key, remote control
It allows the central locking or unlocking of the vehicle using the door lock or from a distance. It also allows the vehicle to be located, the fuel filler cap to be removed and refitted and the engine to be started or switched off, as well as providing protection against theft.

The key allows the central locking or unlocking of the vehicle using the door lock. It also allows the fuel filler cap to be removed and refitted and the engine started or switched off.

The remote control buttons are not active when the ignition is switched on.

Unfolding / Folding the key
F Press this button to unfold or fold the key.
If you do not press the button, you risk damaging the remote control.

Access
2
45

Access
Unlocking
Using the key

Using the remote control
F To unlock the vehicle, press this button.

Using the remote control with electric sliding side door(s)

F To unlock the vehicle, turn the key to the front of the vehicle.
F Then pull the handle to open the door. If your vehicle has an alarm, this is not deactivated. O pening a door will trigger the alarm, which can then be stopped by switching the ignition on.

F To unlock the vehicle and open the side door, press and hold this button until the door has opened.
U nlocking is signalled by the rapid flashing of the direction indicators for about two seconds. Depending on version, the door mirrors unfold at the same time.

Locking
Using the key
F To unlock the vehicle totally, turn the key to the rear of the vehicle.
If your vehicle has an alarm, this will not be activated.
Using the remote control
F To lock the vehicle totally, press this button.
If fitted to your vehicle, pressing and holding this button closes the windows. The window stops when you release the button.

E nsure that no person or object might prevent the correct closing of the windows. Be particularly aware of children when operating the windows.
If a door is not fully closed (except the right-hand door with side-hinged doors): - vehicle stationary and the engine
running, this warning lamp comes on, accompanied by an alert message for a few seconds, - vehicle moving (speed above 6 mph (10 km/h)), this warning lamp comes on, accompanied by an audible signal and an alert message for a few seconds.
Driving with the doors locked may render access for the emergency services difficult in an emergency. As a safety measure (children on board), never leave the vehicle without taking your remote control, even for a short period.

Access

If your vehicle is not fitted with an alarm, locking is confirmed by the fixed illumination of the direction indicators for about two seconds. According to version, the door mirrors fold at the same time.

If one of the openings (doors or boot) is still open, the central locking does not take place. When the vehicle is locked, if it is unlocked inadvertently, it will lock itself again automatically after about thirty seconds unless a door is opened. And if your vehicle has an alarm, this will be reactivated (with volumetric monitoring, even if this had been deactivated). The folding and unfolding of the door mirrors by the remote control can be deactivated by a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop.

Access
Deadlocking
Deadlocking renders the exterior and interior door controls inoperative. It also deactivates the manual central control button. Therefore, never leave anyone inside the vehicle when it is deadlocked.

Using the remote control
To lock the vehicle: F Press this button.
Depending on version, the door mirrors fold at the same time.

Using the key

To deadlock the vehicle:
F Then within five seconds after locking, press this button again.

To deadlock the vehicle: F Turn the key to the rear of the vehicle. F Then within five seconds, turn the key to
the rear again.

If your vehicle is not fitted with an alarm, deadlocking is signalled by the fixed illumination of the direction indicators for about two seconds.

Locating your vehicle
This function allows you to identify your vehicle from a distance, particularly in poor light. Your vehicle must have been locked for more than five seconds.
F Press this button
This switches on the courtesy lamps and the direction indicators flash for about ten seconds.

Anti-theft protection
Electronic engine immobiliser
The remote control contains an electronic chip which has a special code. When the ignition is switched on, this code must be recognised in order for starting to be possible. This electronic engine immobiliser locks the engine management system a few moments after the ignition is switched off and prevents starting of the engine by anyone who does not have the key.

Remote operation of lighting
If fitted to your vehicle.
A short press on this button switches on the lighting remotely (sidelamps, dipped beam headlamps and number plate lamps).

A second press on this button before the end of the timed period cancels the remote lighting.

Keep safely, away from your vehicle, the label attached to the keys given to you on acquisition of the vehicle.

Access
2
49

Access

Back-up control(s)
For mechanically locking and unlocking the doors in the event of a fault with the central locking system or a battery failure.

Locking the driver's door

Locking the front passenger door
FO pen the door.

Locking the sliding side door
F If fitted to your vehicle, check that the electric child lock is not on.
FO pen the door.

F Insert the key in the door lock and turn it to the rear.
Unlocking
F Insert the key in the door lock and turn it to the front.
If your vehicle has an alarm, it will not be deactivated/activated on unlocking/ locking the vehicle. O pening a door will trigger the alarm, which can be stopped by switching on the ignition.

F Remove the cap on on the edge of the door.
F Insert the key into the latch aperture (without forcing) and turn the assembly.
F Remove the key and refit the cap. F Close the door and check from the outside
that it has locked correctly.
Unlocking
U se the interior door handle.

F Remove the cap on the edge of the door. F Insert the key into the latch aperture
(without forcing) and turn the assembly. F Remove the key and refit the cap. F Close the door and check from the outside
that it has locked correctly.
Unlocking
FU se the interior door handle.
For more information on the Child lock, refer to the corresponding section.

Locking the side-hinged doors
F If fitted to your vehicle, check that the electric child lock is not on.
FO pen the left-hand door.

Access

Remote control problem
Following disconnection of the vehicle battery, replacement of the remote control battery or in the event of a remote control malfunction, you can no longer unlock, lock or locate your vehicle. F First of all, use the key in the lock to unlock
or lock your vehicle. F Then reinitialise the remote control. If the problem persists, contact a PEUGEO T dealer as soon as possible.

Changing the battery
Battery ref.: CR1620 / 3 volts. If the battery is flat, you are informed by lighting of this warning
lamp in the instrument panel, an audible signal and a message in the screen.

F Insert the key into the latch aperture on the edge of the door (without forcing) and slide the assembly upward.
F Remove the key. F Close the door and check from the outside
that it has locked correctly.
Unlocking
FU se the interior door handle.

Reinitialisation
F Lock the driver's door using the key.
F Press one of the remote control buttons.

F Turn the key to position 2 (Ignition on). F Switch off the ignition and remove the key
from the ignition switch. The remote control is fully operational again.

FU nclip the cover using a screwdriver in the cut-out.
F Remove the cover. FE xtract the flat battery from its location. F Place the new battery into its location
observing the original direction. F Clip the cover in place.
Do not throw the remote control batteries away, they contain metals which are harmful to the environment. Take them to an approved collection point.

Access
"Keyless Entry and Starting"

Unlocking
F To unlock the vehicle, press this button.

Locking
F To totally lock the vehicle, press this button.

Remote control

With electric sliding door(s)
F To unlock the vehicle and open the side door, press and hold this button until the door has opened

It allows the central locking or unlocking of the vehicle from a distance. It is also used to locate and start the vehicle, as well as providing protection against theft.

U nlocking is signalled by the rapid flashing of the direction indicators for about two seconds. Depending on version, the door mirrors unfold at the same time.

If fitted to your vehicle, pressing and holding this button allows the windows to be closed. The window stops when you release the button.
E nsure that no person or object could prevent the correct closing of the windows. Be particularly aware of children when operating the windows.
If a door is not correctly shut (except the right-hand door with side-hinged rear doors): - vehicle stationary and the engine
running, this warning lamp comes on, accompanied by an alert message for a few seconds, - vehicle moving (speed above 6 mph (10 km/h)), this warning lamp comes on, accompanied by an audible signal and an alert message for a few seconds.

Driving with the doors locked may make access to the passenger compartment by the emergency services more difficult in the event of an emergency. As a safety measure (children on board), never leave the vehicle without your remote control, even for a short period.
If your vehicle is not fitted with an alarm, locking is signalled by the fixed illumination of the direction indicators for about two seconds. Depending on version, the door mirrors fold at the same time.
If one of the doors remains open, the central locking does not take place. If the vehicle is inadvertently unlocked, it will automatically lock itself again after about thirty seconds, if no door is opened. And if fitted to your vehicle, the alarm is reactivated (with volumetric monitoring, even if you had deactivated it).
The automatic folding and unfolding of the electric door mirrors can be deactivated by a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop.

Deadlocking
Deadlocking renders the exterior and interior door controls inoperative. It also deactivates the manual central control button. Therefore, never leave anyone inside the vehicle when it is deadlocked.
To lock the vehicle, F Press this button.
Depending on version, the door mirrors fold at the same time.

Access

To deadlock the vehicle.
F Then within five seconds after locking, press this button again.
If your vehicle is not fitted with an alarm, deadlocking is signalled by the fixed illumination of the direction indicators for about two seconds.

Access
"Keyless Entry and Starting" on your person

In the ignition on (accessories) position, with the "START/STO P" button, the hands-free function is deactivated. For more information on "Keyless Entry and Starting" and in particular the "ignition on" position, refer to the corresponding section.

This allows the unlocking, locking and starting the vehicle while keeping the remote control on your person.

The unlocking, locking or deadlocking does not take place: - if the ignition is on, - if one of the doors or the boot is still
open, - if the key for the Keyless E ntry and
Starting system has been left inside the vehicle. When the vehicle is locked (with the remote control or Keyless E ntry and Starting), if it is unlocked inadvertently, it will lock itself again automatically after about thirty seconds unless a door has been opened. And if your vehicle has an alarm, this will be reactivated (with volumetric monitoring, even if this had been deactivated).

The folding and unfolding of the door mirrors by the remote control can be deactivated by a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop.
As a safety measure (children on board), never leave the vehicle without taking your Keyless E ntry and Starting remote control, even for a short period. G uard against theft when the Keyless E ntry and Starting remote control is in the recognition zone with the vehicle unlocked. In order to preserve the charge of the cell battery in the remote control, the "hands-free" functions go into extended stand-by after 21 days of non-use. To restore these functions, press one of the remote control buttons or start the engine with the remote control at the reader.

Unlocking

With electric sliding slide door(s)

With a tailgate

Access
2

F To unlock the vehicle, remote control on your person and in the recognition zone A, pass your hand behind one of the door handles (front doors, manual sliding side doors and side-hinged doors).
F Pull the handle to open the corresponding door.

F To unlock the vehicle, remote control on your person and in the recognition zone A, pull and release the door handle to trigger the electric powered opening of the corresponding door.

F To unlock the vehicle, remote control on your person and in the recognition zone A, pull the tailgate handle.
F Raise the tailgate.

Access
With an opening rear screen in the tailgate Locking

With electric sliding side door(s)

F To unlock the vehicle, remote control on your person and in the recognition zone A, press the unlocking button for the tailgate.
The screen partly opens.

F To totally lock the vehicle, with the remote control in the recognition zone A, press with a finger or thumb at the markings on one of the front or manual sliding side door handles.

F To totally lock the vehicle, with the remote control in the recognition zone A, press with a finger or thumb at the markings on one of the front door handles.

U nlocking is signalled by the rapid flashing of the direction indicators for about two seconds. Depending on version, the door mirrors unfold, the alarm is deactivated.

If a door is not properly closed (except the right-hand door with sidehinged rear doors): - vehicle stationary and the engine
running, this warning lamp comes on, accompanied by an alert message for a few seconds, - vehicle moving (speed above 6 mph (10 km/h)), this warning lamp comes on, accompanied by an audible signal and an alert message for a few seconds.

With side-hinged doors

With a tailgate

Access

E nsure that no one might prevent the correct operation of the windows. Be particularly aware of children when operating the windows.

F To lock the vehicle, with the remote control in the recognition zone A, press the lefthand door locking control.

F To lock the vehicle, with the remote control in the recognition zone A, press the tailgate locking control.

If fitted to your vehicle, pressing and holding the locking controls allows the windows to be opened. The window stops when you release the button.

If your vehicle is not fitted with an alarm, locking is confirmed by fixed illumination of the direction indicators for about two seconds. Depending on version, the door mirrors fold at the same time.
Driving with the doors locked may render access for the emergency services difficult in an emergency.

Access
Deadlocking

With electric sliding side door(s) With side-hinged doors

Deadlocking renders the exterior and interior door controls inoperative. It also deactivates the manual central locking button. Therefore, never leave anyone inside the vehicle when it is deadlocked.

F To totally lock the vehicle, with the remote control in the recognition zone A, press with a finger or thumb at the markings on one of the front door handles.
F To deadlock the vehicle, press the marking again within five seconds.

F To lock the vehicle, with the remote control in the recognition zone A, press the lefthand door locking control.
F To deadlock the vehicle, press the control again within five seconds.

F To totally lock the vehicle, with the remote control in the recognition zone A, press with a finger or thumb at the markings on one of the front or manual sliding side door handles.
F To deadlock the vehicle, press the marking again within five seconds.

Access

With a tailgate
F To lock the vehicle, with the remote control in the recognition zone A, press the tailgate locking control.
F To deadlock the vehicle, press the control again within five seconds.
If your vehicle is not fitted with an alarm, deadlocking is confirmed by fixed illumination of the direction indicators for about two seconds.

Remote operation of lighting
If fitted to your vehicle. A short press on this button switches on the lighting remotely (sidelamps, dipped beam headlamps and number plate lamps).
A second press on this button before the end of the timed period cancels the remote lighting.

In the event of a fault, you are informed by illumination of this warning lamp, an audible signal and a message in the screen. In this case, your vehicle will not start; contact a PEUGEO T dealer as soon as possible.
Keep safely, away from your vehicle, the label attached to the keys given to you on acquisition of the vehicle.

Access

Back-up control(s)
Integral key
It is used to lock and unlock the vehicle when the remote control cannot operate: - cell battery flat, vehicle battery discharged
or disconnected, ... - vehicle located in an area with strong
electromagnetic signals.

Locking the driver's door

Locking the front passenger door
FO pen the door.

F Press and hold button 1 to extract the integral key 2.
If the alarm is activated, the audible signal triggered on opening a door with the key (integral with the remote control) will stop when the ignition is switched on.
60

F Insert the integral key into the door lock, then turn it to the rear.
Unlocking
F Insert the integral key into the door lock, then turn it to the front.
If your vehicle has an alarm, it will not be deactivated/activated on unlocking/ locking the vehicle. O pening a door will trigger the alarm, which can be stopped by switching the ignition on. To deadlock the vehicle, turn the key again within five seconds of locking.

F Remove the cap on on the edge of the door.
F Insert the key into the latch aperture (without forcing) and turn the assembly.
F Remove the key and refit the cap. F Close the door and check from the outside
that the vehicle has locked correctly.
Unlocking
FU se the interior door handle.

Locking a sliding side door
F If fitted to your vehicle, check that the electric child lock is not on.
FO pen the door.

Locking the side-hinged doors
F If fitted to your vehicle, check that the electric child lock is not on.
FO pen the left-hand side-hinged door.

Access
2

F Remove the cap on the edge of the door. F Insert the key into the latch aperture
(without forcing) and turn the assembly. F Remove the key and refit the cap. F Close the door and check from the outside
that the vehicle has locked correctly.
Unlocking
FU se the interior door handle.

F Insert the key (without forcing) into the latch aperture located on the edge of the door and slide the assembly upward.
F Remove the key. F Close the door and check from the outside
that the vehicle has locked correctly.
Unlocking
FU se the interior door handle.

For more information on the child lock, refer to the corresponding section.
61

Access
Remote control problem
Following disconnection of the vehicle battery, replacement of the remote control battery or in the event of a remote control malfunction, you can no longer unlock, lock or locate your vehicle. F First, use the integral key in the door lock
to unlock or lock your vehicle. F Then, reinitialise the remote control.

Changing the cell battery
Battery ref.: CR2032 / 3 volts. This replacement battery is available from a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop. A message appears in the instrument panel screen when replacement of the battery is needed.

Reinitialisation
FU nlock the driver's door using the integral key.
F Press one of the remote control buttons.

F Place the remote control against the reader.
F Keeping it in place, switch on the ignition by pressing "START/STO P".
The remote control is fully operational again.

F Place the integral key in the lock to unlock your vehicle.

FU nclip the cover using a small screwdriver at the cutout.
F Lift off the cover. F Remove the flat battery from its location. F Fit the new battery into its location
observing the original direction of fitment. F Clip the cover onto the casing.

If the problem persists, contact a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop as soon as possible.

Do not throw the remote control batteries away, they contain metals which are harmful to the environment. Take them to an approved collection point.

Access

Lost keys, remote control
Visit a PEUGEO T dealer with the vehicle's registration certificate, your personal identification documents and if possible, the label bearing the key code. The PEUGEO T dealer will be able to retrieve the key code and the transponder code required to order a new key.

Locking the vehicle
Driving with the doors locked may make access to the passenger compartment by the emergency services more difficult in an emergency. As a safety precaution (with children on board), remove the key from the ignition or take the remote control with you when leaving the vehicle, even for a short time.

When purchasing a secondhand vehicle
Have the key codes memorised by a PEUGEO T dealer, to ensure that the keys in your possession are the only ones which can start the vehicle.

Remote control
The high frequency remote control is a sensitive system; do not operate it while it is in your pocket as there is a possibility that it may unlock the vehicle, without you being aware of it. Do not repeatedly press the buttons of your remote control out of range and out of sight of your vehicle. You run the risk of stopping it from working and the remote control would have to be reinitialised. The remote control does not operate when the key is in the ignition, even when the ignition is switched off.

Electrical interference
The Keyless E ntry and Starting remote control may not operate if close to certain electronic devices: telephone, laptop computer, strong magnetic fields, ...
Anti-theft protection
Do not make any modifications to the electronic engine immobiliser system; this could cause malfunctions. Do not forget to turn the steering to engage the steering lock.

Accumulations (water, dust, grime, salt...) on the inner surface of the door handle may affect detection. If cleaning the inner surface of the door handle using a cloth does not restore detection, contact a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop. A sudden splash of water (stream of water, high pressure jet washer, ...) may be identified by the system as the desire to open the vehicle.

Access

Locking / unlocking from inside

Locking the vehicle

Manual

F Press this button.

Unlocking the vehicle
F Press this button.

This button is inoperative if the vehicle has been locked or deadlocked from outside (using the key, remote control or Keyless E ntry and Starting, according to equipment) or if one of the doors is still open.
Automatic
The cabin doors lock automatically while driving (speed above 6 mph (10 km/h)); the indicator lamp comes on.
F To activate or deactivate this function, with the ignition on, press this button until a message appears in the screen.

The indicator lamp comes on to confirm the locking.
When carrying long objects with the tailgate or rear doors open, you can press this button to lock just the cabin doors. When locking from inside, the door mirrors do not fold.
Driving with the doors locked may make access to the passenger compartment by the emergency services more difficult in an emergency.
If the vehicle is deadlocked or locked with the remote control or the door handles, the button is not active. In this case, use the key or the remote control to unlock.

The indicator lamp goes off to confirm the unlocking.
The indicator lamp also goes off when unlocking one or more doors.

Access

Front doors
Opening
From outside
F After unlocking the vehicle (using the key, remote control or Keyless E ntry and Starting, depending on equipment, pull the door handle. For more information on the Key, Remote control or Keyless Entry and Starting and in particular unlocking the vehicle, refer to the corresponding section.

From inside
Vehicle locked. F Pull the interior control lever on a door to
totally unlock the vehicle and open the door.
If the door is unlocked, pull the handle to open the door. The interior door controls do not operate when the vehicle is deadlocked.

Closing
F Push or pull the door to close it, then lock it.
When a door is not fully closed: - vehicle stationary and engine
running, this warning lamp comes on, accompanied by an alert message for a few seconds, - vehicle moving (speed above 6 mph (10 km/h)), this warning lamp comes on, accompanied by an audible signal and an alert message for a few seconds.

For more information on the Key, Remote control or Keyless Entry and Starting and in particular locking the vehicle, refer to the corresponding section.

Access

Manual sliding side door(s)

From outside

From inside

Vehicle unlocked and child lock deactivated.
F Pull the handle toward the rear to open the door.
For more information on the Child lock, refer to the corresponding section.

F After unlocking the vehicle (using the key, remote control or Keyless E ntry and Starting, depending on equipment) pull the door handle.

To hold the sliding side door in the open position, open the door fully to engage the latch (located at the bottom of the door).

For more information on the Key, Remote control or Keyless Entry and Starting and in particular unlocking the vehicle, refer to the corresponding section.

Take care not to block the guide space on the floor to allow the door to slide correctly. As a safety measure and for functional reasons, do not drive with the sliding side door open.

Closing
From outside

From inside

F Pull the handle toward you, then to the front, and if necessary lock the vehicle.

F Push the handle forward to close the door, and if necessary lock the vehicle.

For more information on the Key, Remote control or Keyless Entry and Starting and in particular locking the vehicle, refer to the corresponding section.

Access

If a sliding side door is not fully closed: - vehicle stationary and engine
running, this warning lamp comes on, accompanied by an alert message for a few seconds, - vehicle moving (speed above 6 mph (10 km/h)), this warning lamp comes on, accompanied by an audible signal and an alert message for a few seconds.

Access

Electric sliding side door(s)

The exterior and interior door handles and the interior buttons allow the electrically powered movement of the door to be started. O pening and closing of the doors is accompanied by an audible signal.

Opening From outside
Using the remote control

Using the handle

From inside
Using the handle

F Door unlocked, press and hold this button until the corresponding sliding side door has opened.
F Press this button again to reverse the movement of the door.

F Door unlocked, pull and release the handle to start the electrically powered opening of the door.
F Pull the handle again to reverse the movement of the door.

Vehicle unlocked and child lock deactivated.
F Pull the handle toward the rear to start the electrically powered opening of the door.

The remote controls buttons are not active with the ignition switched on.
68

From inside, unlocking then Using the button(s) at the front opening
For more information on the Child lock, refer to the corresponding section.

Access
Using the button(s) on the door pillar
2

F Child lock deactivated, to unlock the vehicle and start the electrically powered opening of a door, press the button for the corresponding door.
F Pressing the button again reverses the movement of the door.

The button is not operational and pressing it results in an audible signal, if: - the vehicle is moving, - the vehicle has been locked or
deadlocked from outside (using the key, remote control or Keyless E ntry and Starting, depending on equipment), - the child lock is on (activated), The button for the left-hand door is not operational and pressing it results in an audible signal if the fuel filler flap is open.

The button is not available and accompanied by an audible signal, if: - the vehicle is moving, - the vehicle has been locked or
deadlocked from outside (using the key, remote control or Keyless E ntry and Starting, depending on equipment), - the child lock is on (activated), The button for the left-hand door is not available and is accompanied by an audible signal if the fuel filler flap is open.
69

Access
Closing From outside
Using the remote control

Using the handle

From inside
Using the button(s) at the front

F Press and hold this button until the sliding door has closed.

F Pull and release the handle to start the electrically powered opening of the door.
F Pull the handle again to reverse the movement of the door.

F To start the electrically powered opening of the door, press the button for the corresponding door.
F Pressing the button again reverses the movement of the door.

F Press this button again to reverse the movement of the door.
The remote controls buttons are not active with the ignition switched on.
70

The button is not operational and pressing it results in an audible signal, if the speed of the vehicle is above 20 mph (30 km/h).

Using the button(s) on the door pillar
F To start the electrically powered opening of a door, press the button for the corresponding door.
F Pressing the button again reverses the movement of the door.

If a sliding door is not fully closed: - vehicle stationary and engine
running, this warning lamp comes on, accompanied by an alert message for a few seconds, - vehicle moving (speed above 6 mph (10 km/h)), this warning lamp comes on, accompanied by an audible signal and an alert message for a few seconds.

The button is not operational and pressing it results in an audible signal, if the speed of the vehicle is above 20 mph (30 km/h).

Access
2
71

Access

Manual or electric sliding side door(s)

General recommendations
The doors must only be operated when the vehicle is stationary. For your safety and for that of your passengers, as well as for correct operation of the doors, you are strongly advised not to drive with a door open. Always check that it is safe to operate the door and in particular, be sure not to leave children or animals near the door controls without supervision. The audible warning, illumination of the "door open" warning lamp and the message in the multifunction screen are there to remind you. Contact a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop to deactivate these warnings. Lock your vehicle when using an automatic car wash.

Before any opening or closing and during any movement of the doors, ensure that no person, animal or object is protruding through the window frame or might prevent the intended manoeuvre, either inside or outside the vehicle. If this advice is not followed, injuries or damage may occur if a person or an object is trapped or caught. E lectric closing and opening of the doors is not possible above 2 mph (3 km/h): - If you set off with the door(s) open,
you must slow down to below 2 mph (3 km/h) in order to close the door(s). - Any attempt to open a door electrically using the interior handle while driving, results in only being possible to open the door manually. - This situation is accompanied by the audible warning, illumination of the "door open" warning lamp and the message in the multifunction screen. To release the door and be able to operate it again, it is necessary to stop the vehicle.

The electric controls are inhibited in the event of an impact. Manual opening and closing remain possible.
While starting the engine, the movement of a door is interrupted and restored once the engine is running.
Depending on the engine, in Stop mode of Stop & Start, if the door is closed and you initiate opening of the door, the door opens partially and stops. When the engine changes automatically to Start mode, the door continues its movement.

The doors and the overall dimensions of the vehicle

Safety / Obstacle detection with electric door(s)

Fuel filler flap

Access
2

When open, a door projects beyond the body. Be sure to take this into account when you park alongside a wall, a post or a high kerb...

The obstacle detection system is triggered when the moving door encounters an obstacle with a certain level of physical resistance. - If an obstacle is detected while the door is
closing, the door stops then opens fully. - If an obstacle is detected while the door is
opening, the door stops and then closes. - If an obstacle is detected twice in
succession during a movement of the door, it will no longer close electrically. Close the door manually to reinitialise it.

When open, a door never projects beyond the rear bumper.

If fitted to your vehicle, never open the left-hand sliding side door when the fuel filler flap is open. O therwise you risk damaging the fuel filler flap and the sliding door and causing injury to the person filling the vehicle.
If the fuel filler flap is open and your vehicle has an electric left-hand sliding side door, the door cannot be opened using the opening control button. If required the door can be opened half way manually. The fuel filler flap must be closed to allow the door to open correctly.
73

Access
On a steep slope

It is possible to open and close the doors electrically on slopes of up to 20%. However, if your vehicle is on a slope, with the front of the vehicle facing up, open the door with care. The door may open more quickly due to the incline. O n a steep slope, guide the side door manually to help it to close.

However, if your vehicle is on a slope, with the front of the vehicle facing down, the door may not stay open and may close again jerkily with the risk of injury.
In the case of a steep slope, the door may be driven by its own weight and as a consequence may open or close jerkily. There would not be time for action at the electric controls to take effect. There would not be time for the obstacle detection system to react. Take care not to leave the vehicle on a steep slope with the door(s) open without supervision. If this advice is not followed, injuries or damage may occur if a person or an object is trapped or caught.

Reinitialising electric doors
Following disconnection of the battery with the doors open, it may be necessary to close the doors manually to reinitialise them. If the doors no longer work electrically, reinitialise the door(s) as follows: F Fully close the door(s) manually. F Fully open the door(s) manually. F Close the door(s) manually. F Fully open the door(s) manually. F Close the door(s) manually. O n completion of this procedure, electric operation of the doors is restored. However, if a problem persists following this procedure, contact a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop.

Hands-free sliding side door(s)
Before making the movement with your foot, ensure that you are steady and well positioned, so that you do not lose your balance (rain, snow, ice, mud, ...). Take care not to touch the exhaust tailpipe when making the movement with your foot - risk of burns.

Access
2

By keeping the remote control on your person and with a movement of your foot, the system unlocks and opens the sliding side door or closes and locks it. The remote control must be located at the rear of the vehicle, more than about 30 cm and less than about 2 m from the vehicle.
The automatic locking after closing the door is programmable in the vehicle configuration menu.

F Pass your foot below the rear bumper then remove it, as though kicking (upwards).
The sensor detects your foot approaching and leaving and triggers opening or closing of the side door.
Make the movement without interruption and do not repeat it immediately afterwards or several times. If the door does not open, wait about 2 seconds before trying again. Do not leave your foot in the air.

Access
Opening

If the vehicle is locked, it is unlocked before opening the door.

Closing

With "Hands-free access" activated in the vehicle configuration menu. F With the remote control on your person and
in the recognition zone A, pass your foot under the outer rear bumper, on the side you want to open the door.
Confirmation that the door is going to open is signalled by the direction indicators flashing for a few seconds, accompanied by an audible signal. The movement of the door is reversed if you pass your foot under the bumper during operation of the door. If fitted to your vehicle, the electric door mirrors unfold on unlocking the vehicle.
76

With "Hands-free access" activated in the vehicle configuration menu. F With the remote control on your person and
in the recognition zone A, pass your foot under the outer rear bumper, on the side you want to close the door.
O nce the door has closed, the vehicle locks itself automatically, if "Hands-free access self-locking" has been selected in the vehicle configuration menu.
Confirmation that the door is going to close is signalled by the direction indicators flashing for a few seconds, accompanied by an audible signal. The movement of the door is reversed if you pass your foot under the bumper during operation of the door. If fitted to your vehicle, the electric door mirrors fold on locking the vehicle.

Access

Deactivation
By default, hands-free access is activated. The function can be deactivated in the vehicle configuration menu.

With the audio system

Operating fault
An audible signal repeated three times indicates a fault with the system.

Automatic locking
The vehicle locks itself following the hands-free closing of a sliding door. The automatic locking can be deactivated in the vehicle configuration menu.

In the "Personalisation-Configuration" menu, activate/deactivate "Hands-free access".

Contact a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop to have the system checked.

With the touch screen
In the vehicle settings menu, activate/ deactivate "Hands-free access".
Then, if you want automatic locking after closing the door, activate/deactivate "Handsfree access self-locking".

Access
If "Hands-free access self-locking" is selected in the vehicle menu and after closing the door, check that your vehicle has locked correctly. This is because locking will not take place: - if the ignition is on, - if one of the doors or the tailgate is
open, - if a "Keyless E ntry and Starting"
remote control is inside the vehicle. If a number of gestures with your foot have no effect, wait a few seconds before starting again. The system is automatically deactivated in heavy rain or with accumulations of snow. If the system fails to work, check that the remote control is not exposed to a source of electromagnetic interference (smartphone, ...). O peration may be affected if using a prosthetic leg. This system may not work correctly if your vehicle is fitted with a towbar.

The sliding door may open or close erratically if: - your vehicle is fitted with a towbar, - you attach or detach a trailer, - you fit or remove a bicycle carrier, - you load or unload bicycles on a
bicycle carrier, - you remove or raise something
behind the vehicle, - an animal approaches the bumper, - you wash your vehicle, - a service is being carried out on
your vehicle, - you change a wheel. To avoid unwanted operation, keep the key away from the detection zone (as well as the interior sides of the boot) or deactivate the function in the vehicle configuration menu.

E nsure that no person or object could prevent the correct opening or closing of the doors. Be aware of children when operating the doors.

Side-hinged rear doors
The side-hinged rear doors are asymmetrical. The left-hand door is fitted with a lock.
From outside

Access

Closing
F Close first the right-hand door, then the left-hand door.
If the left-hand door is closed first, a buffer stop located on the edge of the right-hand door prevents it closing.

F After unlocking the vehicle (using the key, remote control or Keyless E ntry and Starting, depending on equipment) pull the door handle.

F After first opening the left-hand door, pull the lever A towards you to open the righthand door.

For more information on the Key, Remote control or Keyless Entry and Starting and in particular unlocking the vehicle, refer to the corresponding section.

If the left-hand door is not fully closed (the right-hand door is not detected): - vehicle stationary and engine
running, this warning lamp comes on, accompanied by an alert message for a few seconds, - vehicle moving (speed above 6 mph (10 km/h)), this warning lamp comes on, accompanied by an audible signal and an alert message for a few seconds.
79

Access
Opening to approximately 180°
If fitted to your vehicle, a check strap system that allows the doors to be opened from about 90° to about 180°.

From inside
Opening
Vehicle locked and child lock off (deactivated).

If the child lock is on (activated), the handle is inoperative.
For more information on the Child lock, refer to the corresponding section.

F Pull the yellow control when the door is open.
The check strap will engage again automatically on closing.
When parked with the rear doors open to 90°, the doors mask the rear lamps. To signal your position to other road users driving in the same direction who may not have seen your vehicle, use a warning triangle or other device required by the legislation in your country.

F Twist this handle down to fully unlock the vehicle and open the right hand door.
Vehicle unlocked and child lock off (deactivated).
F Twist this handle down to open the righthand door.

Closing
F First close the right-hand door, then the left-hand door.

Tailgate
Opening

Closing

Access

Back-up control
It allows the mechanical unlocking of the tailgate in the event of a battery or central locking system malfunction.

F After unlocking the vehicle with the key, the remote control or the Keyless E ntry and Starting, pull the handle, then raise the tailgate.

F Lower the tailgate using the interior grab handle then push it home to fully close it.
If the tailgate is not fully closed: - vehicle stationary and engine
running, this warning lamp comes on, accompanied by an alert message for a few seconds,

Unlocking
F If fitted to your vehicle and if necessary, fold back the rear seats to gain access to the lock from inside.

For more information on the Key, Remote control or Keyless Entry and Starting and in particular unlocking the vehicle, refer to the corresponding section.

- vehicle moving (speed above 6 mph (10 km/h)), this warning lamp comes on, accompanied by an audible signal and an alert message for a few seconds.
For more information on the Key, Remote control or Keyless Entry and Starting and in particular on locking the vehicle, refer to the corresponding section.

F Insert a small screwdriver into hole A of the lock to unlock the tailgate.
F Move the latch to the right.
Locking after closing
If the fault persists after closing again, the tailgate will remain locked.

Access

Tailgate rear screen
The opening rear screen allows you to access the rear of the vehicle directly, without having to open the tailgate.

Closing

Opening

After unlocking the vehicle using the key, remote control or Keyless E ntry and Starting (depending on equipment) press this control and raise the rear screen to open it.
For more information on the Key, Remote control or Keyless Entry and Starting , and in particular unlocking the vehicle, refer to the corresponding section.

Close the rear screen by pressing the centre of the glass until it is fully closed.
If the tailgate rear screen is not fully closed: - vehicle stationary and the engine
running, this warning lamp comes on, accompanied by an alert message for a few seconds, - vehicle moving (speed above 6 mph (10 km/h)), this warning lamp comes on, accompanied by an audible signal and an alert message for a few seconds.

For more information on the Key, Remote control or Keyless Entry and Starting , and in particular unlocking the vehicle, refer to the corresponding section.
The tailgate and tailgate screen cannot both be open at the same time, to avoid damaging them.

Alarm

Exterior perimeter
The system checks for opening of the vehicle. The alarm is triggered if anyone tries to open one of the doors or the bonnet.

System which protects and provides a deterrent against theft and break-ins.

Volumetric
The system monitors the passenger compartment for any variation in volume. The alarm is triggered if someone breaks the windscreen, penetrates the passenger compartment or moves around inside the vehicle.

Self-protection function
The system checks for the disconnection of any of its components. The alarm is triggered if the battery, the button or the siren wiring is disconnected or damaged.
For all work on the alarm system, contact a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop.

If your vehicle is fitted with the programmable heating / ventilation, volumetric monitoring is not compatible with this system. For more information on Programmable Heating / Ventilation, refer to the corresponding section.

Access

Total protection

Activation
F Switch off the ignition and get out of the vehicle.
F Lock the vehicle using the remote control.

or
F Lock the vehicle using the "Keyless E ntry and Starting" system.
The monitoring system is active: the indicator lamp in the button flashes once per second and the direction indicators come on for about 2 seconds. Following a command to lock the vehicle using the remote control or the Keyless E ntry and Starting system, the exterior perimeter monitoring is activated after a delay of 5 seconds, the interior volumetric monitoring after 45 seconds. If an opening (door, tailgate or side-hinged doors, bonnet...) is not closed fully, the vehicle is not locked but monitoring will be activated after a delay of 45 seconds.

Access

Deactivation
F Press this unlocking button on the remote control.
or
FU nlock the vehicle using the "Keyless E ntry and Starting" system.
The monitoring system is deactivated: the indicator lamp in the button is off and the direction indicators flash for about 2 seconds.
If the vehicle locks itself automatically (this occurs after 30 seconds if one of the doors is not opened), the monitoring system is reactivated automatically.
Protection - exterior perimeter monitoring only
Deactivate the interior volumetric monitoring to avoid unwanted triggering of the alarm in certain cases such as: - occupant(s) present in the vehicle, - leaving a window partially open, - washing your vehicle, - changing a wheel, - towing your vehicle, - transport on a ferry.

Volumetric monitoring
Deactivation
F Switch off the ignition and within ten seconds press this button until its indicator lamp is on fixed.
FG et out of the vehicle.
F Immediately lock the vehicle using the remote control or the "Keyless E ntry and Starting" system.
O nly the exterior perimeter protection system is active: the indicator lamp in the button flashes once per second. To be effective, this deactivation must be done every time the ignition is switched off.
Reactivation
F Deactivate the exterior perimeter monitoring by unlocking the vehicle using the remote control or the "Keyless E ntry and Starting" system.
The indicator lamp in the button goes off.

F Reactivate the full alarm system by locking the vehicle using the remote control or the "Keyless E ntry and starting" system.
The indicator lamp in the button flashes once per second again.
Triggering of the alarm
This is indicated by sounding of the siren and flashing of the direction indicators for thirty seconds. The monitoring functions remain active until the alarm has been triggered eleven times in succession.
When the vehicle is unlocked using the remote control or the "Keyless E ntry and Starting" system, rapid flashing of the indicator lamp in the button informs you that the alarm was triggered during your absence. When the ignition is switched on, this flashing stops immediately.

Failure of the remote control Operating fault

To deactivate the monitoring functions: FU nlock the vehicle using the key (integral
with the remote control with Keyless E ntry and Starting) in the driver's door lock. FO pen the door; the alarm is triggered. F Switch on the ignition; the alarm stops. The indicator lamp in the button goes off.

When the ignition is switched on, fixed illumination of the indicator lamp in the button indicates a fault in the system. Have it checked by a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop.
Automatic activation

Locking the vehicle without activating the alarm
F Lock or deadlock the vehicle using the key (integral with the remote control with Keyless E ntry and Starting) in the driver's door lock.

This function is either not available, an option or is standard. 2 minutes after the last opening (door or boot) is closed, the system is activated automatically.
F To avoid triggering the alarm on entering the vehicle, first press the unlocking button on the remote control or unlock the vehicle using the "Keyless E ntry and Starting" system.

Access
2
85

Access
Electric windows
1. Driver's electric window control 2. Passenger electric window control There are two operating modes:
Manual mode
Press or pull the control, without passing the point of resistance. The window stops when you release the control.

Automatic mode
Press or pull the control, beyond the point of resistance. The window opens or closes fully when the control is released. Pressing the control again stops the movement of the window. The electrical functions of the electric windows are deactivated: - approximately 45 seconds after the ignition
is switched off, - after one of the front doors is opened, if the
ignition is off.

Reinitialisation
Following reconnection of the battery, the safety anti-pinch function must be reinitialised. F Lower the window fully, then raise it, it will
rise in steps of a few centimetres each time the control is pressed. F Repeat the operation until the window is fully closed. F Continue to press the control for at least one second after the window closed position has been reached.
The safety anti-pinch does not operate whilke doing this.

Safety anti-pinch
If your vehicle is fitted with the safety anti-pinch function, when the window rises and meets an obstacle, it stops and partially lowers. In the event of unwanted opening of the window on closing, press the control until the window is fully open. Within the next 4 seconds, pull the control until the window is fully closed. The safety anti-pinch does not operate while doing this.

Always remove the key when leaving the vehicle, even for a short period. If an electric windows meets an obstacle during operation, you must reverse the movement of the window. To do this, press the control concerned. When the driver operates the passenger electric window controls, they must ensure that no one is preventing the correct closing of the windows. The driver must ensure that passengers use the electric windows correctly. Be aware of children when operating the windows.

ease of use and comfort

Steering wheel adjustment

Front seats with manual adjustments

As a safety measure, seat adjustments should only be carried out when stationary.

Forwards-backwards

Height

F When stationary, lower the control lever to release the steering wheel adjustment mechanism.
F Adjust the height and reach to suit your driving position.
F Pull the control lever to lock the steering wheel adjustment mechanism.

As a safety precaution, these operations should only be carried out while the vehicle is stationary.

F Raise the control and slide the seat forwards or backwards.

F If fitted to your vehicle, pull the control upwards to raise or push it downwards to lower, as many times as required to obtain the position required.

Before moving the seat backwards, ensure that there is nothing that might prevent the full travel of the seat, so as to avoid the risk of jamming the seat caused by the presence of objects on the floor behind the seat or rear passengers. If the seat jams, stop the movement immediately.
87

ease of use and comfort
Backrest angle

Lumbar

F Turn the knob to adjust the backrest.

F Pull the control fully up and move the backrest forward or backward.

F Turn the knob manually to obtain the desired level of lumbar support.

For more information on the Seat belts, refer to the corresponding section.
88

Table position for the driver's and/or the front passenger's seat backrest
O n the front passenger's side, this position allows long objects to be carried. O n the driver's side, this position allows rear passengers to be helped out of the vehicle (by the emergency services).

Check that there is no object that could interfere with the movement of a seat, both above and below.

F Place the head restraint in the low position, and if fitted to your vehicle, raise the armrest and fold the table on the back of the seat.

F Pull the control fully up and tip the backrest forward.
To return to the normal position, pull the control up to release the backrest, then pull the backrest up to its raised position.

ease of use and comfort
3

ease of use and comfort
Electric front seat
Forwards-backwards

Backrest angle

Height

F Push the control forwards or rearwards to slide the seat.

F Tilt the control forwards or rearwards to adjust the angle of the seat backrest.

F Tilt the control upwards or downwards to obtain the desired height.
For more information on the Seat belts, refer to the corresponding section.
To avoid discharging the battery, carry out these adjustments with the engine running.

Additional adjustments
Head restraint height adjustment

The head restraint rods have notches which prevent the head restraint lowering; this is a safety device in case of impact. The adjustment is correct when the upper edge of the head restraint is level with the top of the head. Never drive with the head restraints removed; they must be in place and adjusted correctly.

ease of use and comfort

Heated seats control

With the engine running, the front seats can be heated separately.

Armrest

If fitted to your vehicle. F To raise the head restraint, pull it upwards. F To remove the head restraint, press the
lug A and pull the head restraint upwards. F To put the head restraint back in place,
engage the head restraint rods in the apertures keeping them in line with the seat backrest. F To lower the head restraint, press the lug A and the head restraint at the same time.

The armrest has notched positions. F Raise the armrest fully up. F Lower it fully down. F Raise the armrest to the desired position.

FU se the adjustment wheel to switch on and select the level of heating required:
0: O ff. 1: Low. 2: Medium. 3: High.

ease of use and comfort
Electric lumbar adjustment

Massage function

Deactivation
You can deactivate the massage function at any time by pressing this button, its indicator lamp goes off.

F Press the control to obtain the desired lumbar support.
92

Adjustment of intensity
This system provides the occupants of the front seats with a lumbar massage. It only operates when the engine is running or in STO P mode of the Stop & Start system.

Activation
F Press this button.
Its indicator lamp comes on and the massage function is activated for a period of 1 hour. During this time, massage is performed in 6 cycles of 10 minutes (6 minutes of massage followed by 4 minutes break). After one hour, the function is deactivated, the indicator lamp goes off.

Press this button to adjust the intensity of the massage. Two levels of massage are available.

2-seat front bench seat
If fitted to your vehicle, this is fixed and has a seat belt on the backrest for the seat alongside the driver.
Head restraint height adjustment

ease of use and comfort

For more information on the Seat belts, refer to the corresponding section.

F To raise the head restraint, pull it upwards. F To remove the head restraint, press the
lug A and pull the head restraint upwards. F To put the head restraint back in place,
engage the head restraint stems in the openings keeping them in line with the seat back. F To lower the head restraint, press the lug A and the head restraint at the same time.

ease of use and comfort
Heated bench seat

Under-seat storage

With the engine running, the bench seat cushions can be heated.
FU se the adjustment twheel to switch on and select the level of heating required:
0: O ff. 1: Low. 2: Medium. 3: High.

If your vehicle is so equipped, a storage space is provided under the seat. F Pull the strap to tip the seat.

Fixed one-piece bench seat

The different items of equipment and adjustments described hereafter vary according to the version and the configuration of your vehicle.

Angled head restraints

ease of use and comfort
Folding the seat backrest to the table position
F Place the head restraints in the low position.
3

The bench seat includes a one-piece backrest which may be fixed or folding (table position).

F To raise a head restraint, pull it up until it engages in its notches.
F To remove the head restraint, press the lug A and pull the head restraint upward.
F To put it back in place, engage the head restraint rods in the apertures keeping them in line with the seat backrest.
F To lower it, press on the lug A and on the head restraint at the same time.

For more information on the Seat belts, refer to the corresponding section.

F From the front, raise the handle to release the seat backrest.
F From the rear, lower the handle to release the seat backrest.
F Fold the backrest onto the seat cushion. F To return the backrest to its normal
position, raise the handle and pull the backrest up.

ease of use and comfort
Tipping, access to row 3
F If your vehicle has the facility, place the seat backrest in the table position.

Removing a seat
F If your vehicle has the facility, place the backrest in the table position.
F Tip the seat forward.

FU sing the handle, release the rear feet then tip the seat forward.
F To return the seat, tip the bench towards the rear until the feet lock into place.

F Release the front feet using these handles. F Disengage the seat from its anchorages. F Remove the seat.

If removing and storing a bench seat out of the vehicle, ensure that it is placed in a clean area, so as to avoid introducing any foreign bodies into the mechanisms.
The bench seats are not designed for any use other than in the vehicle. They have mechanisms and functions that could be damaged if used incorrectly or are dropped.

It is not necessary to fold the backrest (table position) to tip the bench seat for access to row 3.

Refitting a seat
F Check that there is nothing obstructing the anchorages or which would prevent the correct engagement of the feet.

FE ngage the front feet in the anchorages in the floor (as shown above).

F If your vehicle has the facility, pull the control and raise the backrest (from the rear, lower the lever).
Check that the seat has correctly engaged in its anchorages on the floor when returned to the seating position.

ease of use and comfort
3
E nsure that no object, or the feet of a passenger seated at the rear, could obstruct the anchorage points or prevent the correct latching of the assembly.

F Lock the front feet using the handles. F Tip the seat toward the rear until the rear
feet lock into place.
Be aware of the feet of any passengers while tipping the seat.
97

ease of use and comfort
Fixed rear seat and bench seat
The different levels of equipment and adjustments described hereafter vary according to the version and the configuration of your vehicle.
Angled head restraints

Folding the backrest to the table position
F Put the head restraints into the low position.

The seat has a backrest that may be fixed or folding (table position). The bench seat has a one-piece backrest that may be fixed or foldable (table position).

For more information on the Seat belts, refer to the corresponding section.

F From the front, raise the handle to release the backrest.
F From the rear, lower the lever to release the backrest.

ease of use and comfort

Fully folding a seat, access to row 3
(example of an individual seat)
F If your vehicle has the facility, place the backrest in the table position.

Removing a seat
(example of an individual seat)
F If your vehicle has the facility, place the backrest in the table position.
F Tip the seat forward.

F Fold the backrest onto the cushion. F To return the backrest to the normal
position, raise the lever and pull the backrest up (from the rear, lower the lever).

FU sing the handle, release the rear feet then tip the seat forward.
F To return the seat to the normal position, unfold the seat backwards until the rear feet engage in their anchorages.

F Release the front feet using the handles. F Disengage the seat from its anchorages. F Remove the seat by the sliding door in
row 2 or from the rear in row 3.

It is not necessary to fold the backrest (table position) to tip the bench seat for access to row 3.

ease of use and comfort

If removing and storing a seat (or bench seat) out of the vehicle, ensure that it is placed in a clean area, so as to avoid introducing any foreign bodies into the mechanisms.

Refitting a seat
(example of an individual seat)
F Check that there is no object obstructing the anchorages and preventing the feet locking into place.

The seats (or bench seats) are not designed for any use other than in the vehicle. They have mechanisms and functions that could be damaged if used incorrectly or are if the seat is dropped.

FE ngage the front feet in the anchorages on the floor (as shown above).

F If fitted to your vehicle, pull the control to raise the backrest (from the rear, lower the lever).
Check that the seat has locked into place on the floor when returning it to the seating position.

F Lock the front feet using the handles. FU nfold the seat toward the rear until the
rear feet lock into place. Be aware of the feet of passengers when refitting a seat.

Ensure that no object, or the feet of a passenger seated at the rear, could obstruct the anchorage points or prevent the correct latching of the assembly.

100

Rear seat and bench seat on rails

The different equipment and adjustments described hereafter vary according to the version and configuration of your vehicle.

Head restraints

ease of use and comfort
Reclining the backrest
The reclining backrest can be adjusted to several positions.
3

The individual seat is always on the right and the bench seat on the left (facing forward). The bench seat has two independent backrests.
For more information on the Seat belts, refer to the corresponding section.

F To raise a head restraint, pull it up until it engages in its notch.
F To remove it, press the lug A and pull the head restraint up.
F To refit it, engage the head restraint rods in the apertures keeping them in line with the seat backrest.
F To lower it, press on the lug A and on the head restraint at the same time.

F To recline the backrest, raise the control (from the rear, lower the lever).
F Release the control when the desired position is obtained.

101

ease of use and comfort

Moving forward or backward Moving the seat along the full

(example of an individual seat)

length of the rail

Folding the seat backrest to the table position
(example of an individual seat)
F Place the head restraints in the low position.

F Place the seat backrest in the table position.
F Slide the seat by pulling on the rear strap.

Two controls are provided for moving the seat forwards and backwards: F From the front, raise the control and slide
the seat forward or back. F From the rear, pull the strap without going
beyond the point of resistance and push the seat forward or pull it back.
102

F From the front, raise the handle to release the backrest.
F From the rear, lower the handle to release the backrest.
F Fold the backrest onto the cushion.
Do not leave objects (such as a bag or toys) on the cushion when folding the backrest.

Return the backrest to the normal position (between the markings)

Removing a seat
(example of an individual seat) F Move the seat forward for access to the strap. F Fold the backrest to the table position.

To return the backrest to the normal position, the seat must be positioned between the markings. The arrow must not be outside the markings.

ease of use and comfort

If removing and storing a seat (or bench seat) out of the vehicle, ensure that it is placed in a clean area, so as to avoid introducing any foreign bodies into the mechanisms.
The seats (or bench seats) are not designed for any use other than in the vehicle. They have mechanisms and functions that could be damaged if used incorrectly or if the seat is dropped.

F From the rear, pull the strap fully, to release the anchorages and tip the seat forward to the vertical position.
F Take the seat out through the sliding door in row 2 or from the rear in row 3.

FU se the front control to move the seat so that it is between the markings.

Do not use the strap to lift the seat or bench seat.

103

ease of use and comfort
Refitting a seat

(example of an individual seat) F Check that nothing is obstructing the rails.

Before refitting a seat or bench seat to the vehicle, pull the strap fully to ensure that the latching mechanism has engaged.

F Slide the seat forward or back until it engages in the notches.
F Straighten the backrest.
Check that seat engages correctly in the floor when it is returned to the seating position.

F Place the front of the guides on the rails. F Tip the seat back to align the rear of the
guides with the rails.
Do not use the strap to lift the seat or bench seat. 104

E nsure that no object, or the feet of a passenger seated at the rear, could obstruct the anchorage points or prevent the correct latching of the assembly.

Individual seat(s) on rails

The different equipment and adjustments described hereafter vary according to the

Head restraints

version and configuration of your vehicle.

ease of use and comfort
Armrest(s)
3

The individual seat is fitted with a three-point inertia reel seat belt.
It can be placed forward facing or rearward facing.
For more information on the Seat belts, refer to the corresponding section.

F To raise a head restraint, pull it up until it engages in its notch.
F To remove it press the lug A and pull the head restraint up.
F To refit it, engage the head restraint rods in the apertures keping them in line with the seat backrest.
F To lower it, press on the lug A and on the head restraint at the same time.

The armrest has notches. F Pull the armrest fully up F Lower it fully down. F Raise the armrest to the desired position.

105

ease of use and comfort
Reclining the backrest
The reclining backrest can be adjusted to several positions.

Moving forward or backward

Folding the seat backrest to the table position
F Place the head restraints in the low position.

F To recline the backrest, raise the control (from the rear, lower the lever).
F Release the control when the desired position is obtained.

Two controls are provided for moving the seat forward and backward: F From the front, raise the control and slide
the seat forward or back. F From the rear, pull the strap without going
beyond the point of resistance and push the seat forward or pull it back.

F From the front, raise the handle to release the backrest.
F From the rear, lower the handle to release the backrest.
F Fold the backrest onto the cushion.

106

Removing a seat
F Move the seat forward for access to the strap. F Fold the backrest to the table position.

If removing and storing a seat out of the vehicle, ensure that it is placed in a clean area, so as to avoid introducing any foreign bodies into the mechanisms.
The seats are not designed for any use other than in the vehicle. They have mechanisms and functions that could be damaged if used incorrectly or are dropped.

ease of use and comfort
Refitting a seat
3
Before refitting a seat to the vehicle, pull the strap fully to ensure that the latching mechanism has engaged.

F From the rear, pull the strap, going beyond the point of resistance, to free the anchorages and tip the seat forward to the vertical position.
F Take the seat out through the sliding door in row 2 or from the rear in row 3.
Do not use the strap to lift seat.

Do not use the strap to lift the seat. 107

ease of use and comfort F Check that nothing is obstructing the rails.

F Slide the seat forward or back until it engages in the notches.
F Straighten the backrest.
Check that seat engages correctly in the floor when it is returned to the seating position.
F Place the front of the guides on the rails. F Tip the seat back to align the rear of the
guides with the rails.

E nsure that no object, or the feet of a passenger seated at the rear, could obstruct the anchorage points or prevent the correct latching of the assembly.

108

Precautions for the seats and bench seats
Following the various handling operations: - do not remove a head restraint without
storing it and fixing it to a support, - check that the seat belts are always
accessible to the passenger and easy to fasten, - a passenger must not take their seat without adjusting the seat's head restraint correctly and adjusting and fastening the seat belt.

Loading luggage or objects Labels behind the row 3 seat and bench seat

ease of use and comfort
3

If you want to load luggage onto the backrests in row 3 while in the table position, the backrests in row 2 must also be in the table position.

When driving, carrying a passenger is prohibited: - in row 3 if the backrest in front (row 2) is in
the table position. - in row 3 if the seat/bench in front (row 2) is
in the fully folded position. - in rows 2 and 3, in the outer right seat, if
the bench is in the fully folded position, - on the centre seat if the outer right seat is
in the fully folded position.

109

ease of use and comfort
Interior fittings
Mats
Fitting

Removal
To remove the mat on the driver's side: F move the seat as far back as possible, F unclip the fixings, F remove the mat.

In rows 2 and 3

Refitting
To refit the mat on the driver's side: F position the mat correctly, F refit the fixings by pressing, F check that the mat is secured correctly.

When fitting the mats for the first time, on the driver's side use only the fixings provided in the wallet attached.

To avoid any risk of jamming of the pedals: - only use mats which are suited to
the fixings already present in the vehicle; these fixings must be used, - never fit one mat on top of another. The use of mats not approved by PEUGEO T may interfere with access to the pedals and hinder the operation of the cruise control / speed limiter. The mats approved by PEUGEO T have two fixings located below the seat.

U se the Velcros to fit the transverse mats in row 2 with the longitudinal mats in rows 2 and 3.

110

ease of use and comfort

Sun visor

Lower glove box

Upper glove box

The sun visors provide protection from the sun from the front or the side and have an illuminated vanity mirror (depending on version). A pocket is provided on the driver's sun visor to hold toll tickets, receipts, ...

It houses the passenger's front airbag deactivation switch and can hold a water bottle, the vehicle's handbook pack...

It can hold a water bottle, the vehicle's handbook pack...

F With the ignition on, raise the concealing flap; the mirror is illuminated automatically.

F To open the glove box, pull the handle towards you.

F To open the glove box, press the left hand end of the control and guide the lid to its open position notch.
If is so equipped, it is illuminated when the lid is opened.

While driving, keep the glove boxes closed. O therwise there is a risk of injury in the event of an accident or sudden braking.

With air conditioning, it gives access to the ventilation nozzle, delivering the same air-conditioned air as the vents in the passenger compartment.
111

ease of use and comfort
Front door pockets

Upper storage compartment
This is located in the dashboard, behind the steering wheel.

"Aircraft" type tables
Fitted to the back of each front seat, these allow you to place objects.

Liquids carried in an open vessel (a cup or mug) could be spilt, presenting a risk of damage on contact with the controls in the dashboard and centre console. Take care.

Press the control to open the lid (depending on version) then guide it to its fully open position. To close, guide the lid then press the centre gently. Any liquid which could spill risks causing an electrical short circuit and therefore a potential fire.

F To use the table, lower it fully until it locks in the low position.
F To stow the table, raise it, passing the point of resistance, to the high position.
O n the passenger side, do not forget to fold the "aircraft" type table before placing the seat in the table position. Do not place hard or heavy objects on the table. They could become dangerous projectiles in the event of emergency braking or impact.
For more information on the Front seats and in particular the "table" position for the backrest, refer to the corresponding section.

112

12 V accessory socket(s) (depending on version)
F To connect a 12 V accessory (maximum power: 120 Watts), lift the cover and connect a suitable adaptor. O bserve the maximum power rating to avoid damaging your accessory.

ease of use and comfort
USB port

The connection of an electrical device not approved by PEUGEO T, such as a U SB charger, may adversely affect the operation of vehicle electrical systems, causing faults such as poor telephone reception or interference with displays in the screens.

It allows the connection of a portable device, such as a digital audio player of the iPod® type or a U SB memory stick. It reads the audio files which are transmitted to your audio system and played via the vehicle's speakers. You can manage these files using the steering mounted controls or the audio system.
When a U SB port is used, the portable device charges automatically. While charging, a message is displayed if the current consumption of the portable device exceeds the power rating of the port. For more information on using this equipment, refer to the Audio and telematics section.

113

ease of use and comfort
Auxiliary socket

230 V / 50 Hz power socket
If fitted to your vehicle, a 230 V / 50 Hz socket (maximum power: 150 W) is located below the right-hand front seat and so is accessible from the second row. This socket works with the engine running, as well as in STO P mode with Stop & Start.

It permits the connection of a portable device so that you can listen to your music files via the vehicle's speakers. The management of the files is done using your portable device.

For more information on the use of this equipment, refer to the Audio and telematics section.

F Raise the cover, F Check that the indicator lamp is on green, F Connect your multimedia or other electrical
device (telephone charger, laptop computer, CD-DVD player, baby food warmer...).

In the event of a fault with the socket, the green warning lamp flashes. Have it checked by a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop.

114

Connect only one device at a time to the socket (no extension or multi-way connector). Connect only devices with class II insulation (shown on the device). Do not use a device with a metal case. As a safety measure, when electrical consumption is high and when required by the vehicle's electrical system (particular weather conditions, electrical overload...), the current supply to the socket will be cut off; the green indicator lamp goes off.

Seating area fittings

Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the various fittings below are located in the seating area.

Strap type grab handle

Cup holder (depending on version)

ease of use and comfort
Nets on the backs of the front seats
3

Coat hooks
Any liquid carried in an open receptacle (cup or other) might be spilt, presenting a risk. Take care.
115

ease of use and comfort
Stowing rings

Luggage retaining net

High load retaining net
This allows the use of the entire load space, up to the roof: - behind the front seats in row 1, when the
rear seats (and bench seats) in rows 2 and 3 are folded or removed. - behind the rear seats and bench seats in row 2, when the rear seats (and bench seats) in row 3 are folded or removed.

U se the stowing rings on the rear floor to fix the net, your loads or luggage.

Attached to the stowing rings on the rear floor, it allows objects to be held down.

As a safety measure in the event of sudden braking, it is recommended that heavy objects are placed as far forward in the vehicle as possible. It is recommended that the load is secured firmly using the stowing rings on the floor.

As a safety measure in the event of sudden braking, it is recommended that heavy objects are placed on the floor as close as possible to the backrest of the seat(s) or bench seat.

116

ease of use and comfort

Upper fixings
FU nclip the anchorage cover in the roof on each side.
Lower fixings (behind row 1)
If your vehicle has fixed one-piece bench seats or seats and bench seats:

If your vehicle has seats and bench seats or individual seats on rails:
F O n each side in row 2, insert the fixings in the floor anchorages then turn them a quarter turn to lock them in place (as shown above).
Place them as close as possible to the end of the rail.
Lower fixings (behind row 2)
FU se the stowing rings.

Fit the net
U nclip the upper fixing covers and secure the lower fixings (as previously described). F Fold (table position) the seats and bench
seats in rows 2 and 3 (according to equipment). FU nroll the high load retaining net. F Position the upper net fixings in the corresponding anchorages in the roof (first one side, then the other). F Fully extend the straps. FO n each side, attach the bottom fixings of the net to the lower anchorages (behind row 1) or in the stowing rings (behind row 2). F Pull on the straps to stretch the net. F Check that the net is attached securely and properly extended.

FO n each side in row 2, insert the fixings in the floor anchorages (as shown above).

Never use the ISO FIX ring intended for fixing the upper strap of a child seat with Top Tether.
117

ease of use and comfort
Luggage cover

Windows in row 2

Side blinds

If fitted to your vehicle, the side windows in row 2 can be opened. While driving, the window must be closed or secured at one of the notches.

Fitted to the windows in row 2, they protect the passenger compartment from the sun's rays.

F Raise it to remove it. F To install it, insert the guides into their
housings.

F Squeeze the two controls then move the window sideways.

F Pull the tab A and anchor the blind on the hook B.

For more information on the Child lock for rear windows, refer to the corresponding section.

Always guide the blind slowly using the tab, both up and down.

118

Torch

Use
FE xtract the torch from its location by pulling it from the front.
F Press the switch, located on the back, to switch the torch on or off.
FU nfold the leg, located on the back, to set down and raise the torch; for example, when changing a wheel.

Portable lighting, located at the rear, which can be used to illuminate the rear and as a torch.
This torch operates with NiMH type rechargeable batteries. It has a battery life of approximately 45 minutes and charges while you are driving.
O bserve the polarities when fitting the batteries. Never replace the rechargeable batteries with single-use batteries.

Storing
F Put the torch back in place in its location starting with the rear. If you have forgotten to switch off the torch, this switches it off automatically.
If the torch is not engaged correctly, it may not charge and may not come on when the boot is opened.

ease of use and comfort
3
119

ease of use and comfort

Panoramic sunroof

It is equipped with two manual and independent blinds, which improve thermal and acoustic comfort.

Blinds

Opening

Closing

F Take one of the blinds by its grip and push it rearward to the desired position.

F Take one of the blinds by its grip and pull it forward to the desired position.

120

Folding and sliding table
Storage

ease of use and comfort
Moving forward or backward
3

It comprises a central storage space closed with a lid. U nfolded, it offers a table with two tops on which objects can be placed. The central area includes two cup holders and can also be used to place small objects (credit card, pen, ...). The assembly is mounted on a runner allowing it to be positioned equally well in row 2 or row 3.

F Slide back the cover for access to 11 litres of storage space.

F Raise this control (without going beyond the point of resistance) and slide the assembly forward or backward.
F Release the control when it is in the desired position.
F Check that the table is correctly latched on the runner. If this is not the case, move the assembly slightly to the next notch on the runner.
You can move the table folded or unfolded. However, for greater safety, it is recommended that the assembly be moved in the folded position.

The storage space can accept a maximum weight of 3 kg; do not exceed this maximum load in use.

For correct sliding of the table, ensure that there is no object in the space used by the runner on the floor. Before manoeuvring the table, check that there is nothing on the table.

121

ease of use and comfort
Unfolding

Folding

Cup holders

FO perate the control on the top and pull the table assembly up until it clicks into place.

F Raise each table top, going beyond the point of resistance, to the vertical position.
F Push each table top down into its housing until it clicks into place.
F Push the control then tip the table assembly downward until it clicks into place.

Two cups or cans and small objects (such as a credit card, portable ashtray or pen) can be carried in the middle of the unfolded table.

F Pull each table top fully up then pivot them on each side into the horizontal position.

Before stowing the table tops, check that there is no object underneath. Before tipping the assembly down, check that the two table tops have clicked home in the low position and that there is nothing in the cup holder area (such as a can or pen).

Liquids carried in an open vessel (a cup or mug) could be spilt, presenting a risk. Take care. Never use the table in this position while the vehicle is being driven.

122

Removing

Changing the direction

ease of use and comfort
Refitting
F Check that there is no object obstructing the runner, which could prevent correct latching.
3

F Raise the control fully to release the anchorages and tip the table assembly forward.
F Remove the table assembly through the sliding door in row 2.

With the table removed, you can turn it 180°.

Check that there is nothing in the space around the runner on the floor, so that the table disengages cleanly.

Remove a seat to make this easier.

F Check that the control is in the up position (latching mechanism armed). If not, raise this control fully to arm the mechanism.
F Place the front of the table on the runner. F Taking care not to interfere with the control,
tip the assembly down at the rear until it clicks into place. F Check that the assembly is correctly latched on the runner. if this is not the case, slide the assembly along the runner to the next notch. F Release the control until the guide latches in the runner.

123

ease of use and comfort
Take care of passengers' feet when manoeuvring the assembly.
Storage off the runner
If removing and storing the table out of the vehicle, ensure that it is placed in a clean area, so as to avoid introducing any foreign bodies into the mechanisms. The table assembly must be placed on a flat and level surface when out of the vehicle, resting on the guide so as to avoid damaging the visible parts.
Caution, when out of the vehicle, the table leans to the right or left when put down.
124

Incorrect use of the table could cause serious injury. Never use the table open or unfolded while the vehicle is being driven. An object on the table is turned into a projectile under heavy braking. E nsure that the table is correctly stowed in the low position before moving off. Never use the table tops as seats or lean on them. A label on the table is a reminder of this.

Never place hot objects such as casseroles or cooking pans on the table, you risk damaging its surface (risk of fire).
With the table deployed, each top can support a maximum of 10 kg. Failure to observe this maximum load introduces the risk of damaging all or part of the table module. Never raise the table when it is between individual seats; this risks damaging the table tops.

Manual air conditioning
The air conditioning system only operates with the engine running.

Air flow

F Turn the knob to obtain a comfortable air flow.

Air distribution
Windscreen and side windows.

If you put the air flow control in the minimum position (system off), the temperature is no longer controlled. However, a slight flow of air can still be felt, resulting from the movement of the vehicle.
Temperature
F Turn the knob from "LO" (cold) to "HI" (hot) to adjust the temperature to your requirements.

Central and side vents.
Footwells.
The air distribution can be adapted by adding the corresponding buttons.

ease of use and comfort
Air intake / Air recirculation

The intake of exterior air avoids misting of the windscreen and side windows. The recirculation of interior air insulates the passenger compartment from exterior odours and fumes.

This allows hot or cold air to be delivered quickly when required.
F Press this button to recirculate the interior air; its indicator lamp comes on.
F Press this button again to allow exterior air into the passenger compartment; its indicator lamp goes off.

Return to exterior air intake as soon as possible to avoid deterioration of the air quality and the formation of mist.

125

ease of use and comfort

Switching off
F Press this button again; its indicator lamp goes off.
Switching off may result in some discomfort (humidity, misting).

Switching on
F Press this button; its indicator lamp comes on.

The air conditioning does not operate when the air flow adjustment is set to off.
To obtain cool air more quickly, you can use interior air recirculation for a few moments. Then return to the intake of exterior air.

126

ease of use and comfort

Dual-zone automatic air conditioning

Automatic comfort mode
F Press the "AUTO" button repeatedly.
The active mode appears in the display screen, as described below:
Provides strong and effective air flow.

When the engine is cold, the air flow will only reach its optimum level gradually to prevent too great a distribution of cold air. In cold weather, it favours the distribution of warm air to the windscreen, the side windows and the footwells only.

O ffers the best compromise between a comfortable temperature and quiet operation.
Provides soft and quiet operation by limiting air flow.

Manual mode
If desired, you can choose settings different to those offered by the system, by adjusting a setting manually. The other functions are still managed automatically. The "AUTO" symbol disappears if you modify a setting.

Temperature
The driver and front passenger can each set the temperature to suit their requirements. The value indicated in the screen corresponds to a level of comfort and not to a temperature in degrees Celsius or Fahrenheit.
F Push the button down to reduce the value or up to increase it.

A setting around 21 enables you to obtain an optimum level of comfort. Depending on your requirements, a setting between 18 and 24 is usual. In addition, it is recommended that you avoid a left/right setting difference of more than 3.

127

ease of use and comfort

O n entering the vehicle, if the interior temperature is much colder or warmer than the comfort value, there is no need to alter the value displayed in order to obtain the required level of comfort. The system corrects the temperature difference automatically and as quickly as possible.

"Mono" function

Visibility programme

The comfort setting for the passenger side can be indexed to the driver's comfort setting (mono-zone).
F Press this button to activate / deactivate the "Mono" function.
The indicator lamp in the button is on when the function is activated.

F Press the "visibility" button for faster demisting or defrosting of the windscreen and side windows.
The system automatically manages the air conditioning, air flow and air intake and distributes the flow of air to the windscreen and side windows to the best effect.

For maximum cooling or heating of the passenger compartment, you can exceed the minimum value of 14 or the maximum value of 28.
F Push the button down until "LO" is displayed or up until "HI" is displayed.

The function is deactivated automatically if a passenger uses the temperature control.

F Press the "visibility" button again to stop the programme.
Or
F Press the "AUTO" button to return to the automatic comfort programme.

128

Air conditioning
With the engine running, the air conditioning is designed to operate effectively in all seasons, with the windows closed.
It enables you to: - lower the temperature, in summer, - increase the effectiveness of the demisting
in winter, above 3°C.
Switching on
F Press this button; its indicator lamp comes on.
The air conditioning does not operate when the air flow adjustment is set to off.

Air distribution
F Press this button repeatedly to direct the air flow in turn to:
- the windscreen, the side windows and the footwells,
- the footwells. - the central vents, the side vents and the
footwells, - the windscreen, the side windows, the
centre vents and the footwells, - the centre and side vents, - the windscreen and side windows
(demisting or defrosting).

To obtain cool air more quickly, you can use interior air recirculation for a few moments. Then return to the intake of exterior air.

ease of use and comfort

Air flow
F Press this button to increase air flow.

F Press this button to decrease air flow.
The air flow symbol (a fan) appears. It is filled in or emptied progressively according to the setting.

Switching off
F Press this button again; its indicator lamp goes off.
Switching off may result in some discomfort (humidity, misting).

129

ease of use and comfort

Air intake / Air recirculation
The intake of exterior air avoids misting of the windscreen and side windows. The recirculation of interior air insulates the passenger compartment from exterior odours and smoke.
This allows hot or cold air to be delivered quickly when required.
F Press this button to recirculate the interior air; the symbol appears.
F Press this button again to allow exterior air into the passenger compartment; the symbol disappears.

Switching the system off
F Press this button until the fan symbol disappears.
This action switches off all of the functions of the system. The temperature is no longer controlled. A slight flow of air, resulting from the movement of the vehicle, remains perceptible however.
Avoid driving for too long with the system switched off (risk of misting and of deterioration of the air quality).
F Press this button to switch the system on again.

Return to exterior air intake as soon as possible to avoid deterioration of the air quality and the formation of mist.

130

Front demist - defrost
These markings on the control panel indicate the control positions for rapid demisting or defrosting of the windscreen and side windows.

Manual air conditioning

Dual-zone digital air conditioning

F Put the air flow, temperature and distribution controls to the dedicated marked position.
F For air conditioning, press this button; its indicator lamp comes on.

F Press this button to demist or defrost the windscreen and side windows as quickly as possible.
The system automatically manages the air conditioning, air flow and air intake, and provides optimum distribution towards the windscreen and side windows.
F To stop, press this button again or on "AUTO".

The system reverts to the previous settings.

ease of use and comfort
3
Heated windscreen and washer jets For more information on the Wiper control stalk and in particular the heated windscreen and washer jets, refer to the corresponding section.
With Stop & Start, when demisting has been activated, the STO P mode is not available.
131

ease of use and comfort

Door mirrors demist - defrost
Switching off
The demisting/defrosting switches off automatically to prevent an excessive consumption of current.
F It is possible to stop the demisting/defrosting operation before it is switched off automatically by pressing this button again; its indicator lamp goes off.

Switching on
F Press this button to demist/ defrost the door mirrors; its indicator lamp comes on.

Switch off the heating of the rear screen and door mirrors as soon as you judge it possible, as reducing the consumption of electrical current reduces fuel consumption.
Door mirror demisting and defrosting only operates with the engine running.

132

Rear screen demist - defrost
Switching off
The demisting/defrosting switches off automatically to prevent an excessive consumption of current.
F It is possible to stop the demisting/defrosting operation before it is switched off automatically by pressing this button again; its indicator lamp goes off.

Switching on
F Press this button to demist/ defrost the rear screen and the door mirrors (if your vehicle is so equipped); its indicator lamp comes on.

Switch off the heating of the rear screen and door mirrors as soon as you judge it possible, as reducing the consumption of electrical current reduces fuel consumption.
Rear screen demisting and defrosting only operates with the engine running.

ease of use and comfort
3

133

ease of use and comfort

Recommendations for heating, ventilation and air conditioning

In order for these systems to be fully effective, follow the operation and maintenance guidelines below: F To obtain an even air distribution, take care not to obstruct the exterior air intake grilles
located at the base of the windscreen, the nozzles, the vents and the air outlets, as well as the air extractor located at the rear. F Do not cover the sunshine sensor, located at the top of the windscreen; this is used for regulation of the air conditioning system. FO perate the air conditioning system for at least 5 to 10 minutes, once or twice a month to keep it in perfect working order. FE nsure that the passenger compartment filter is in good condition and have the filter elements replaced regularly. We recommend the use of a combined passenger compartment filter. Thanks to its special active additive, it contributes to the purification of the air breathed by the occupants and the cleanliness of the passenger compartment (reduction of allergic symptoms, bad odours and greasy deposits). F To ensure correct operation of the air conditioning system, you are also advised to have it checked regularly as recommended in the warranty and maintenance record. F If the system does not produce cold air, switch it off and contact a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop.
When towing the maximum load on a steep gradient in high temperatures, switching off the air conditioning increases the available engine power and so improves the towing ability.
Air vents
To close a vent, move the control towards the outside of the vehicle. Slight resistance may be felt.

If after an extended stop in sunshine, the interior temperature is very high, first ventilate the passenger compartment for a few moments. Put the air flow control at a setting high enough to quickly change the air in the passenger compartment. The air conditioning system does not contain chlorine and does not present any danger to the ozone layer.
The condensation created by the air conditioning results in a discharge of water under the vehicle which is perfectly normal.
Stop & Start
The heating and air conditioning systems only work when the engine is running. To maintain a comfortable temperature in the passenger compartment, you can temporarily deactivate the Stop & Start system. For more information on Stop & Start, refer to the corresponding section.

134

Suggested interior settings

I require...

Air distribution

HOT

ease of use and comfort

Heating or Manual air conditioning

Air flow

Recirculation of interior air / Intake of exterior air

Temperature

Manual AC

COLD
DEMISTING DEFROSTING Dual-zone air conditioning: use the automatic mode in preference by pressing the "AUTO" button.

135

ease of use and comfort
Rear Heating - Air conditioning
Activation/Deactivation

Air flow
F Turn the knob to increase or decrease the air flow.

This button is accessible from the front, from the air conditioning control panel.
F Press this button to enable the rear controls, its indicator lamp comes on.
F Press this button again to inhibit the rear controls, its indicator lamp goes off.
If your vehicle is fitted with a rear air conditioning unit, located in the roof, this system allows the distribution of air conditioned and heated air via ducting and individual outlets.

Temperature
- Turn the knob from blue (cold) to red (hot) to modulate the temperature to your liking.
This control simultaneously adjusts the temperature and the location of the air delivery: - at blue: the air is delivered mainly at
roof level, - at red: the air is delivered mainly
by the vent located in row 3 on the right.

136

ease of use and comfort

Programmable Heating / Ventilation
Programming
Audio system

F Press on the MENU button to go to the main menu.

Heating
This is an additional and separate system which heats the engine hot water circuit to heat the passenger compartment and improve defrosting.
This indicator lamp is on when if the system is programmed to come on for heating. This indicator lamp flashes while the heating is operating.
Ventilation
This system allows ventilation of the passenger compartment to improve the temperature experienced on entering the vehicle in summer.

F Select "Pre-heat. / Pre-ventil.". F Select "Activation" and if necessary for
programming, select "Parameters".
F Select "Heating" to heat the engine and passenger compartment or "Ventilation" to ventilate the passenger compartment.

F Select: - the 1st clock to programme/store your start time, - the 2nd clock to programme/store a second start time.
U sing these two clocks and according to season you can, for example, select one or the other start time. A message in the screen confirms your choice.

137

ease of use and comfort
Long range remote control
The range of the remote control is about 0.6 miles (1 km), in open country.

The indicator lamp in the remote control flashes for about 2 seconds if the vehicle has not received the signal. You should then move to a different location and repeat the command.

Do not throw the remote control batteries away, they contain metals which are harmful to the environment. Take them to an approved collection point.

Switching on
F Press and hold this button to start the heating immediately.
The indicator lamp in the remote control comes on in green for about 2 seconds to confirm that the signal has been received by the vehicle.

Changing the battery
If the indicator lamp in the remote control becomes orange, the state of charge of the battery is low. If the indicator lamp is not on, the battery is discharged.

During heating
This indicator lamp flashes while the heating is in operation. This indicator lamp goes off at the end of the heating cycle or when the heating is stopped using the remote control.
The maximum heating period is about 45 minutes depending on the ambient conditions.

Switching off
F Press and hold this button to stop the heating immediately.
The indicator lamp in the remote control comes on in red for about 2 seconds to confirm that the signal has been received by the vehicle.

FU se a coin to unscrew the cap and replace the bulb.

138

The programmable heating system is supplied by the vehicle's fuel tank. Before use, ensure that there is enough fuel in the tank. If the tank is on reserve, it is recommended that the system is not used.
The ventilation is activated provided that the battery is sufficiently charged.
The heating is activated provided that: - the battery is sufficiently charged, - the fuel level is adequate, - the engine has been started since
the previous heating cycle.

Always switch off the programmable heating while refuelling to avoid any risk of fire or explosion. To avoid the risk of intoxication and asphyxiation, the programmable heating must not be used, even for short periods, in an enclosed area such as a garage or workshop not equipped with exhaust gas extraction. Do not park the vehicle on an inflammable surface (dry grass, dead leaves, paper...), there is a risk of fire. G lazed surfaces such as the rear screen or windscreen can become very hot in places. Take care not to place objects in contact with these surfaces, nor touch them with your hands or any other part of your body.

ease of use and comfort
3

139

ease of use and comfort
Courtesy lamps
Front
Rear
140

Automatic operation
The front courtesy lamp comes on when the key is removed from the ignition switch. All of the courtesy lamps come on when the vehicle is unlocked, when one of the corresponding doors is opened and for location of the vehicle using the remote control. They go off gradually after the ignition is switched on and when the vehicle is locked.

Individual reading lamp

Front: comes on when one of the front or rear doors is opened (sliding side door and depending on equipment, the left hand side-hinged door or the tailgate).

If fitted to the vehicle, these are operated by means of a manual switch. With the ignition on, operate the corresponding switch.

Permanently on, ignition on.

Take care not to leave anything in contact with the courtesy lamp.

Row 2 and row 3: comes on when one of the rear doors or the boot is opened (sliding side door and depending on equipment, the left hand side-hinged door or the tailgate).
Permanently off.

Mirrors
Door mirrors
Electric adjustments

Lighting and visibility

Electric folding
If your vehicle is fitted with this function, the mirrors can be folded electrically from the inside, with the vehicle parked and the ignition on:
F Place switch A in the centre position.
F Pull switch A rearwards.

Electric unfolding
The electric unfolding of the mirrors is possible with the remote control or the key on unlocking the vehicle, unless folding was selected using switch A. In this case, pull the switch rearwards from the centre position again.

From the outside, lock the vehicle using the remote control or the key.

The folding / unfolding on locking / unlocking can be deactivated. Contact a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop. It is possible to unfold the mirrors manually if necessary.

F Move switch A to the right or to the left to select the corresponding mirror.
F Move knob B in all four directions to adjust. F Return switch A to the centre position.
141

Lighting and visibility
Heated mirrors

If your vehicle has heated door mirrors: F Press the heated rear window button.
Or
F Press the heated mirror button.

For more information on Rear screen demist - defrost, refer to the corresponding section.
As a safety measure, the mirrors should be adjusted to reduce the blind spots. The objects observed are, in reality, closer than they appear. Take this into account in order to correctly judge the distance of vehicles approaching from behind.

142

Rear view mirror

E quipped with an anti-dazzle system, which darkens the mirror glass and reduces the nuisance to the driver caused by the sun, headlamps from other vehicles...

Manual model

Automatic "electrochrome" model

Lighting and visibility
Surveillance mirror

Adjustment F Adjust the mirror so that the glass is
directed correctly in the "day" position.
Day / night position F Pull the lever to change to the "night" anti-
dazzle position. F Push the lever to change to the normal
"day" position.

This system automatically and progressively changes between the day and night uses by means of a sensor, which measures the light from the rear of the vehicle.
In order to ensure optimum visibility during your manoeuvres, the mirror lightens automatically when reverse gear is engaged.

This mirror, placed on top of the central mirror, enables the driver or front passenger to observe all the rear seats. Fitted on its own ball joint, its manual adjustment is simple and provides a view of the rear interior of the vehicle. It can also be adjusted for improved visibility during manoeuvres or when overtaking.

143

Lighting and visibility
Lighting control stalk
Main lighting selection ring
Turn the ring to align the desired symbol with the marking.
Model without AUTO lighting

Lighting off (ignition off) / Front daytime running lamps (engine running).
Automatic illumination of headlamps.

Dipping the headlamps

Sidelamps only.

Dipped or main beam headlamps.

Model with AUTO lighting
144

O peration of the selected lighting is confirmed by the illumination of the corresponding indicator lamp.
In some weather conditions (e.g. low temperature or humidity), the presence of misting on the internal surface of the glass of the headlamps and rear lamps is normal; it disappears after the lamps have been on for a few minutes.

Pull the stalk to switch between dipped and main beam headlamps.
In the lighting off and sidelamps modes, the driver can switch on the main beam headlamps temporarily ("headlamp flash") by maintaining a pull on the stalk.

Foglamp ring

Lighting and visibility

Rear foglamp only

Front and rear foglamps

It operates with the sidelamps on.
F To switch it on, turn the ring forwards. When the lighting is switched off automatically (with AU TO model), the foglamp and the dipped beam headlamps will remain on. F To switch it off, turn the ring rearwards.

They operate with dipped beam headlamps on, in manual or auto mode.
Rotate and release the ring: F forwards once to switch on the front
foglamps, F forwards again to switch on the rear
foglamps, F rearwards once to switch off the rear
foglamps, F rearwards again to switch off the front fog
lamps.

When the headlamps switch off with automatic illumination of headlamps (AU TO model) or when the dipped beam headlamps are switched off manually, the foglamps and sidelamps remain on. F Turn the ring rearwards to switch off
the foglamps, the sidelamps will then switch off.

145

Lighting and visibility
Lighting left on audible signal
An audible signal when a front door is opened warns the driver that the vehicle's exterior lighting is on, with the ignition off and in manual lighting mode. In this case, switching off the lighting stops the audible signal.
The lighting goes off when you switch off the ignition, but you can always switch it on again using the lighting control stalk.
Travelling abroad
If using your vehicle in a country that drives on the other side of the road, the headlamps must be adjusted to avoid dazzling on-coming drivers. Contact a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop.

In good or rainy weather, both day and night, the front foglamps and the rear foglamps are prohibited. In these situations, the power of their beams may dazzle other drivers. They should only be used in fog or snow. In these weather conditions, it is your responsibility to switch on the foglamps and dipped headlamps manually as the sunshine sensor may detect sufficient light. Do not forget to switch off the front foglamps and the rear foglamps when they are no longer needed.

Direction indicators
F Left: lower the lighting stalk, passing the point of resistance.
F Right: raise the lighting stalk, passing the point of resistance.
Three flashes of the direction indicators
F Press briefly upwards or downwards, without going beyond the point of resistance; the direction indicators will flash 3 times.

146

Lighting and visibility

Front daytime running lamps (light-emitting diodes)

Automatic illumination of headlamps
When a low level of ambient light is detected by a sunshine sensor, the number plate lamps, sidelamps and dipped beam headlamps are switched on automatically, without any action on the part of the driver. They can also come on if rain is detected, at the same time as automatic operation of the windscreen wipers. As soon as the brightness returns to a sufficient level or after the windscreen wipers are switched off, the lamps are switched off automatically.

Deactivation
F Turn the ring to another position. Deactivation of the function is accompanied by the display of a message.

Operating fault
In the event of a malfunction of the sunshine sensor, the lighting comes on; this warning lamp is displayed in the instrument panel accompanied by an audible signal and/or a message.
Contact a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop.

If fitted to your vehicle, they come on automatically when the engine is started, when the lighting control stalk is in position "0" or "AUTO".

Activation

In fog or snow, the sunshine sensor may detect sufficient light. In this case, the lighting will not come on automatically. Do not cover the sunshine sensor, coupled with the rain sensor and located in the top of the windscreen behind the rear view mirror; the associated functions would no longer be controlled.

F Turn the ring to the "AUTO" position. The activation of the function is accompanied by the display of a message.
147

Lighting and visibility

Manual guide-me-home lighting
Temporarily keeping the dipped beam headlamps on after the vehicle's ignition has been switched off makes the driver's exit easier when the light is poor.
Switching on

Automatic guide-me-home lighting
When the automatic illumination of headlamps function is activated, under low ambient light the dipped beam headlamps come on automatically when the ignition is switched off.
Programming
The activation, deactivation and selection of period the guide-me-home lighting is kept on can be set.

With the audio system
In the "Personalisation-configuration" menu, activate/deactivate "Follow-me-home headlamps".
With the touch screen

F With the ignition off, "flash" the headlamps using the lighting stalk.
F A further "headlamp flash" switches the function off.
Switching off
The manual guide-me-home lighting switches off automatically after a set time.

In the vehicle settings menu, activate/ deactivate "Guide-me-home lighting".

148

Exterior welcome lighting
The remote switching on of the lighting makes your approach to the vehicle easier in poor light. It is activated when the lighting control is in the "AUTO" position and the level of light detected by the sunshine sensor is low.

Programming
The activation, deactivation and choice of welcome lighting duration can be set.
With the audio system

Lighting and visibility
With the touch screen
In the vehicle settings menu, activate/ deactivate "Welcome lighting".

Switching on
F Press the open padlock on the remote control or one of the front door handles with Keyless E ntry and Starting.
The dipped beam headlamps and sidelamps come on; your vehicle is also unlocked.

In the "Personalisation-configuration" menu, activate/deactivate "Welcome lighting".

Switching off
The exterior welcome lighting switches off automatically after a set time, when the ignition is switched on or on locking the vehicle.

149

Lighting and visibility
Cornering lighting

Programming
The system is activated or deactivated in the vehicle configuration menu. The system is activated by default.
With the audio system

With dipped or main beams, this function makes use of the beam from a front foglamp to illuminate the inside of a bend, when the vehicle speed is below 25 mph (40 km/h) (urban driving, winding road, intersections, parking manoeuvres...).
Without cornering lighting 150

With cornering lighting

In the "Personalisation-configuration" menu, activate/deactivate "Driving lighting".

Switching on
The system operates: - when the corresponding direction indicator
is switched on, or - from a certain angle of rotation of the
steering wheel.

With the touch screen

Switching off
The system does not operate: - below a certain angle of rotation of the
steering wheel, - above 25 mph (40 km/h), - when reverse gear is engaged.

In the vehicle settings menu, activate/ deactivate "Driving lighting".

Automatic headlamp dipping
System which automatically changes between dipped and main beam according to the ambient light level and the driving conditions, using a camera located at the top of the windscreen

This automatic headlamp dipping system is a driving aid. The driver remains responsible for the vehicle's lighting and for adapting its settings to the levels of brightness and visibility and the traffic conditions.

Activation / deactivation
F Put the lighting control stalk ring in the "AU TO " or dipped/main beam position.

The system will be operational as soon as you have exceeded 15 mph (25 km/h). If the speed drops below 9 mph (15 km/h), the system no longer operates.

F Flash the headlamps (going beyond the stiff point) to activate the function.

Lighting and visibility

Pause
The driver can intervene at any time if the situation requires a change in the state of the headlamps.
F Flashing the headlamps again pauses the function and the lighting system changes to "automatic illumination of headlamps".

The driver can intervene at any time if the circumstances dictate by pulling on the lighting control stalk to switch between main and dipped beam.

Flashing the headlamps does not deactivate the system. The state of the system stays in memory when the ignition is switched off.

151

Lighting and visibility
With the audio system
To deactivate the system: F Press the button, its indicator lamp comes on, the system is deactivated.
To activate the system: F Press this button, the indicator lamp goes off, the system is activated
With the touch screen

The system may suffer interference or not work correctly: - under conditions of poor visibility
(for example, snowfall, heavy rain or thick fog, ...), - if the windscreen is dirty, misted or obscured (by a sticker, ...) in front of the camera, - if the vehicle is facing highly reflective signs. If the fog is too dense, the system is automatically deactivated.
The system is not able to detect: - road users that do not have their
own lighting, such as pedestrians, - road users whose lighting is
obscured, such as vehicles running behind a safety barrier (on a motorway, for example), - road users at the top or bottom of a steep slope, on twisty roads, on crossroads.

In the Driving menu, activate/deactivate "Automatic headlamp dip".
152

Interior mood lighting

Switching on
At night, the front roof lighting and panoramic roof lighting (if fitted to your vehicle) come on automatically when the sidelamps are switched on. The interior mood lighting switches off automatically when the sidelamps are switched off.
Programming
The activation, deactivation and brightness of the mood lighting can be set.

Lighting and visibility
Manual headlamp beam height adjustment
4

The dimmed passenger compartment lighting improves visibility in the vehicle when the light is poor.

With the audio system
In the "Personalisation-configuration" menu, activate/deactivate "Ambiance lighting".

To avoid causing a nuisance to other road users, the beams of the halogen headlamps should be adjusted according to the load in the vehicle.
0 - 1 or 2 people in the front seats. 1 - 5 people. 2 - 6 to 9 people. 3 - Driver + maximum authorised loads.

With the touch screen

In the vehicle settings menu, activate/ deactivate "Mood lighting".

The initial setting is position "0".

153

Lighting and visibility

Wiper control stalk
Programming
Your vehicle may also include some functions that can be configured: - automatic rain sensitive windscreen wipers, - rear wiping on engaging reverse gear.

Manual controls
The wipers are controlled directly by the driver.
Model with manual wiping (intermittent)

In wintry conditions, remove snow, ice or frost present on the windscreen, around the wiper arms and blades and the windscreen seal, before operating the wipers.

Do not operate the wipers on a dry windscreen. U nder extremely hot or cold conditions, ensure that the wiper blades are not stuck to the windscreen before operating the wipers.

Model with AUTO wiping

Windscreen wipers
Wiping speed control stalk: raise or lower the stalk to the desired position.
Fast wipe (heavy rain).
Normal wipe (moderate rain).
Intermittent wipe (proportional to the speed of the vehicle). Park.
Single wipe (press downwards or pull the stalk briefly towards you, then release). or
Automatic wiping (press down, then release). Single wipe (pull the stalk briefly towards you).

154

Lighting and visibility

Automatic rain sensitive windscreen wipers
The windscreen wipers operate automatically, without any action on the part of the driver, if rain is detected (sensor behind the rear view mirror), adapting their speed to the intensity of the rainfall.

Rear wiper

Switching on

The automatic rain sensitive windscreen wipers must be reactivated by pushing the control stalk downwards, if the ignition has been off for more than one minute.

Briefly push the control stalk downwards. A wiping cycle confirms that the instruction has been accepted. This warning lamp comes on in the instrument panel and a message is displayed.
Switching off
Briefly push the control stalk downwards again, or place the control stalk in another position (Int, 1 or 2). This warning lamp goes off in the instrument panel and a message is displayed.

Operating fault
If a fault occurs with the automatic rain sensitive wipers, the wipers will operate in intermittent mode. Have it checked by PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop.
Do not cover the rain sensor, linked with the sunshine sensor and located in the top of the windscreen behind the rear view mirror. Switch off the automatic rain sensitive wipers when using an automatic car wash. In winter, it is advisable to wait until the windscreen is completely clear of ice before activating the automatic rain sensitive wipers.

Park. Intermittent wipe. Wash-wipe (set duration).

155

Lighting and visibility
Reverse gear
When reverse gear is engaged, the rear wiper will come into operation automatically if the windscreen wipers are operating.
Activation / Deactivation
Activation or deactivation of the function is done in the vehicle configuration menu.
This function is activated by default.

Windscreen and headlamp wash

If a significant accumulation of snow or ice is present, or when using a bicycle carrier on the boot, deactivate the automatic rear wiper.
With the audio system
In the "Personalisation-configuration" menu, activate/deactivate "Rear wipe in reverse gear".
With the touch screen
In the vehicle settings menu, activate/ deactivate "Rear wiper in reverse".

F Pull the windscreen wiper stalk towards you. The screenwash then the wipers operate for a fixed period.
The headlamp wash is only activated if the dipped headlamps are on and the vehicle is moving. With daytime running lamps, to activate the headlamp wash, position the lighting stalk in the dipped beam position.
O n vehicles fitted with automatic air conditioning, any action on the windscreen wash control results in temporary closing of the air intake to avoid odours inside the passenger compartment.

156

Screenwash/headlamp wash level low
In the case of vehicles fitted with headlamp washers, when the fluid reservoir low level is reached this warning lamp comes on in the instrument panel, accompanied by an audible signal and a message.
The warning lamp comes on when the ignition is switched on, or every time the stalk is operated, until the reservoir is refilled. Next time you stop, refill the screenwash / headlamp wash reservoir.

Lighting and visibility

Heated windscreen and washer jets*
This function heats the windscreen and washer
jets under cold conditions.

Switching on
F With the engine running, press this button; its indicator lamp comes on.
The period of operation depends on the ambient temperature. Pressing this button again switches the function off; its indicator lamp goes off.

F Any action on the wiper stalk within one minute after switching off the ignition places the wiper blades vertically on the screen.
F To park the wiper blades again, switch on the ignition and operate the wiper stalk.

Special position of the windscreen wipers

To maintain the effectiveness of the wiper blades, it is advisable to: - handle them with care, - clean them regularly using soapy
water, - avoid using them to retain
cardboard on the windscreen, - replace them at the first signs of
wear.

In area 1, the heating frees the wiper blades when they are stuck by snow or ice. In area 2, the heating improves visibility by avoiding the accumulation of snow when the wipers are operating.

This position permits release of the windscreen wiper blades. It is used for cleaning or replacement of the wiper blades. It can also be useful, in winter, to release the wiper blades from the windscreen.

* Depending on the country of sale. 157

Safety

Hazard warning lamps

Visual warning with all of the direction indicators flashing to alert other road users to a vehicle breakdown, towing or accident.

Automatic operation of hazard warning lamps
When braking in an emergency, depending on the rate of deceleration, as well as when the ABS regulation is invoked or in the event of an impact, the hazard warning lamps come on automatically. They switch off automatically the first time you accelerate. F You can also switch them off by pressing
the button.

F Press this button, all of the direction indicators flash.
They can operate with the ignition off.

Emergency or assistance call
This system allows you to make an emergency or assistance call to the emergency services or to the dedicated PEUGEO T service.
For more information on Audio equipment and telematics and in particular the use of this equipment, refer to the corresponding section.

158

Horn
F Press the central part of the steering wheel.

Safety

Electronic stability control (ESC)

E lectronic stability control (E SC) incorporating the following systems: - anti-lock braking system (ABS) and
electronic brake force distribution (E BFD), - emergency braking assistance (E BA), - wheel anti-slip regulation (ASR) or traction
control, - dynamic stability control (DSC).
Definitions
Anti-lock braking system (ABS) and electronic brake force distribution (EBFD)
This system improves the stability and manoeuvrability of your vehicle when braking and contributes towards improved control on corners, in particular on poor or slippery road surfaces. The ABS prevents wheel lock in the event of emergency braking. The E BFD manages the braking pressure wheel by wheel.

Emergency braking assistance (EBA)
In an emergency, this system enables you to reach the optimum braking pressure more quickly and therefore reduce the stopping distance. It is triggered according to the speed at which the brake pedal is pressed. This is felt by a reduction in the resistance of the pedal and an increase in the effectiveness of the braking.
Anti-slip regulation (ASR)
The ASR system (also known as Traction Control) optimises traction in order to limit wheel slip by acting on the brakes of the driving wheels and on the engine. It also improves the directional stability of the vehicle on acceleration.

Dynamic stability control (DSC)
If there is a difference between the path followed by the vehicle and that required by the driver, the DSC monitors each wheel and automatically acts on the brake of one or more wheels and on the engine to return the vehicle to the required path, within the limits of the laws of physics.

159

Safety

Intelligent traction control
If fitted to your vehicle, it has a system to help driving on snow: intelligent traction control. This system detects situations of difficult surface adhesion that could make it difficult to move off or make progress on deep fresh snow or compacted snow. In these situations, intelligent traction control limits the amount of wheel slip to provide the best traction and trajectory control for your vehicle.
The use of snow tyres is strongly recommended on surfaces offering low levels of grip.

Anti-lock braking system (ABS) and electronic brake force distribution (EBFD)
The fixed illumination of this warning lamp indicates that there is a fault with the ABS. The vehicle retains conventional braking. Drive carefully at moderate speed.
When this warning lamp comes on, coupled with the STOP and ABS warning lamps, accompanied by an audible signal and a message, it indicates that there is a fault with the electronic brake force distribution (E BFD). You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so. In both cases, have the system checked by a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop as soon as possible.

When changing wheels (tyres and rims), ensure that these are approved for your vehicle. Normal operation of the ABS may make itself felt by slight vibrations of the brake pedal.
In emergency braking, press very firmly and maintain this pressure.

160

Dynamic stability control (DSC) and anti-slip regulation (ASR)

F Press this button. Or F Turn the knob to this position.

The indicator lamp in the button or the knob comes on: the DSC system no longer acts on the operation of the engine.

Activation
These systems are activated automatically each time the vehicle is started. As soon as they detect a problem of grip or trajectory, these systems act on the operation of the engine and brakes.
This is indicated by flashing of this warning lamp in the instrument panel.
Deactivation
In exceptional conditions (starting a vehicle which is bogged down, stuck in snow, on soft ground...), it may be advisable to deactivate the DSC system, so that the wheels can move freely and regain grip. But it is recommended that the system be reactivated as soon as possible.

Reactivation
The system is reactivated automatically each time the ignition is switched back on or from 30 mph (50 km/h). However, below 30 mph (50 km/h) you can manually reactivate the system.
F Press this button.
Or
F Turn the knob to this position.
The indicator lamp in the button or the knob goes off.

Safety
Operating fault
If this warning lamp comes on, accompanied by an audible signal and a message in the screen, this indicates a fault with the system. Contact a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop to have the system checked.

The DSC system offers exceptional safety in normal driving, but this should not encourage the driver to take extra risks or drive at high speed. The correct operation of the system depends on observation of the manufacturer's recommendations regarding the wheels (tyres and rims), the braking components, the electronic components and the PEUGEO T assembly and repair procedures. After an impact, have the system checked by a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop.

161

Safety

G rip control
Special patented traction control system which improves traction on snow, mud and sand. This system, the operation of which has been optimised for each situation, allows you to manoeuvre in most conditions of poor grip (encountered during touring use).

Different modes are provided:
Standard (ESC)
This mode is calibrated for a low level of wheel spin, based on the different levels of grip normally encountered on the road.

Snow
This mode adapts its strategy to the conditions of grip encountered for each of the two front wheels on moving off. (mode active up to 30 mph (50 km/h))

The accelerator pedal should be pressed sufficiently to allow the system to use the power of the engine. O peration at high engine speeds is completely normal.
A five-position selector knob allows you to choose the setting best suited to the driving conditions encountered. An indicator lamp associated with each mode comes on to confirm your choice.
Associated with all-seasons Peak Mountain Snow Flake tyres, this system offers a compromise between safety, adhesion and traction. These tyres work equally well in winter and summer.

F Place the knob in this position.
E very time the ignition is switched off, the system automatically resets to this mode.

F Place the knob in this position.

162

Safety

All terrain (mud, damp grass, ...)
This mode, when moving off, allows considerable spin on the wheel with the least grip to optimise clearing of the mud and regain grip. At the same time, the wheel with the most grip is controlled in such a way as to transmit as much torque as possible. When moving, the system optimises wheel spin to respond to the driver's requirements as fully as possible. (mode active up to 50 mph (80 km/h))

Sand
This mode allows little spin on the two driving wheels at the same time to allow the vehicle to move forward and limit the risks of getting stuck in the sand. (mode active up to 75 mph (120 km/h))
F Place the knob in this position. Do not use the other modes on sand as the vehicle may become stuck.

You can deactivate certain functions of the E SC (ASR and DSC) by turning the knob to the "OFF" position. These functions are reactivated automatically from 30 mph (50 km/h) or every time the ignition is switched back on.
Driving advice
Your vehicle is designed principally to drive on tarmac roads but it allows you to drive on other less passable terrain occasionally. However, it does not permit off-road driving such as: - crossing and driving on terrain
which could damage the underbody or strip away components (fuel pipe, fuel cooler...) due to obstacles or stones in particular, - driving on terrain with steep gradients and poor grip, - crossing a stream.

F Place the knob in this position.

163

Safety
Seat belts
Front seat belts

Fastening

Height adjustment

The front seat belts are fitted with a pretensioning and force limiting system. This system improves safety in the front seats in the event of a front or side impact. Depending on the severity of the impact, the pretensioning system instantly tightens the seat belts against the body of the occupants. The pretensioning seat belts are active when the ignition is on. The force limiter reduces the pressure of the seat belt on the chest of the occupant, so improving their protection.

F Pull the strap, then insert the tongue in the buckle.
F Check that the seat belt is fastened correctly by pulling the strap.
Unfastening
F Press the red button on the buckle. FG uide the seat belt as it reels in.

F To lower the attachment point, while moving control A downwards, slide the assembly down to the desired position.
F To raise the attachment point, slide the assembly up to the desired position.
The upper part of the diagonal strap should lie across the shoulder.

164

2 seat front bench seat

Rear seat belts

If your vehicle is fitted with a front bench seat, ensure that each belt is used with its correct buckle. Do not interchange the driver's seat belt or buckle with the centre seat belt or buckle.

If your vehicle is fitted with a 3-seat bench seat (one piece or 1/3 - 2/3 split), these are fitted with three-point seat belts and inertia reels on the outer seats. And the centre seat has its own guide and reel, built into the seat backrest. The seat belt reels for the outer seats in row 2 have force limiters. The seats in row 3 have three-point seat belts with inertia reels.

Safety

For rows 2 and 3, fit each seat belt to its correct buckle. Do not interchange the belts or buckles for the outer seats with the belt or buckle for the centre seat. When folding the outer seats or placing a backrest in the table position, avoid trapping the belt for the centre seat. After folding a rear seat or bench seat, ensure that the seat belt has reeled in correctly and the buckle is ready to receive the belt tongue. When handling the outer seats (removing or refitting) or for access to row 3, avoid trapping the centre belt.

165

Safety

Seat belt warning lamps

If your vehicle has individual front seats: 1. Driver's seat belt not fastened / unfastened
warning lamp in the instrument panel. 2. Front passenger seat belt not fastened /
unfastened warning lamp.

If your vehicle has a 2-seat bench front seat: A.O uter left (driver) seat belt not fastened /
unfastened warning lamp. B. Centre and/or outer seat belt not fastened
warning lamp.

If your vehicle is fitted with individual seats, they have three-point seat belts with their guides and belt reels built into the backrests.

O n switching on the ignition, a warning lamp comes on in the instrument panel if the corresponding seat belt is not fastened or is unfastened.
From about 12 mph (20 km/h) and for two minutes, the warning lamps(s) flash accompanied by an audible signal. Beyond these two minutes, the warning lamps remain on if the driver or front passenger do not fasten their seat belt(s).

When the ignition is switched on, the warning lamp A comes on if the driver's seat belt is not fastened or unfastened. The warning lamp B comes on if the centre and/or an outer seat belt is unfastened.

166

Safety

Advice
The driver must ensure that passengers use the seat belts correctly and that they are all fastened before setting off. Wherever you are seated in the vehicle, always fasten your seat belt, even for short journeys. Do not interchange the seat belt buckles as they will not fulfill their role fully. The seat belts are fitted with an inertia reel permitting automatic adjustment of the length of the strap to your size. The seat belt is stowed automatically when not in use. Before and after use, ensure that the seat belt is reeled in correctly. The lower part of the strap must be positioned as low as possible on the pelvis. The upper part must be positioned in the hollow of the shoulder. The inertia reels are fitted with an automatic locking device which comes into operation in the event of a collision, emergency braking or if the vehicle rolls over. You can release the device by pulling the strap firmly and then releasing it so that it reels in slightly.

In order to be effective, a seat belt must: - be tightened as close to the body as
possible, - be pulled in front of you with a smooth
movement, checking that it does not twist, - be used to restrain only one person, - not bear any trace of cuts or fraying, - not be converted or modified to avoid affecting its performance. In accordance with current safety regulations, for all repairs on your vehicle's seat belts, go to a qualified workshop with the skills and equipment needed, which a PEUGEO T dealer is able to provide. Have your seat belts checked regularly by a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop, particularly if the straps show signs of damage. Clean the seat belt straps with soapy water or a textile cleaning product, sold by PEUGEO T dealers. After folding or moving a seat or rear bench seat, ensure that the seat belt is positioned and reeled in correctly.

Recommendations for children
U se a suitable child seat if the passenger is less than 12 years old or shorter than one and a half metres. Never use the same seat belt to secure more than one person. Never allow a child to travel on your lap. For more information on Child seats, refer to the corresponding section.

In the event of an impact
Depending on the nature and seriousness of the impact, the pretensioning device may be deployed before and independently of the airbags. Deployment of the pretensioners is accompanied by a slight discharge of harmless smoke and a noise, due to the activation of the pyrotechnic cartridge incorporated in the system. In all cases, the airbag warning lamp comes on. Following an impact, have the seat belts system checked, and if necessary replaced, by a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop.

167

Safety

Airbags
System designed to contribute towards improving the safety of the occupants (with the exception of the centre seat in rows 2 and 3, if so equipped) in the event of violent collisions. The airbags supplement the action of the seat belts fitted with force limiters. If a collision occurs, the electronic detectors record and analyse the front and side impacts sustained in the impact detection zones: - in the case of a serious impact, the airbags
are deployed instantly and contribute towards better protection of the occupants of the vehicle (with the exception of the centre seat in rows 2 and 3, if so equipped); immediately after the impact, the airbags deflate rapidly so that they do not hinder visibility or the exit of the occupants, - in the case of a minor or rear impact or in certain roll-over conditions, the airbags may not be deployed; the seat belt alone contributes towards ensuring your protection in these situations.

The airbags do not operate when the ignition is switched off. This equipment will only deploy once. If a second impact occurs (during the same or a subsequent accident), the airbag will not be deployed again.
Impact detection zones
A. Front impact zone. B. Side impact zone.

Deployment of one or more of the airbags is accompanied by a slight emission of smoke and a noise, due to the activation of the pyrotechnic cartridge incorporated in the system. This smoke is not harmful, but sensitive individuals may experience slight irritation. The noise of detonation related to the deployment of one or more airbags may result in a slight loss of hearing for a short time.

168

Front airbags
System which protects the driver and passenger(s) in the event of a serious front impact in order to limit the risk of injury to the head and thorax. The driver's airbag is fitted in the centre of the steering wheel; the front passenger airbag is fitted in the dashboard above the glove box.

Deployment
The airbags are deployed, except the passenger front airbag if it is deactivated, in the event of a serious front impact to all or part of the front impact zone A, in the longitudinal centreline of the vehicle on a horizontal plane and directed from the front to the rear of the vehicle. The front airbag inflates between the thorax and head of the front occupant of the vehicle and the steering wheel, driver's side, and the dashboard, passenger side to cushion their forward movement.

Safety

When driving, keep the glove box closed. O therwise there is a risk of injury in the event of an accident or sudden braking.

169

Safety
Deactivating the passenger front airbag
O nly the passenger front airbag can be deactivated.

To assure the safety of your child, the passenger front airbag must be deactivated when you install a rearward facing child seat on the front passenger seat. O therwise, the child would risk being seriously injured or killed if the airbag were deployed.

Lateral airbags

F With the ignition off, insert the key in the passenger airbag deactivation switch.
F Turn it to the "OFF" position. F Remove the key keeping the switch in the
new position.
When the ignition is on, this warning lamp comes in the seat belt warning display screen. It stays on while the airbag is deactivated.

Reactivating the passenger front airbag
When you remove the child seat, with the ignition off, turn the switch to the "ON" position to reactivate the airbag and so assure the safety of your front passenger(s) in the event of an impact.
When the ignition is switched on, this warning lamp comes on in the seat belt warning display screen for approximately one minute to signal that the front airbag is activated.
Operating fault
If this warning lamp comes on in the instrument panel, you must contact a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop to have the system checked. The airbags may no longer be deployed in the event of a serious impact.

If fitted to your vehicle, this is a system which protects the driver and front passenger in the event of a serious side impact in order to limit the risk of injury to the chest, between the abdomen and head. E ach lateral airbag is fitted in the seat backrest frame, door side.
Deployment
The lateral airbags are deployed unilaterally in the event of a serious side impact applied to all or part of the side impact zone, perpendicular to the longitudinal centreline of the vehicle on a horizontal plane and directed from the outside towards the inside of the vehicle. The lateral airbag inflates between the abdomen and head of the front occupant of the vehicle and the corresponding door trim panel.

170

Curtain airbags (row 2 and 3)

If fitted to your vehicle, this is a system that contributes towards greater protection for the passengers (with the exception of the centre seats) in the event of a serious side impact in order to limit the risk of injury to the side of the head. Each curtain airbag is built into the pillars and the upper passenger compartment area.
Deployment

Operating fault
If this warning lamp comes on in the instrument panel, you must contact a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop to have the system checked.
The airbags may no longer be deployed in the event of a serious impact.

In the event of a minor impact or bump on the side of the vehicle or if the vehicle rolls over, the airbags may not be deployed. In the event of a rear or front collision, none of the lateral airbags is deployed.

The curtain airbag is deployed in the event of a serious side impact applied to all or part of the side impact zone B, perpendicular to the longitudinal centreline of the vehicle on a horizontal plane and directed from the outside towards the inside of the vehicle. The curtain airbag inflates between the outer rear occupant of the vehicle and the windows.

Safety
5
171

Safety

Advice

For the airbags to be fully effective, observe the safety recommendations below:

Sit in a normal upright position. Wear a correctly adjusted seat belt. Do not leave anything between the occupants and the airbags (a child, pet, object...), nor fix or attach anything close to the inflation trajectory of the airbags; this could cause injuries during their deployment. Never modify the original definition of your vehicle, particularly in the area directly around the airbags. After an accident or if the vehicle has been stolen or broken into, have the airbag systems checked. All work on the airbag system must be carried out by a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop. E ven if all of the precautions mentioned are observed, a risk of injury or of minor burns to the head, chest or arms when an airbag is deployed cannot be ruled out.

The bag inflates almost instantly (within a few milliseconds) then deflates within the same time discharging the hot gas via openings provided for this purpose.
Front airbags
Do not drive holding the steering wheel by its spokes or resting your hands on the centre part of the wheel. Passengers must not place their feet on the dashboard. Do not smoke as deployment of the airbags can cause burns or the risk of injury from a cigarette or pipe. Never remove or pierce the steering wheel or hit it violently. Do not fit or attach anything to the steering wheel or dashboard, this could cause injuries with deployment of the airbags.

Lateral airbags
U se only approved covers on the seats, compatible with the deployment the lateral airbags. For information on the range of seat covers suitable for your vehicle, you can contact a PEUGEO T dealer. For more information on Accessories, refer to the corresponding section. Do not fix or attach anything to the seat backs (clothing...). This could cause injury to the chest or arms if the lateral airbag is deployed. Do not sit with the upper part of the body any nearer to the door than necessary.
Curtain airbags
Do not fix or attach anything to the roof. This could cause injury to the head if the curtain airbag is deployed. If fitted on your vehicle, do not remove the grab handles installed on the roof, they play a part in securing the curtain airbags.

172

G eneral points relating to child seats
Although one of PEUGEO T's main criteria when designing your vehicle, the safety of your children also depends on you.

For maximum safety, please observe the following recommendations: - in accordance with E uropean regulations,
all children under the age of 12 or less than one and a half metres tall must travel in approved child seats suited to their weight, on seats fitted with a seat belt or ISO FIX mountings*, - statistically, the safest seats in your vehicle for carrying children are the rear seats, - a child weighing less than 9 kg must travel in the rearward facing position both in the front and in the rear.

PEUGEOT recommends that children should travel on the rear seats of your vehicle: - rearward facing up to the age of 3, - forward facing over the age of 3.

* The regulations on carrying children are specific to each country. Refer to the legislation in force in your country.

Safety
5
173

Safety

Child seat at the rear

Rearward facing

Forward facing

Row 3

When a rearward facing child seat is installed on a rear passenger seat, move the vehicle's front seat forward and straighten the backrest so that the rearward facing child seat does not touch the vehicle's front seat. Adjust the rear seat to the fully back position, with the backrest straightened.

When a forward facing child seat is installed on a rear passenger seat, move the vehicle's front seat forward and straighten the backrest so that the legs of the child in the forward facing child seat do not touch the vehicle's front seat. Adjust the rear seat to the fully back position, with the backrest straightened.

If fitted to your vehicle, when a child seat is installed on a passenger seat in the 3rd row, move the seats in the 2nd row forward and straighten the backrests so that the child seat and the child's legs do not touch the seats in the 2nd row.

E nsure that the seat belt is correctly tensioned. For child seats with a support leg, ensure that this is in firm contact with the floor. If necessary, adjust the front seat of the vehicle.
174

Safety

Child seat at the front*

Rearward facing

Forward facing

When a rearward facing child seat is installed on the front passenger seat, adjust the seat to the fully back and highest position, with the backrest straightened. The passenger's front airbag must be deactivated. O therwise, the child risks being seriously injured or killed if the airbag is deployed.

When a forward facing child seat is installed on the front passenger seat, adjust the vehicle's seat to the fully back and highest position with the seat backrest straightened and leave the passenger's front airbag activated.

Passenger seat in the fully back and highest position.

* Refer to the legislation in force in your country before carrying your child in this seating position.

E nsure that the seat belt is correctly tensioned. For child seats with a support leg, ensure that the support leg is in firm and stable contact with the floor. If necessary, adjust the passenger seat.

5
175

Safety
Deactivating the passenger front airbag
Never install a rearward facing child restraint system on a seat protected by an active front airbag. This could cause the death of the child or serious injury.

Passenger airbag OFF

The warning label present on both sides of the passenger sun visor repeats this advice. In line with current legislation, the following tables contain this warning in all of the languages required.

For more information on the Airbags, refer to the corresponding section.

176

Safety

AR
BG . .
CS NIKDY neumisujte dtské zádrzné zaízení orientované smrem dozadu na sedadlo chránné AKTIVOVANÝM celním AIRBAGEM. Hrozí nebezpecí SMRTI DÍTTE nebo VÁZNÉHO ZRANNÍ.
DA Brug ALDRIG en bagudvendt barnestol på et sæde, der er beskyttet af en AKTIV AIRBAG . BARNE T risikerer at blive ALVO RLIG T KVÆSTE T eller DRÆBT.
DE Montieren Sie auf einem Sitz mit AKTIVIE RTE M Front-Airbag NIE MALS einen Kindersitz oder eine Babyschale entgegen der Fahrtrichtung, das Kind könnte schwere oder sogar tödliche Verletzungen erleiden.
E L , .
E N NE VE R use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DE ATH or SE RIOU S INJU RY to the CHILD can occur
E S NO INSTALAR NU NCA un sistema de retención para niños de espaldas al sentido de la marcha en un asiento protegido mediante un AIRBAG frontal ACTIVADO, ya que podría causar lesiones GRAVES o incluso la MUERTE del niño.
E T Ärge MITTE KU NAG I paigaldage "seljaga sõidusuunas" lapseistet juhi kõrvalistmele, mille E SITU RVAPADI on AKTIVEE RITU D. Turvapadja avanemine võib last TÕSISE LT või E LUO HTLIKU LT vigastada.
FI ÄLÄ KO SKAAN aseta lapsen turvaistuinta selkä ajosuuntaan istuimelle, jonka edessä suojana on käyttöön aktivoitu TU RVATYYNY. Sen laukeaminen voi aiheuttaa LAPSE N KUO LE MAN tai VAKAVAN LOU KKAANTU MISE N.
FR NE JAMAIS installer de système de retenue pour enfants faisant face vers l'arrière sur un siège protégé par un COUSSIN GONFLABLE frontal ACTIVÉ. Cela peut provoquer la MO RT de l'E NFANT ou le BLE SSE R G RAVE ME NT
HR NIKADA ne postavljati djecju sjedalicu leima u smjeru voznje na sjedalo zastieno UKLJUCENIM prednjim ZRACNIM JASTUKOM. To bi moglo uzrokovati SMRT ili TESKU OZLJEDU djeteta.
HU SOHA ne használjon menetiránynak háttal beszerelt gyermekülést AKTIVÁLT (BEKAPCSOLT) FRONTLÉGZSÁKKAL védett ülésen. Ez a gyermek HALÁLÁT vagy SÚLYOS SÉRÜLÉSÉT okozhatja.
IT NO N installare MAI seggiolini per bambini posizionati in senso contrario a quello di marcia su un sedile protetto da un AIRBAG frontale ATTIVATO . Ciò potrebbe provocare la MO RTE o FE RITE G RAVI al bambino.
LT NIEKADA nerenkite vaiko prilaikymo priemons su atgal atgrztu vaiku ant sdyns, kuri saugoma VEIKIANCIOS priekins ORO PAGALVS. Issiskleidus oro pagalvei vaikas gali bti MIRTINAI arba SUNKIAI TRAUMUOTAS.

177

Safety
LV NEKAD NEuzstdiet uz aizmuguri vrstu brnu sdeklti prieksj pasaziera sdviet, kur ir AKTIVIZTS prieksjais DROSBAS GAISA SPILVE NS. Tas var izraist BRNA NVI vai radt NOPIETNUS IEVAINOJUMUS.
MT Qatt m'ghandek thalli tifel/tifla marbut f'siggu dahru lejn l-Airbag attiva, ghaliex tista' tikkawza korriment serju jew anke mewt lit-tifel/tifla NL Plaats NOO IT een kinderzitje met de rug in de rijrichting op een zitplaats waarvan de AIRBAG is INGE SCHAKE LD. Bij het afgaan van de
airbag kan het KIND LE VE NSGE VAARLIJK GE WO ND RAKE N NO Installer ALDRI et barnesete med ryggen mot kjøreretningen i et sete som er beskyttet med en frontal AKTIVE RT KO LLISJO NSPU TE ,
BARNE T risikerer å bli DRE PT eller HARDT SKADE T. PL NIGDY nie instalowa fotelika dziecicego w pozycji "tylem do kierunku jazdy" na siedzeniu wyposaonym w CZOLOW PODUSZK
POWIETRZN w stanie AKTYWNYM. Moe to doprowadzi do MIERCI DZIECKA lub spowodowa u niego POWANE OBRAENIA CIALA. PT NU NCA instale um sistema de retenção para crianças de costas para a estrada num banco protegido por um AIRBAG frontal ACTIVADO . Esta instalação poderá provocar FERIMENTOS GRAVES ou a MORTE da CRIANÇA. RO Nu instalati NICIO DATA un sistem de retinere pentru copii, dispus cu spatele in directia de mers, pe un loc din vehicul protejat cu AIRBAG frontal ACTIVAT. Aceasta ar putea provoca MO ARTE A CO PILU LU I sau RANIRE A lui G RAVA. RU , , . SK NIKDY neinstalujte detské zádrzné zariadenie orientované smerom dozadu na sedadlo chránené AKTIVOVANÝM celným AIRBAGOM. Mohlo by dôjs k SMRTENÉMU alebo VÁZNEMU PORANENIU DIEAA. SL NIKOLI ne namescajte otroskega sedeza s hrbtom v smeri voznje, ce je VARNOSTNA BLAZINA pred sprednjim sopotnikovim sedezem AKTIVIRANA. Taksna namestitev lahko povzroci SMRT OTROKA ali HUDE POSKODBE. SR NIKADA ne koristite decje sediste koje se okree unazad na sedistu zastienim AKTIVNIM VAZDUSNIM JASTUKOM ispred njega, jer mogu nastupiti SMRT ili OZBILJNA POVREDA DETETA. SV Passagerarkrockkudden fram MÅSTE vara avaktiverad om en bakåtvänd bilbarnstol installeras på denna plats. Annars riskerar barnet att DÖDAS eller SKADAS ALLVARLIG T. TR KESNLKLE HAVA YASTII AKTF olan ön koltua yüzü arkaya dönük bir çocuk koltuu yerletirmeyiniz. Bu ÇOCUUN ÖLMESNE veya ÇOK AIR YARALANMASINA sebep olabilir.
178

Child seats recommended by PEUGEO T
PEUGEO T offers a range of child seats which are secured using a three point seat belt.
Group 0+: from birth to 13 kg

L1 "RÖME R Baby-Safe Plus" Installed rearward facing.

L2 "Takata Baby P2C Mini" Installed rearward facing.

Safety
5
179

Safety

Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg

L3 "Fair Bimbofix" Installed forward facing.

L4 "RÖME R Duo Plus Isofix" Installed forward facing.
Groups 2 and 3: from 15 to 36 kg

L5 "Kiddy Cruiserfix Pro" Installed forward facing.
180

L6 "Klippan O ptima" From 22 kg (approximately 6 years), the booster is used on its own. Installed forward facing.

L7 "RÖME R KIDFIX" Can be fitted to the vehicle's ISO FIX
mountings. The child is restrained by the seat belt.
Installed forward facing.

Safety

Locations for child seats secured with a seat belt

In line with E uropean legislation, this table indicates the options for installing child seats secured using a seat belt and universally approved (a) for the weight of the child and the seat in the vehicle.

Weight of the child and indicative age

Seat

With individual seat,
passenger seat

Under 13 kg (groups 0 (b)
and 0+) U p to approx 1 year
U

From 9 to 18 kg (group 1)
1 to 3 years approx
U

From 15 to 25 kg (group 2)
3 to 6 years approx

From 22 to 36 kg (group 3)
6 to 10 years approx

Row 1 (c) (d)

With bench seat, outer seat

With bench seat,

centre seat

Row 2 (e) (f)

O uter seats

Centre seat

Row 3 (e) (f)

O uter seats

Centre seat

181

Safety

(a)U niversal child seat: child seat that can be installed in any vehicle using the seat belt.
(b)G roup 0: from birth to 10 kg. Infant car seats and "car cots" cannot be installed on the front passenger seat.
(c) Consult the legislation in force in your country before installing your child on this seat.
(d) When a rearward facing child seat is installed on the front passenger seat, the front passenger airbag must be deactivated. O therwise the child risks being seriously injured or even killed if the airbag is deployed. When a forward facing child seat is installed on the front passenger seat, the front passenger airbag must remain active.
(e) To install a child seat on a rear seat, move the seat in front forward, then straighten the backrest to leave sufficient space for the child seat and the child's legs.
(f) To install a child seat on a rear seat, rearward facing or forward facing, adjust the rear seat to the fully back position with the backrest straightened.

U Seat suitable for the installation of a child seat secured using the seat belt and universally approved, rearward facing and/ or forward facing.
X Seat not suitable for the installation of a chld seat of the weight group indicated.

Remove and stow the head restraint before installing a child seat with backrest on a passenger seat. Refit the head restraint once the child seat has been removed.

182

Safety
"ISO FIX" mountings

Your vehicle has been approved to the latest ISO FIX regulation. If fitted on your vehicle, the regulation ISO FIX mountings are located by labels. The mountings comprise three rings for each seat: - Two front rings A, located between
the vehicle seat backrest and cushion, indicated by an "ISO FIX" marking, - If fitted to your vehicle, a rear ring B, located behind the vehicle's seat, called the Top Tether, for securing the upper strap, indicated by a "Top Tether" marking. The Top Tether is used to secure the upper strap of child seats that have one. In the event of a front impact, this system limits the forward tipping of the child seat.

This ISO FIX mounting system provides fast, reliable and safe fitting of the child seat in your vehicle. The ISO FIX child seats are fitted with two latches which are secured on the two front rings A. Some also have an upper strap which is attached to the rear ring B. To secure the child seat to the Top Tether: - remove and stow the head restraint before
installing a child seat on this seat (refit it once the child seat has been removed), - pass the child seat upper strap over the top of the seat backrest, between the apertures for the head restraint rods,

- fix the hook on the end of the upper strap to the rear ring B,
- tighten the upper strap.
The incorrect installation of a child seat in a vehicle compromises the child's protection in the event of an accident. O bserve strictly the fitting instructions provided with the child seat.
For information on the possibilities for installing ISO FIX child seats in your vehicle, refer to the locations table.

5
183

Safety

ISO FIX child seats recommended by PEUGEO T
PEUGEO T offers a range of ISO FIX child seats listed and type approved for your vehicle. Refer also to the child seat manufacturer's fitting instructions for information on installing and removing the seat.

Baby P2C Mini and its ISOFIX base (size categories: C, D, E)
Group 0+: from birth to 13 kg

"RÖMER Baby-Safe Plus" and its ISOFIX base (size category: E)
Group 0+: from birth to 13 kg

FAIR Bimbofix ISOFIX and its ISOFIX base (size category: C or A)
Group 0+: from birth up to 13 kg Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg

Installed rearward facing using an ISO FIX base which is attached to the rings A. The base has a support leg, adjustable for height, which sits on the vehicle's floor. This seat can also be secured with a seat belt. In this case only the seat shell is used and is attached to the vehicle's seat by the threepoint seat belt.

Installed rearward facing using an ISO FIX base which is attached to the rings A. The base has a support leg, adjustable for height, which sits on the vehicle's floor. This child seat can also be secured with a seat belt. In this case, only the shell is used and attached to the vehicle's seat by the three-point seat belt.

Can be installed forward facing or rearward facing using an ISO FIX base which is attached to the rings A. The base includes a support leg which extends down to the floor of the vehicle. 6 seat body angle positions. This child seat can also be used in a forward facing position on seats not fitted with ISO FIX mountings. In this case, it must be secured to the vehicle seat by the three-point seat belt. Adjust the front seat of the vehicle so that the child's feet do not touch the backrest.

184

"Baby P2C Midi" and its ISOFIX base (size categories: D, C, A, B, B1)
Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg

"RÖMER Duo Plus ISOFIX" (size category: B1)
Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg

Installed rearward facing using an ISO FIX base which is attached to the rings A. The base has a support leg, adjustable for height, which sits on the vehicle's floor. This child seat can also be used forward facing. This seat can not be secured with a seat belt. We recommend that you use the seat in the rearward facing position up to the age of 3 years.

Is installed only in the forward facing position. Is attached to the rings A and the upper ring B, referred to as the TO P TE THE R, using an upper strap. Three seat body angles: sitting, reclining, lying down. This child seat can also be used on seats not equipped with ISO FIX mountings. In this case, it must be secured to the vehicle's seat by the three-point seat belt. Adjust the position of the vehicle's front seat so that the child's feet are not touching the backrest.

Safety
5
185

Safety
Locations for ISO FIX child seats
In line with E uropean Regulations, this table indicates the options for installing ISO FIX child seats on seats in the vehicle fitted with ISO FIX mountings. In the case of universal and semi-universal ISO FIX child seats, the ISO FIX size category, determined by a letter from A to G, is indicated on the child seat next to the ISO FIX logo.

Type of ISOFIX child seat ISOFIX size category

Row 1 with 2-seat bench seat or individual seat

Right outer seat

Row 2 with 2-seat bench seat in row 1

Centre seat

Left outer seat

186

Less than 10 kg (group 0)
U p to approx. 6 months

Cot

Weight of the child / indicative age

Less than 10 kg (group 0)
Less than 13 kg (group 0+)
U p to approx. 1 year

From 9 to 18 kg (group 1) From approx. 1 to 3 years

rearward facing

forward facing

Not ISOFIX

IL-SU

IUF, IL-SU

IL-SU

IUF, IL-SU

IL-SU

IUF, IL-SU

Type of ISOFIX child seat
ISOFIX size category
Right outer seat Row 2 with individual Centre seat seats in row 1 Left outer seat
Row 3

Safety

Less than 10 kg (group 0)
U p to approx. 6 months

Weight of the child / indicative age

Less than 10 kg (group 0)
Less than 13 kg (group 0+)
U p to approx. 1 year

From 9 to 18 kg (group 1) From 1 to 3 years approx.

Cot

rearward facing

forward facing

IL-SU

IUF, IL-SU

IL-SU

IUF, IL-SU

IL-SU

IUF, IL-SU

187

Safety
IUF Seat suitable for the installation of an Isofix Universal seat, Forward facing secured using the upper strap.
IL-SUSeat suitable for the installation of an Isofix Semi-Universal seat either: - rearward facing fitted with an upper strap or a support leg, - forward facing fitted with a support leg, - an cot fitted with an upper strap or a support leg.
X Seat not suitable for the installation of a child seat of the weight group indicated.

For more information on the ISOFIX mountings and in particular the upper strap, refer to the corresponding section.
Remove and stow the head restraint before fitting a child seat with a backrest to a passenger seat. Refit the head restraint when the child seat is removed.

188

Safety

Recommendations

Child seats
The incorrect installation of a child seat in a vehicle compromises the child's protection in the event of an accident. Check that there is no seat belt or seat belt buckle under the child seat as this could destabilise it. Remember to fasten the seat belts or the child seat harnesses keeping the slack in relation to the child's body to a minimum, even for short journeys. For the installation of a child seat using a seat belt, ensure that this is well tensioned on the child seat and that it is holding the child seat firmly against the seat of your vehicle. If your front passenger seat is adjustable, move it forward if necessary. At the rear seats, always leave sufficient space between the front seat and: - a rearward facing child seat, - the feet of a child seated in a forward
facing child seat. For this, move the front seat forward and if necessary straighten its backrest.

For optimum installation of the forward facing child seat, ensure that the back of the child seat is as close as possible to the backrest of the vehicle's seat, or in contact if possible. The head restraint must be removed before installing a child seat with a backrest on the passenger seat. E nsure that the head restraint is stowed or attached securely so that it is not thrown around the vehicle in the event of sharp braking. Refit the head restraint as soon as the child seat is removed.
Children at the front
The legislation on carrying a child on the front passenger seat is specific to each country. Refer to the legislation in force in the country in which you are driving. Deactivate the passenger front airbag when a rearward facing child seat is installed on the front passenger seat. O therwise, the child would risk being seriously injured or killed if the airbag were deployed.

Installing a booster cushion
The chest part of the seat belt must be positioned on the child's shoulder without touching the neck. E nsure that the lap part of the seat belt passes correctly over the child's thighs. PEUGEO T recommends the use of a booster seat which has a back, fitted with a seat belt guide at shoulder level.
As a safety precaution, do not leave: - one or more children alone and
unsupervised in a vehicle, - a child or an animal in a vehicle which
is exposed to the sun, with the windows closed, - the keys within reach of children inside the vehicle. To prevent accidental opening of the doors, use the child lock. Take care not to open the rear windows by more than one third. To protect young children from the rays of the sun, fit side blinds on the rear windows.

189

Safety
Manual child lock
Mechanical system to prevent opening of the sliding side door using its interior lever.
Locking
F Turn the control on the edge of the side door upwards.
Unlocking
F Turn the control on the edge of the side door downwards.

Electric child lock
Remote control system to prevent opening of the rear doors (sliding side door(s), side-hinged rear doors or tailgate) using their interior controls.
Switching off
F With the ignition on, press this button again.

Switching on
F With the ignition on, press this button.
The indicator lamp in the button comes on, accompanied by a message to confirm that the child lock is on. This indicator lamp remains on until the child lock is switched off. It is still possible to open the doors from the outside.

The indicator lamp in the button goes off, accompanied by a message to confirm that the child lock is off. This indicator lamp remains off while the child lock is switched off.

190

In the event of a serious impact, the electric child lock is deactivated (child lock off) automatically.
Any other status of the indicator lamp indicates a fault with the electric child lock. Have it checked by a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop.

Child lock on rear windows
This mechanical system prevents opening of the left and/or right rear side windows.

This system is independent and in no circumstances does it take the place of the central locking control. Do not drive with the sliding side door open. Check the status of the child lock each time you switch on the ignition. Always remove the key from the ignition when leaving the vehicle, even for a short time.

F Lock/unlock the system using the remote control or the back-up key of the Keyless E ntry and Starting system.

Safety
5
191

Driving

Driving recommendations

O bserve the driving regulations and remain vigilant whatever the traffic conditions. Pay close attention to the traffic and keep your hands on the wheel so that you are ready to react at any time to any eventuality. O n a long journey, a break every two hours is strongly recommended. In difficult weather, drive smoothly, anticipate the need to brake and increase the distance from other vehicles.

If you are obliged to drive through water:

Driving on flooded roads
We strongly advise against driving on flooded roads, as this could cause serious damage to the engine or gearbox, as well as to the electrical systems of your vehicle.

- check that the depth of water does not exceed 15 cm, taking account of waves that might be generated by other users,
- deactivate the Stop & Start system, - drive as slowly as possible without
stalling. In all cases, do not exceed 6 mph (10 km/h), - do not stop and do not switch off the engine. O n leaving the flooded road, as soon as circumstances allow, make several light brake applications to dry the brake discs and pads. If in doubt on the state of your vehicle, contact a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop.

Important!
Never drive with the parking brake applied - Risk of overheating and damage to the braking system! Risk of fire! As the exhaust system of your vehicle is very hot, even several minutes after switching off the engine, do not park or run the engine over areas where inflammable substances and materials are present : grass, leaves, etc.
Never leave a vehicle unsupervised with the engine running. If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine running, apply the parking brake and put the gearbox into neutral or position N or P, depending on the type of gearbox.

192

Driving

To assure the durability of your vehicle and your safety, remember that certain precautions, described hereafter, should be taken when driving your vehicle:
Manoeuve cautiously, at low speed
The dimensions of your vehicle differ from those of a light vehicle, in width, in height, as well as in length, and some obstacles will be more difficult to notice. Manoeuvre slowly. Before turning, check that there are no obstacles at mid-height along the sides. Before reversing, check that there are no obstacles, particularly at high level behind the vehicle. Be aware of the external dimensions, if ladders are fitted.
Load the vehicle correctly
With a load carried, the vehicle must remain within the maximum authorised weight, the G ross Vehicle Weight. To avoid upsetting the balance of the vehicle, the load should be centred and the heaviest part placed on the floor in front of the rear wheels.

It is inadvisable to place heavy loads on a roof rack. Loading the roof rack also requires you not to exceed the maximum load on the roof rack anchorages. O bserve the maximum authorised weight, available from PEUGEO T dealers. Loads must be securely lashed down. Cargo that is not properly secured inside the vehicle can adversely affect the handling of the vehicle and create the risk of accident. If your vehicle is fitted with a drop-side back, the height and width of the load must remain within the overall dimensions of the vehicle.
Drive the vehicle in a prudent and efficient way
Take corners gently. Anticipate the need to brake as the stopping distance is increased, particularly on wet or icy roads. Be aware of the effect of side winds on the vehicle. E ffective eco-driving saves fuel; accelerate progressively, anticipate the need to slow down and adapt your speed to suit the situation. Indicate changes of direction well in advance so that you are seen by other road users.

Take care
The tyres must be inflated to at least the pressures indicated on the label, even overinflated by 0.2 to 0.3 bar for long journeys. After ensuring that no obstacle might prevent closing, guide the movement of the door at the right speed until it closes.

193

Driving

When towing
Distribution of loads
F Distribute the load in the trailer so that the heaviest items are as close as possible to the axle and the nose weight approaches the maximum permitted without exceeding it.
Air density decreases with altitude, thus reducing engine performance. Above 1 000 metres, the maximum towed load must be reduced by 10 % for every 1 000 metres of altitude.
For more information on Weights, refer to the corresponding section.
Side wind
F Take into account the increased sensitivity to side wind.

Cooling
Towing a trailer on a slope increases the temperature of the coolant. As the fan is electrically controlled, its cooling capacity is not dependent on the engine speed. F To lower the engine speed, reduce your
speed. The maximum towed load on a long incline depends on the gradient and the ambient temperature. In all cases, keep a check on the coolant temperature.
F If the warning lamp and the STOP warning lamp come on, stop the vehicle and switch off the engine as soon as possible.

Braking
Towing a trailer increases the braking distance. To avoid overheating of the brakes, the use of engine braking is recommended.
Tyres
F Check the tyre pressures of the towing vehicle and of the trailer, observing the recommended pressures.
Lighting
F Check the electrical lighting and signalling on the trailer and the headlamp beam height of your vehicle.
For more information on Adjusting the headlamp beam height, refer to the corresponding section.

If the ambient temperature is high, it is recommended that the engine be allowed to idle for 1 to 2 minutes after the vehicle comes to a stop, to facilitate its cooling.

The rear parking sensors will be deactivated automatically to avoid the audible signal if a genuine PEUGEO T towbar is used.

194

Driving

Starting-switching off the engine, manual key, remote control

Ignition switch

Starting using the key

The parking brake must be applied.

1. Stop position. 2. Ignition on position. 3. Starting position.

F If your vehicle has an electronic gearbox, place the selector at position N then press the brake pedal firmly.

F If your vehicle has a manual gearbox, place the gear lever in neutral then fully depress the clutch pedal.

F If your vehicle has an automatic gearbox, place the selector at position P then press the brake pedal firmly.

F Insert the key in the ignition switch. The system recognises the starting code.
FU nlock the steering column by simultaneously turning the steering wheel and the key.
In certain circumstances, you may have to turn the steering wheel firmly to move the road wheels (if the wheels are against a kerb, for example).

195

Driving
F Turn the key to position 2, ignition on, to operate the engine pre-heating. F Wait until this warning lamp goes off in the instrument panel then operate the starter motor by turning the key to position 3 until the engine starts, without pressing the accelerator. O nce the engine starts, release the key.

The warning lamp does not come on if the engine is already warm. Depending on the climatic conditions, it is recommended that you proceed as follows: - In temperate conditions, do not
run the engine with the vehicle stationary to warm it up, but rather move off straight away and drive at moderate engine speeds. - In wintry conditions, the pre-heater warning lamp will stay on for a longer period after switching on the ignition; wait until it goes off before starting. - In very severe wintry conditions (temperature below -23°C), to ensure the correct operation and durability of the mechanical components of your vehicle (engine and gearbox), leave the engine running for 4 minutes before moving off. Never leave the engine running in an enclosed area without adequate ventilation: internal combustion engines emit toxic exhaust gases, such as carbon monoxide. Danger of intoxication and death.

If the engine does not start straight away, switch off the ignition. Wait a few moments before trying again. If the engine does not start after a few attempts, do not keep trying: you risk damaging the starter motor and the engine. Call on a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop.

196

Switching off using the key
F Immobilise the vehicle.
F Turn the key fully towards you to position 1 (Stop).
F Remove the key from the ignition switch. F To lock the steering column, turn the
steering wheel until it locks.

To facilitate unlocking of the steering wheel, it is recommended that you place the wheels in the straight ahead position before switching off the engine.
F Check that the parking brake is correctly applied, particularly when parking on a slope.
Never switch off the ignition until the vehicle has been brought to a complete stop.

Driving
When leaving the vehicle, remove the key and lock the doors. As a safety measure (children on board), never leave the vehicle without your remote control with you, even for a short period.

Switching off the engine leads to a loss of braking assistance.

Avoid attaching heavy objects to the key, which would weigh down on its blade in the ignition switch and could cause a malfunction.

Key left in the "Ignition on" position
If the key has been left in the ignition switch at position 2 (Ignition on), the ignition will be switched off automatically after one hour. To switch the ignition back on, turn the key to position 1 (Stop), then back to position 2 (Ignition on).
197

Driving
Starting-switching off the engine, "Keyless Entry and starting"
Starting

F Place the remote control inside the vehicle, in the recognition zone.

F If your vehicle has an automatic gearbox, place the selector at position P then press the brake pedal firmly.

F If your vehicle has a manual gearbox, fully depress and hold down the clutch pedal until the engine starts.

F If your vehicle has an electronic gearbox, place the selector at position N then press the brake pedal firmly.

F Then, press the "START/ STOP" button.
The steering column unlocks and the engine starts more or less immediately.
For Diesel vehicles, in subzero temperatures the engine will not start until the pre-heater warning lamp has gone off. If this warning lamp comes on after pressing the "START/STO P" button, press down on the brake or clutch pedal until the warning lamp goes off, without pressing the "START/STO P" button again, until the engine starts and runs.

198

The presence in the recognition zone of the remote control of the "Keyless E ntry and Starting" system is essential. Never leave the vehicle with the engine running and with the remote control on your person. If the remote control leaves the recognition zone, a message is displayed. Move the remote control into the zone to be able to start the engine.
If one of the starting conditions is not met, a message appears in the instrument panel screen. In some circumstances, it is necessary to turn the steering wheel slightly while pressing the "START/STO P" button to assist unlocking of the steering; a message warns you when this is needed.

Switching off
F Immobilise the vehicle. F With the remote control in the recognition zone, press the "START/STOP" button.
The engine stops and the steering column is locked.
If the vehicle is not immobilised, the engine will not stop.
To avoid any risk of jamming of the pedals: - only use mats which are suited to
the fixings already present in the vehicle; these fixings must be used, - never fit one mat on top of another. The use of mats not approved by PEUGEO T may interfere with access to the pedals and hinder the operation of the cruise control / speed limiter. The mats approved by PEUGEO T have two fixings located below the seat.

Ignition on (without starting)

Driving

With the Keyless E ntry and Starting remote control inside the vehicle, pressing the "START/STO P" button, with no action on the pedals, allows the ignition to be switched on. This also allows the accessories to be used (for example: audio system, lighting...).
F Press the "START/STO P" button, the instrument panel comes on but the engine does not start.
F Press the button again to switch off the ignition and allow the vehicle to be locked.

With the ignition on, the system automatically goes into energy economy mode to maintain an adequate state of charge in the battery.
199

Driving

Back-up starting
Should your vehicle not detect the electronic key in the recognition zone, because the remote control battery is flat, a back-up reader is provided to the left, behind the steering wheel to allow starting.

F Place and hold the remote control against the reader, then:
F If your vehicle has a manual gearbox, place the gear lever in neutral then fully depress the clutch pedal.

Remote control not recognised

F If your vehicle has an automatic gearbox, place the selector at position P then press the brake pedal firmly.

F If your vehicle has an electronic gearbox, place the selector at position N then press the brake pedal firmly.

F Press the "START/STO P" button. The engine starts.
Forced switch-off
In the event of an emergency only and with the vehicle stationary, you can switch off the engine.
To do this, press and hold the "START/STO P" button for about 3 seconds. In this case the steering column locks as soon as the vehicle stops.

If the remote control is no longer in the recognition zone when you close a door or when you (later) request switching off the engine, a message appears in the instrument panel.
F If you want to force switching off the engine, press and hold the "START/STO P" button for about 3 seconds, then contact a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop.

200

Anti-theft protection
Electronic engine immobiliser
The keys contain an electronic chip which has a secret code. When the ignition is switched on, this code must be recognised in order for starting to be possible. This electronic engine immobiliser locks the engine management system a few minutes after the ignition is switched off and prevents starting of the engine by anyone who does not have the key. In the event of a malfunction, you are informed by a message in the instrument panel screen. In this case, your vehicle does not start; contact a PEUGEO T dealer if required.

Parking brake
Application
F With your foot on the brake pedal, pull the parking brake lever up to immobilise your vehicle.
Release on level ground

For reasons of safety and theft protection, do not leave your electronic key in the vehicle, even when you are close to it.
It is recommended that you keep it on your person.

F With your foot on the brake pedal, pull the parking brake lever up gently, press the release button then lower the lever fully.

When the vehicle is being driven, this warning lamp coming on, accompanied by an audible signal and a message, indicates that the parking brake is still on or has not been fully released.

Driving

When parking on a slope, or on a steep slope with a laden vehicle, turn the wheels against the kerb then apply the parking brake.

If your vehicle has a manual gearbox, engage a gear then switch off the ignition.

If your vehicle has an automatic gearbox, place the gear selector at position P then switch off the ignition.
If your vehicle has an electronic gearbox, place the gear selector at position A then switch off the ignition.

Pressing the brake pedal facilitates the application and release of the manual parking brake.

201

Driving

Hill start assist
System which keeps your vehicle immobilised temporarily (approximately 2 seconds) when starting on a gradient, the time it takes to move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. It only operates when: - the vehicle is completely stationary, with
your foot on the brake pedal, - the driver's door is closed. This hill start assist system cannot be deactivated.
Do not leave the vehicle while it is being held in the hill start assist phase. If you need to get out of the vehicle with the engine running, apply the parking brake manually then ensure that the parking brake indicator lamp is on.
If your vehicle has an automatic gearbox and you have to move off on a steep slope (rising or falling) with a loaded vehicle, press the brake pedal, select position D, release the parking brake then release the brake pedal.

On an ascending slope, with the vehicle stationary, the vehicle is held for a momentarily when you release the brake pedal. F If your vehicle has a manual gearbox, place
the lever in the first gear position or in neutral.
F If your vehicle has an automatic gearbox, place the selector at position D or select manual operation M.

On a descending slope, with the vehicle stationary and reverse gear engaged, the vehicle is held momentarily when you release the brake pedal.
Operating fault

F If your vehicle has an electronic gearbox, place the selector at position A or M.

If a fault in the system occurs, this warning lamp comes on accompanied by a message. Contact a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop as soon as possible to have the system checked.

202

5-speed manual gearbox
Engaging reverse gear

Driving
6-speed manual gearbox

Engaging 5th or 6th gear

Engaging reverse gear

F With the clutch pedal fully down, place the gear lever in neutral.
F Push the gear lever to the right then backwards.
O nly engage reverse gear when the vehicle is stationary with the engine at idle.
As a safety precaution and to facilitate starting of the engine: - always select neutral, - press the clutch pedal.

F Move the lever fully to the right to engage 5th or 6th gear.
Failure to follow this advice may cause permanent damage to the gearbox (engagement of 3rd or 4th gear by mistake).

F Raise the ring under the knob and move the gear lever to the left then forwards.

O nly engage reverse gear when the vehicle is stationary with the engine at idle.
As a safety precaution and to facilitate starting of the engine: - always select neutral, - press the clutch pedal.

203

Driving

G ear shift indicator
System which reduces fuel consumption by recommending the most suitable gear.

Depending on the driving situation and your vehicle's equipment, the system may advise you to skip one or more gears. You can follow this instruction without going through the intermediate gears.
O n certain BlueHDi Diesel versions with manual gearbox, the system may suggest changing into neutral (N is displayed in the instrument panel) so that the engine can go into standby (STO P mode with Stop & Start), in certain driving conditions.
The gear engagement recommendations must not be considered compulsory. This is because the configuration of the road, traffic density and safety remain important factors in the choice of the best gear. The gear shift indicator system does not replace the need for vigilance on the part of the driver.

E xample:
- You are in third gear. - You press the accelerator pedal.

This function cannot be deactivated. 204

- The system may suggest that you engage a higher gear.
The information appears in the instrument panel in the form of an arrow. O n vehicles with manual gearbox, the arrow may be accompanied by the recommended gear.
The system adapts its gear change recommendation according to the driving conditions (gradient, load, ...) and the demands of the driver (power, acceleration, braking, ...). The system never suggests: - engaging first gear, - engaging reverse gear.

Driving

Automatic gearbox
Six speed automatic gearbox which offers a choice between the comfort of automatic operation or manual gear changing. Two driving modes are offered: - automatic operation for electronic
management of the gears by the gearbox, - manual operation for sequential changing
of the gears by the driver.

Gear selector
To turn the gear selector in complete safety, it is recommended that you keep your foot on the brake.

Position N can be used in traffic jams or in a car wash tunnel.
Steering mounted controls

When operating automatically, it remains possible to change gear manually using the steering mounted control paddles, when overtaking, for example.

P. Park. F With your foot on the brake, turn the
selector to this position for parking or starting. R. Reverse. F Turn the selector to this position. N. Neutral. F Turn the selector to this position for starting. D. Automatic operation. F Turn the selector to this position. M. Manual operation with sequential gear changing F Selector in position D, press this button then use the steering mounted control paddles to change gear.

6
F Pull the right hand "+" control paddle towards you to change up.
F Pull the left hand "-" control paddle towards you to change down.
The steering mounted control paddles cannot be used to select neutral or to select or come out of reverse.

205

Driving
Displays in the instrument panel Moving off

When you move the gear selector or press the M button, the corresponding symbol appears in the instrument panel. P. Park R. Reverse N. Neutral D. Drive (automatic operation) M. Manual operation 1 to 6.G ear engaged - Invalid value
F If the message "Foot on brake" is displayed in the instrument panel, press the brake pedal firmly.

F With your foot on the brake, select position P.
F Start the engine. If the conditions are not met, there is an audible signal, accompanied by a message in the instrument panel screen. F Release the parking brake. F Select position R, N or D.
If you have to move off on a steep slope with a loaded vehicle, press the brake pedal, select position D, then release the parking brake.
FG radually release the brake pedal. The vehicle moves off.

206

If P is displayed in the instrument panel but the selector is in another position, place the selector in position P to allow the engine to be started. If position N is engaged inadvertently while driving, allow the engine to return to idle then engage position D to accelerate.
When the engine is running at idle, with the brakes released, if position R, D or M is selected, the vehicle moves even without the accelerator being pressed. Never leave children in the vehicle without supervision. As a safety measure, never leave the vehicle without taking your key or remote control with you, even for a short time. When carrying out maintenance with the engine running, apply the parking brake and select position P.

Automatic operation
F Select position D for automatic changing of the six gears.
The gearbox then operates in auto-adaptive mode, without any intervention on the part of the driver. It continuously selects the most suitable gear according to the style of driving, the profile of the road and the load in the vehicle.
For maximum acceleration, without touching the selector press the accelerator pedal down fully (kickdown). The gearbox changes down automatically or maintains the gear selected until the maximum engine speed is reached. O n braking, the gearbox changes down automatically to provide effective engine braking. If you release the accelerator sharply, the gearbox will not change to a higher gear, for safety reasons.

Temporary manual control of gear changes

Driving
Creep function (moving without using the accelerator)
This function provides great flexibility in manoeuvring the vehicle at low speed (when parking, in traffic jams, ...). With the engine at idle, parking brake released and position D, M or R selected, the vehicle moves as soon as you take your foot off the brake pedal (even without pressing the accelerator).

You can temporarily take control of gear changes using the "+" and "-" steering mounted control paddles. The gear change instruction is acted on if the engine speed permits. This function allows you to anticipate certain situations, such as overtaking another vehicle or approaching a bend in the road. Following a few moments with no action on the control paddles, the gearbox returns to automatic operation.

As a safety measure (children on board), never leave the vehicle with the engine running and the doors closed.

Never select position N while the vehicle is moving. Never select position P or R unless the vehicle is completely stationary.

207

Driving
Manual operation

M appears and the gears engaged appear in succession in the instrument panel.
F It is possible to return to automatic operation at any time by pressing button M again.
The indicator associated with the button goes off.

F With the selector in position D, press button M for sequential changing of the six gears.
The indicator associated with the button comes on.

In manual mode it is not necessary to release the accelerator pedal when changing gear.
It is only possible to change from one gear to another if the vehicle speed and engine speed permit.

To save the brakes when descending a steep incline, use engine braking to reduce your speed (take your foot off the accelerator pedal or change down). Keeping the brake pedal pressed continuously for long periods can overheat the brakes, with the risk of damaging the braking system or making it inoperative. O nly use the brakes when necessary, to slow or stop the vehicle.
Depending on the configuration of the road (for example: mountain pass), it may be preferable to use manual operation. This is because automatic operation may not be best suited, not allowing the use of engine braking.

FO perate the "+" or "-" steering mounted control paddle.
208

If the engine speed is too low or too high, the gear selected flashes for a few seconds, then the actual gear engaged is displayed. When the vehicle is stationary or moving very slowly, the gearbox selects gear M1 automatically.

Invalid value during manual operation
This symbol is displayed if a gear is not engaged correctly (gear selector between two positions).
F Place the selector "correctly" at a position.

Stopping the vehicle

O n a steep slope with a loaded vehicle, press the brake pedal, select position P, apply the parking brake then release the brake pedal.

In all circumstances, ensure that the selector is in position P before leaving your vehicle.

Before switching off the engine, select position P then apply the parking brake to immobilise the vehicle.
A stiff point may be noticed when moving to position P. If the selector is not in position P, when the driver's door is opened or approximately 45 seconds after the ignition is switched off, there is an audible signal and a message appears. F Return the selector to position P;
the audible signal stops and the message disappears.

Operating fault
When the ignition is on, a message appears in the instrument panel screen to indicate a gearbox fault.
In this case, the gearbox switches to back-up mode and is locked in 3rd gear. You may feel a substantial knock when changing from P to R and from N to R. This will not cause any damage to the gearbox. Do not exceed 60 mph (100 km/h), local speed restrictions permitting. Have it checked by a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop.

Driving
You risk damaging the gearbox: - if you press the accelerator and
brake pedals at the same time (braking or acceleration must be done only with the right foot), - if you force the selector from position P to another position when the battery is flat.

To reduce fuel consumption when stationary for long periods with the engine running (traffic jam...), position the selector at N and apply the parking brake.

209

Driving

Electronic gearbox
E lectronically controlled gearbox which offers a choice between the comfort of fully automatic operation and manual gear changing. There are two driving modes: - automatic operation for automatic control
of the gears by the gearbox, without any action on the part of the driver, - manual operation for sequential gear changing by the driver using the steering mounted paddles. With automatic operation, you can temporarily take over control of gear changing at any time.

Gear selector
R. Reverse F Turn the selector to this position. N. Neutral. F With your foot on the brake, turn the
selector to this position for starting. A. Automatic operation. F Turn the selector to this position. M. Manual operation with sequential gear
changing. F Turn the selector to this position, then use
the steering mounted control paddles to change gear.
To turn the gear selector in complete safety, it is recommended that you keep your foot on the brake.

Steering mounted control paddles
F Pull the right hand "+" control paddle towards you to change up.
F Pull the left hand "-" control paddle towards you to change down.
The steering mounted paddles cannot be used to select neutral or to select or come out of reverse gear.

210

Display in the instrument panel

Moving off
F Select position N. F Press the brake pedal down fully. F Start the engine.
N appears in the instrument panel screen.

When you move the gear selector, the symbol corresponding to its position is displayed in the instrument panel.

R. Reverse

N. Neutral

AUTO or A. Automatic operation.

M. Manual operation

1 to 6.G ear engaged

Invalid value

If the engine does not start: If N flashes in the instrument panel, accompanied by an audible signal and a message, move the selector to position A then to position N.
If the Foot on brake warning lamp comes on the instrument panel, accompanied by an audible signal and a message "Foot on brake", press the brake pedal firmly.
F Select automatic operation (position A), manual operation (position M), or reverse (position R).
F Release the parking brake. F Progressively take your foot off the brake
pedal; the vehicle then moves off.

Driving
Automatic operation

F After starting the engine, select position A for automatic gear changes

AUTO and the gear engaged are displayed in the instrument panel.

The gearbox operates in auto-active mode, without any action on the part of the driver. It continuously selects the most suitable gear for: - the style of driving, - the profile of the road.

For optimum acceleration, for example when overtaking another vehicle, press the accelerator pedal firmly past the point of resistance.

211

Driving
Temporary manual control of gear changes

Manual operation

It is not necessary to release the accelerator during gear changes. When braking or slowing down, the gearbox changes down automatically to allow the vehicle to accelerate in the correct gear.

F After starting the engine, select position M for sequential gear changing
FO perate the "+" or "-" steering mounted control paddle. AUTO disappears and the gears engaged are displayed successively in the instrument panel.

The change from one gear to another takes place only if the conditions of vehicles speed and engine speed permit; if not, the automatic operation laws are applied temporarily.

212

O n sharp acceleration, the gearbox will not change up unless the driver acts on the steering mounted paddles. Never select neutral N when driving. O nly engage reverse R with the vehicle stationary and your foot on the brake.

Reverse
To engage reverse gear R, the vehicle must be immobilised with your foot on the brake pedal.

Stopping the vehicle

Operating fault

Driving

With the ignition on, the flashing of A or AUTO, accompanied by an audible signal and a message, indicates a malfunction of the gearbox.
Have it checked by a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop.

F Select position R. E ngagement of reverse gear is accompanied by an audible signal.

Before switching off the engine, you can: - move to position N to engage neutral, or - leave the gear engaged; in this case, it will
not be possible to move the vehicle. In both cases, you must apply the parking brake to immobilise the vehicle.

Always press the brake pedal when starting the engine. In all parking situations, you must apply the parking brake to immobilise the vehicle.

At low speed, if reverse gear is requested, the N indicator flashes and the gearbox goes into neutral automatically. To engage reverse, move the selector to position N, then position R.

When immobilising the vehicle, with the engine running, you must move the selector to neutral N. Before doing anything under the bonnet ensure that the selector is in neutral N and that the parking brake is applied.

213

Driving

Stop & Start
The Stop & Start system puts the engine temporarily into standby - STO P mode - during stops in the traffic (red lights, traffic jams, or other...). The engine restarts automatically START mode - as soon as you want to move off. The restart takes place instantly, quickly and silently. Perfect for urban use, the Stop & Start system reduces fuel consumption and exhaust emissions as well as the noise level when stationary.

Going into engine STOP mode
If your vehicle has a manual gearbox, its speed must be below 12 mph (20 km/h) or stationary (depending on engine); the "E CO " indicator lamp comes on in the instrument panel and the engine goes into standby automatically when you place the gear lever in neutral and you release the clutch pedal.
If your vehicle has an automatic gearbox and the vehicle is stationary, the "E CO " indicator lamp comes on and the engine goes into standby automatically when you press the brake pedal or place the gear selector in position N.
If your vehicle has an electronic gearbox and the vehicle's speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h), the "E CO " indicator lamp comes on and the engine goes into standby automatically when you press the brake pedal or place the gear selector in position N.

Stop & Start time counter
(minutes / seconds or hours / minutes) If your vehicle is fitted with Stop & Start, a time counter calculates the time spent in
STO P mode during a journey. It resets to zero every time the ignition is switched on.
For your comfort, during parking manoeuvres, STO P mode is not available for a few seconds after coming out of reverse gear. Stop & Start does not affect the functionality of the vehicle, such as for example, braking, power steering... A slight delay between the vehicle stopping and the engine cutting out may be noticed.
Never refuel with the engine in STO P mode; you must switch off the ignition with the button.

214

Driving

Special cases: STOP mode not available
STO P mode is not invoked in certain temporary conditions (examples: battery charge, engine temperature, braking assistance, ambient temperature) to assure correct operation of the system and mainly when: - the vehicle is on a steep slope (rising or
falling), - the driver's door is open, - a sliding side door is open, - the driver's seat belt is not fastened, - the vehicle has not exceeded 6 mph
(10 km/h) since the last engine start by the driver, - the electric parking brake is applied or being applied, - the engine is needed to maintain a comfortable temperature in the passenger compartment, - demisting is active.
In this case, the "ECO" warning lamp flashes for a few seconds then goes off. This operation is perfectly normal.

Going into engine START mode
If your vehicle has a manual gearbox, the "ECO" indicator lamp goes off in the instrument panel and the engine restarts automatically when you fully depress the clutch pedal.
If your vehicle has an automatic gearbox, the "ECO" lamp goes off in the instrument panel and the engine restarts automatically when: - you release the brake pedal with the gear
selector in position D or M, - you are in position N with the brake pedal
released and you move the gear selector to position D or M, - you engage reverse.
If your vehicle has an electronic gearbox, the "ECO" lamp goes off in the instrument panel and the engine restarts automatically when: - you release the brake pedal with the gear
selector in position A ou M, - you are in position N with the brake pedal
released and you move the gear selector to position A or M, - you enegage reverse.

Special cases: START invoked automatically
START mode is invoked automatically in certain temporary conditions (examples: battery charge, engine temperature, braking assistance, air conditioning setting) to assure correct operation of the system and mainly when: - you open the driver's door, - you open a sliding side door, - you unfasten the driver's seat belt, - the speed of the vehicle exceeds 15 mph
(25 km/h) or 2 mph (3 km/h) (depending on the engine) with a manual gearbox, - the speed of the vehicle exceeds 2 mph (3 km/h) with an automatic gearbox,
In this case the "ECO" warning lamp flashes for a few seconds, then goes off. This operation is perfectly normal.

215

Driving
Deactivation / Activation
With the audio system

With the touch screen
In the Driving menu, activate/deactivate "Stop & Start system".

To deactivate the system:
F Press the button, its indicator lamp comes on, the system is deactivated.
To activate the system: F Press this button, the indicator lamp goes off, the system is activated

If the system has been deactivated in STO P mode, the engine restarts immediately.
The system is reactivated automatically every time the engine is started by the driver.

Opening the bonnet Before doing anything under the bonnet, deactivate the Stop & Start system to avoid the risk of injury related to an automatic change to START mode.
Driving on flooded roads
Before driving through a flooded road, it is strongly recommended that you deactivate the Stop & Start system. For more information on Driving advice, particularly on flooded roads, refer to the corresponding section.

216

Operating fault
Depending on your vehicle's equipment:
In the event of a fault with the system, this warning lamp flashes in the instrument panel.
The warning lamp in this button flashes and a message appears, accompanied by an audible signal.
Have it checked by a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop. In the event of a fault in STO P mode, the vehicle may stall. All of the instrument panel warning lamps come on. Depending on version, an alert message may also be displayed, asking you to place the gear lever in position N and put your foot on the brake pedal. With the vehicle stationary, you must switch off the ignition and then start the engine again.

The Stop & Start system requires a 12 V battery with a special specification and technology.
All work on this type of battery must be done by a PEUGEO T or a qualified workshop. For more information on the 12 V battery, refer to the corresponding section.

Driving
6
217

Driving

Head-up display
System which projects various information onto a smoked blade in the driver's field of vision so that they do not have to take their eyes off the road.
Displays during operation

Buttons

Activation / Deactivation

1.O n. 2.O ff (long press). 3. Brightness adjustment. 4. Display height adjustment.

O nce the system has been activated, the following information is grouped together in the head-up display: A. The speed of your vehicle. B. Cruise control/speed limiter information. C. If your vehicle is so equipped, inter-vehicle
distance information, automatic emergency braking alerts and navigation instructions. D. If your vehicle is so equipped, speed limit information.
218

For more information on Navigation, refer to the Audio and telematics section.

F With the engine running, press button 1 to activate the system and deploy the blade.
F Press and hold button 2 to deactivate the system and retract the blade.
The activated/deactivated state is saved and retained on restarting the engine.

Height adjustment

Brightness adjustment

F With the engine running, adjust the display to the desired height using buttons 4: - up to move the display up, - down to move the display down.

F With the engine running, adjust the brightness of the information displayed using buttons 3: - the "sun" to increase the brightness, - the "moon" to decrease the brightness.

Driving
We recommend that adjustments are made using these buttons only when the vehicle is stationary. When stationary or while driving, no objects should be placed around the blade (or in its recess) so as to not impede deployment of the blade and its correct operation.

In certain extreme weather conditions (rain and/or snow, bright sunshine, ...) the head-up display may not be legible or may suffer temporary interference. Some sunglasses may hamper reading of the information. To clean the blade, use a clean, soft cloth (such as a spectacles cloth or microfibre cloth). Do not use a dry or abrasive cloth or detergent or solvent products as these could scratch the blade or damage the non-reflective coating.

This system operates when the engine is running and the settings are stored when the ignition is switched off.
219

Driving

Memorising speeds
This function allows speeds to be saved, which can then be offered to set the two systems: the speed limiter (to limit the speed of the vehicle) or the cruise control (for a vehicle cruising speed). You can memorise up to six speed settings for each of the two systems.

F Select the system for which you want to memorise new speed settings:
speed limiter
or cruise control.

Programming
The speed settings can be adjusted in the touch screen.

MEM Memorised speeds are recalled by pressing this button.

F In the Driving menu, select "Adjust speed settings".

F Press the button corresponding to the speed setting you want to modify.

As a safety measure, the driver should carry out these operations when stationary.

FE nter the new value using the numerical keypad and confirm.
F Confirm to save the modification and quit the menu.

220

Speed limit recognition
Principles
Depending on equipment, the system takes account of speed limit information from the navigation system mapping.

This system allows the speed limit detected by the camera to be displayed in the instrument panel. Specific speed limits, such as those for heavy goods vehicles, are not displayed. The display of the speed limit in the instrument panel is updated as you pass a speed limit sign intended for cars (light vehicles).

The units for the speed limits (mph or km/h) depend on the country you are driving in. It should be taken into account so that you observe the speed limit. For the system to operate correctly when you change country, the units for speed in the instrument panel must be those for the country you are driving in.

Depending on equipment, using a camera at the top of the windscreen, this system detects and reads speed limit and end of speed limit signs.
Depending on equipment, the system takes account of the camera and information from the navigation system mapping.

Driving

The automatic reading of road signs is a driving assistance system and does not always display speed limits correctly. The speed limit signs present on the road always take priority over the display by the system. The system cannot in any circumstances replace the need for vigilance on the part of the driver. The driver must observe the driving regulations and must adapt the speed of the vehicle to suit the weather and traffic. It is possible for the system to not display the speed limit if it does not detect a speed limit sign within a preset period. The system is designed to detect signs that conform to the Vienna Convention on road signs.

To maintain correct operation of the system: regularly clean the area in front of the camera.

For the speed limit information given by the navigation system to be correct, your mapping software must be regularly updated.
221

Driving
Display in the instrument panel Display of the speed

Activation / Deactivation
The system is activated or deactivated via the vehicle configuration menu.

Head-up display

The system is active but is not detecting speed limit information.

With the audio system

O n detection of speed limit information, the system displays the figure.

In the "Personalisation-configuration" menu, activate/deactivate "Speed recommendation".
With the touch screen

1. Indication of the speed limit. 222

The driver can, if desired, adjust the speed of the vehicle according to the information given by the system.

In the vehicle settings menu, activate/ deactivate "Displaying of the recommended speed.".

Driving

Operating limits
The legislation on speed limits is specific to each country. The system does not take account of reduced speed limits in the following cases: - poor weather (rain, snow), - atmospheric pollution, - trailer, caravan, - driving with snow chains fitted, - puncture repair using the temporary
repair kit, - young drivers.
O peration of the system may be disrupted or it may not work at all in the following situations: - poor visibility (inadequate street lighting,
falling snow, rain, fog), - windscreen area ahead of the camera dirty,
misty, frosty, covered with snow, damaged or masked by a sticker, - fault with the camera, - obsolete or incorrect mapping, - hidden road signs (other vehicles, vegetation, snow), - speed limit signs that do not conform to the standard, are damaged or distorted.

Memorising the speed setting
This memorisation is in addition to the display of Speed limit recognition.
The driver can choose to adapt the speed setting to the speed limit suggested, by pressing the memorisation button at the speed limiter controls, with the standard cruise control or the dynamic cruise control. This speed setting then replaces the previous speed setting for the speed limiter and/or dynamic cruise control.
For more information on the Speed limiter, Cruise control or Dynamic cruise control, refer to the corresponding sections.

Steering mounted controls
1. Select speed limiter/cruise control mode. 2. Memorise a speed setting.

Clean the area of the windscreen in front of the camera regularly.
223

Driving
Display in the instrument panel

Memorising

F When the speed limiter/cruise control is switched on, the corresponding information is displayed.

MEM F Press this button again to confirm the new speed setting.

Head-up display

O n detection of a speed limit sign, the system displays the speed limit value and offers to make it the speed setting. "MEM" flashes in the screen for a few seconds.

3. Speed limiter indication. 4. Memorise the speed. 5. Current speed setting.
224

MEM F Make an initial press on this button to display the suggested limit speed.

Speed limiter ("LIMIT")

System which prevents the vehicle from exceeding the speed programmed by the driver.

O nce the programmed speed limit is reached, additional pressure on the accelerator pedal has no effect.

Steering mounted controls

The programmed speed remains in the memory when the ignition is switched off.

Driving
Display in the instrument panel

The speed limiter cannot, in any circumstances, replace the need to observe speed limits, nor can it replace the need for vigilance on the part of the driver.
For more information on this button and the Dynamic cruise control,
GAP refer to the corresponding section.
For more information on Memorising speeds, refer to the
MEM corresponding section.

Head-up display
1. Select speed limiter mode. 2. Lower the programmed speed. 3. Raise the programmed speed. 4. Speed limiter on / pause. 5. If fitted to your vehicle, display the list of
memorised speeds or memorise the speed suggested by the speed limit recognition system.

For more information on Speed limit recognition and memorising them in particular, refer to the corresponding section.

6. Speed limiter on/pause indication. 7. Speed limiter mode selection indication. 8. Speed value setting.

225

Driving
Switching on / Pause
Switching on the speed limiter requires a programmed speed of at least 20 mph (30 km/h). The speed limiter is paused by operation of the control.

The programmed speed can be exceeded temporarily by pressing the accelerator firmly beyond the point of resistance.
To return to the programmed speed, simply release the accelerator pedal until the vehicle returns to the programmed speed limit.

Adjusting the speed limiter setting
You do not have to switch the speed limiter on in order to set the speed. O nce the function is selected, you can modify the speed setting by: - using buttons 2 and 3, raising or lowering
the speed displayed: F by successive short presses, to modify
by + or - 1 mph (km/h), F by a maintained press, to modify in steps
of + or - 5 mph (km/h).

F Turn thumbwheel 1 to the "LIMIT" position: the speed limiter mode is selected but is not switched on (Pause).
F Switch the speed limiter back on by pressing button 4, if the speed displayed is suitable (by default, the last speed programmed).
F You can temporarily stop the speed limiter by pressing button 4 again: the display confirms that it has been stopped (Pause).
226

- pressing button 5, if your vehicle has speed memorisation: F the six speeds memorised are displayed in the touch screen, F press the button corresponding to the speed limit chosen.
The value is then displayed in the instrument panel. The selection screen closes after a few moments.

Driving

- by pressing button 5, if your vehicle has speed limit recognition: F the speed to be memorised is displayed in the instrument panel, F press button 5 again to save the speed.
The value is then displayed in the instrument panel.
For more information on Speed limit recognition, refer to the
MEM corresponding section.

Temporarily exceeding the programmed speed
F Press firmly on the accelerator pedal, going beyond the point of resistance, to exceed the programmed speed limit.
The speed limiter is deactivated temporarily and the displayed programmed speed flashes. An audible signal accompanies the flashing of the programmed speed when exceeding the speed is not due to an action by the driver (steep hill...). As soon as the vehicle's speed returns to the programmed value, the limiter operates again: the display of the programmed speed becomes steady again.
Switching off

Operating fault

Flashing of the dashes indicates a fault with the speed limiter. Have it checked by a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop.
O n sharp acceleration, as when descending a steep hill, the speed limiter will not be able to prevent the vehicle from exceeding the programmed speed. The limiter is temporarily deactivated and the displayed programmed speed flashes. An audible signal accompanies the flashing of the programmed speed when exceeding the speed is not due to an action by the driver.

F Turn thumbwheel 1 to the "0" position. The display of speed limiter information disappears.

The use of mats not approved by PEUGEO T may interfere with the operation of the speed limiter. To avoid any risk of jamming of the pedals: - ensure that the mat is secured
correctly, - do not fit one mat on top of another.

227

Driving
Cruise control ("CRU ISE")

Steering mounted controls

System which automatically maintains the speed of the vehicle at the value programmed by the driver, without any action on the accelerator pedal.

Switching off the ignition cancels any programmed speed value.

The cruise control system cannot, in any circumstances, replace the need to observe speed limits, nor can it replace the need for vigilance on the part of the driver. You are advised to keep your feet near the pedals at all times.
For more information on Memorising speeds, refer to the
MEM corresponding section.
For more information on Speed limit recognition, refer to the
MEM corresponding section.

1. Select cruise control mode. 2. Programme a speed setting/Lower the
speed setting. 3. Programme a speed setting/Raise the
speed setting. 4. Pause-resume cruise control. 5. If fitted to your vehicle, display the list of
memorised speeds or memorise the speed offered by the speed limit recognition system.

228

Display in the instrument panel

Switching on
The cruise control is switched on manually: it requires a minimum vehicle speed of 25 mph (40 km/h).
If your vehicle has a manual gearbox, third or fourth gear, or higher, must be engaged.

Head-up display

If your vehicle has an automatic or electronic gearbox, second gear or higher must be engaged.

Driving It is possible to exceed the programmed speed temporarily by pressing the accelerator pedal. To return to the programmed speed, simply release the accelerator pedal until the programmed cruise speed is reached again.
6

6. Cruise control pause/resume indication. 7. Cruise control mode selection indication. 8. Speed value setting.

F Turn thumbwheel 1 to the "CRUISE" position: the cruise control mode is selected but is not switched on (Pause).
F Press on button 2 or 3 : your vehicle's current speed becomes the cruise speed.
The cruise control is activated (O N).

229

Driving
Modification of the initial speed setting
If the cruise control is switched on, you can then modify the initial speed in one of the following ways: - using buttons 2 or 3:
F by successive short presses, to modify the speed by + or - 1 mph (km/h),
F by a long press, to modify the speed in steps of + or - 5 mph (km/h),

Pause
The cruise control is paused manually or by pressing the brake or clutch pedal or on triggering of the ESC system for safety reasons.

O nce switched on, you can pause the cruise control at any time by pressing button 4: the screen confirms the pause.

- by pressing on button 5, if your vehicle is equipped with speed memorisation: F the six memorised speeds are displayed in the touch screen, F select a value: it is displayed in the instrument panel.
The selection screen closes after a few moments. The modification is then accepted.

- by pressing on button 5, if your vehicle is equipped with speed memorisation: F the speed to be memorised is displayed in the instrument panel, F press on button 5 again to save the speed.
The value is then displayed in the instrument panel. For more information on Speed limit recognition, refer to the corresponding section.

230

Exceeding the programmed speed
If the programmed speed is exceeded, the displayed speed flashes. O nce the vehicle returns to the programmed speed, the display becomes steady again.
Switching off

Operating fault
Flashing of the dashes indicates a fault with the cruise control. Have it checked by a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop.

F Turn thumbwheel 1 to the "0" position. The display of information related to the cruise control disappears.

Driving
When the cruise control is switched on, be careful if you maintain the pressure on one of the programmed speed changing buttons: this may result in a very rapid change in the speed of your vehicle. Do not use the cruise control on slippery roads or in heavy traffic.

O n a steep descent, the cruise control will not be able to prevent the vehicle from exceeding the programmed speed. O n steep climbs or when towing, the programmed speed may not be achieved or maintained.

The use of mats not approved by PEUGEO T may interfere with the operation of the cruise control. To avoid any risk of jamming of the pedals: - ensure that the mat is secured
correctly, - never fit one mat on top of another.
231

Driving

Dynamic cruise control ("CRU ISE")

This systems allows the vehicle's speed to be maintained at a value set by the driver. In addition it allows (when circumstances permit) an inter-vehicle distance that you have selected to be maintained between your vehicle and the vehicle in front.

Steering mounted controls

Activation / Deactivation
The cruise control selection thumbwheel must be at the "CRU ISE " position, otherwise the selection is not taken into account. Activation or deactivation of the system is via the vehicle configuration menu.
With the touch screen
In the Driving menu, activate/deactivate "Dynamic cruise control".

1. Select cruise control mode. 2. Programme a speed setting/Reduce the
speed setting. 3. Programme a speed setting/Increase the
speed setting. 4. Pause / Resume cruise control. 5. If fitted to your vehicle, display the list of
memorised speeds or memorise the speed suggested by the speed limit recognition system. 6. Select the inter-vehicle distance ("Close", "Normal", "Distant")

The state of the system is memorised on switching off the ignition.

232

By default, the inter-vehicle distance is set at "Normal". O therwise, the last setting made will be used when switching on the system.

Driving

Display in the instrument panel
Head-up display
7. Indication of cruise control pause/resume. 8. Indication of selection of cruise control
mode, or vehicle speed adjustment phase. 9. Cruise speed setting.

Switching on
The dynamic cruise control is switched on manually, it requires that the speed of the vehicle be between 25 mph (40 km/h) and 90 mph (150 km/h). If the cruise speed setting is above 90 mph (150 km/h), the dynamic cruise control switches to normal cruise control mode (without automatic regulation of the safe inter-vehicle distance).
If your vehicle has a manual gearbox, third or fourth gear, or higher, must be engaged.
If your vehicle has an automatic or electronic gearbox, second gear or higher must be engaged.
For more information on the Cruise control, refer to the corresponding section.

The dynamic cruise control must be selected in the "Driving" menu.

F Turn the thumbwheel 1 to the "CRUISE" position: cruise control mode is selected, but not started (Pause).
F Press one of the buttons 2 or 3: the current speed of your vehicle becomes the cruise speed setting.
The cruise control is activated (O N).

For more information on the Head-up display, refer to the corresponding section.
233

Driving

Modification of the cruise control speed only
If the cruise control is on, you can then modify the initial speed: - using button 2 or 3:
F by successive short presses, to modify by steps of + or - 1 mph (km/h),
F by a maintained press, to modify in steps of + or - 5 mph (km/h).

- by pressing button 5, if your vehicle has speed limit recognition: F the speed to memorise is displayed in the instrument panel, F press button 5 again to save the speed.
The setting is then displayed in the instrument panel.

- by pressing button 5, if your vehicle has speed memorisation: F the six memorised settings are displayed in the touch screen, F choose a speed setting: it is displayed in the instrument panel.
The selection screen closes after a few moments. The modification is then taken into account.

For more information on Speed limit recognition and in particular
MEM its memorisation, refer to the corresponding section.
As a precaution, it is recommended that you select a cruise speed setting close to the current speed of your vehicle.

Inter-vehicle distance
U sing a radar with a range of about 100 metres, located at the front of the vehicle, this system detects a vehicle running in front of your vehicle. It automatically adapts the speed of your vehicle to that of the vehicle in front. If the vehicle in front is running more slowly, the system progressively reduces the speed of your vehicle using just engine braking (as if the driver had pressed the "-" button). If your vehicle is too close to, or approaching too quickly the vehicle in front, the dynamic cruise control is automatically deactivated. The driver is then alerted by an audible signal, accompanied by a message. If the vehicle in front accelerates or changes lane, the dynamic cruise control progressively accelerates your vehicle to return to the programmed speed. If the driver operates a direction indicator to overtake a slower vehicle, the dynamic cruise control allows your vehicle to temporarily approach the vehicle in front to assist the overtaking manoeuvre, though never exceeding the programmed speed.

234

Driving

Modification of the inter-vehicle distance
F Press button 6 to select a new inter-vehicle distance setting from the three levels ("Close", "Normal", "Distant").
This value remains in memory, regardless of the state of the system.

In the event of the presence of a vehicle detected by the inter-vehicle distance radar, if the speed selected is too far above the speed of that vehicle, the system is not activated and the alert message "Activation not possible, conditions unsuitable" is displayed until driving conditions are safe to allow activation of the system.
The inter-vehicle distance setting is memorised when the ignition is switched off.
Exceeding the programmed speed
It is possible to exceed the programmed speed temporarily by depressing the accelerator pedal.
Simply release the accelerator pedal to return to the programmed speed.

Pause

The dynamic cruise control can be paused manually with the control, or automatically: - by pressing the brake or clutch pedal, - in the event of operation of the E SC, for
safety reasons, - when an inter-vehicle distance threshold
is reached (calculated according to the relative speeds of your vehicle and the vehicle in front and the inter-vehicle distance setting selected), - when the distance between your vehicle and the one in front becomes too small, - when the speed of the vehicle in front is too low, - when the speed of your vehicle becomes too low.

If the programmed setting is unintentionally exceeded, descending a steep hill for example, the speed setting in the instrument panel flashes as a warning.
235

Driving

Driving situations and associated alerts
The following table describes the alerts and the messages displayed for the different driving situations. The display of these alerts is not sequential.

Symbol

Associated message

Comments

No vehicle detected: the system operates as a standard cruise control.

Detection of a vehicle, at the limit of the range of the radar: the system operates as a standard cruise control.

"SPEE D ADJU STE D" "SPEE D ADJU STE D"

Detection of a vehicle that is too close or running at a speed lower than your vehicle's cruise speed setting. The system uses engine braking to slow your vehicle (within a limit of 20 mph (30 km/h)) and then hold it at the speed of the vehicle in front so as to observe the programmed intervehicle time. When automatically slowing down behind a vehicle, your true speed may be higher than the "adjusted speed" displayed.
When the adjusted speed reaches the limit of regulation (speed setting less than 20 mph (30 km/h)), the adjusted speed flashes together with the speed setting to signal that automatic deactivation of the system is imminent.

"Cruise control paused"

If the system exceeds the limit of speed adjustment possible by the system and in the absence of any reaction by the driver (operation of the direction indicator, change of lane, reduction of the speed of the vehicle), the system is automatically paused. The display of the deactivation message is accompanied by an audible signal.

236

Driving

When the dynamic cruise control is automatically paused, it can only be reactivated when safe conditions are restored. The message "Activation not possible, conditions unsuitable" is displayed while reactivation is not possible. When the conditions allow, it is recommended that the function be reactivated by pressing button 2 (SE T+) or 3 (SE T-), which will make the current speed of your vehicle the new cruise speed setting, rather than by pressing button 4 (on/pause) which reactivates the cruise control using the old cruise speed setting, which may be very different from the current speed of your vehicle.

Limits of operation
The speed regulation range is limited to a maximum difference of 20 mph (30 km/h) between the speed setting and the speed of the vehicle in front. Above this, the system goes into pause if the safe distance becomes too small. The dynamic cruise control uses only engine braking to slow the vehicle. Consequently the vehicle loses speed slowly, as when releasing the accelerator pedal. The system is paused automatically: - if the vehicle in front slows down too much
or too suddenly, and the driver does not brake, - if a vehicle comes between your vehicle and the vehicle in front, - if the system does not slow the vehicle enough to continue to maintain a safe distance, for example when descending a steep hill.
As the radar's field of detection is quite narrow, it is possible that the system may not detect:

- vehicles not running in the middle of the lane,
- vehicles entering a corner, - vehicles changing lane at the last moment.
The cruise control does not take account of: - stationary vehicles, - vehicles driving in the opposite
direction.

- vehicles of reduced width, such as motorcycles, for example,
237

Driving
Operating fault
In the event of a fault with the dynamic cruise control, you are alerted by an audible signal and display of the message message "Driving aid functions fault". Have the system checked by a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop.
The dynamic cruise control cannot in any circumstances replace the observation of speed limits, nor the need for the vigilance on the part of the driver.

The dynamic cruise control operates by day and at night, in fog or moderate rainfall.
The system does not act on the braking system, but works only with engine braking. The regulation range is limited: there will no longer be any adjustment of speed if the difference between the programmed speed setting and the speed of the vehicle in front becomes too high.
If the difference between the programmed speed setting and the speed of the vehicle in front is too great, the speed cannot be adjusted: the cruise control is automatically deactivated.

When the cruise control is working, take care if making a maintained press on one of the cruise control programmed speed modification buttons: this can lead to a very quick change in the speed of your vehicle. Do not use the dynamic cruise control on slippery surfaces or in heavy traffic.
When descending a steep hill, the cruise control may not be able to prevent the vehicle from exceeding the programmed speed. When ascending a steep hill or when towing, it might not be possible to achieve or maintain the programmed speed.
The use of mats not approved by PEUGEO T may interfere with the operation of the dynamic cruise control. To avoid any risk of jamming the pedals: - ensure that mats are secured
correctly, - never fit one mat on top of another. It is recommended that you always keep your feet close to the pedals.

238

Collision Risk Alert and Active Safety Brake

The Collision Risk Alert system allows the driver to be warned that their vehicle is at risk of collision with the vehicle in front or a pedestrian in their traffic lane. The Active Safety Brake system intervenes following the alert if the driver does not react quickly enough and does not operate the vehicle's brakes. If the driver fails to act, it contributes towards avoiding a collision or limiting its severity by reducing the speed of your vehicle.

These systems use a radar located in the front bumper and a camera at the top of the windscreen.
These system are designed to improve road safety. It is the driver's responsibility to continuously monitor the state of the traffic, observing the driving regulations. These systems do not replace the need for vigilance on the part of the driver.

Driving
Conditions for operation
The Collision Risk Alert system only operates: - with a registered vehicle pointing in the
same direction as the traffic, moving or stationary, - with pedestrians. - from 4 mph (7 km/h) (and is deactivated at 3 mph (5 km/h)).

The Active Safety Brake system operates: - between 3 and 87 mph (5 and 140 km/h), in
the case of a moving vehicle, - at a speed below 50 mph (80 km/h), in the
case of a stationary vehicle, - at a speed below 36 mph (60 km/h), in the
case of a pedestrian, - if the passenger seat belts are fastened, - if the vehicle is not accelerating sharply, - if the vehicle is not in a tight corner.

239

Driving

The Active Safety Brake system does not operate: - if the front bumper is damaged, - if the system has been triggered in the last
10 seconds, - if the electronic stability control system has
a fault.
Following an impact, the system is automatically disabled; contact a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop to have the system checked.

Limits of operation
It is recommended that the system be deactivated in the vehicle configuration menu in the following cases: - if the windscreen has impact damage close
to the detection camera, - when towing a trailer or caravan, - when a load on the roof rack extends
beyond the windscreen (for example: long objects), - when the vehicle is being towed, with the engine running, - when a "space-saver" type spare wheel is fitted (if your vehicle has one), - when on a rolling road for a service in a workshop, - when in an automatic car wash, - if the brake lamps are not working.

Collision Risk Alert
Depending on the degree of risk of collision detected by the system and the alert threshold chosen, different levels of alert can be triggered and displayed in the instrument panel or the head-up display.
This information also appears in the head-up display. For more information on the Head-up display, refer to the corresponding section.
Level 1 : visual alert only, warning you that the vehicle ahead is very close. A message on your vigilance is displayed as you close on the vehicle ahead.
This level of alert is based on the inter-vehicle time between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead.

240

Driving

Level 2: visual and audible alert, warning you that a collision is imminent. A message indicating that you should brake is displayed.
This level of alert is based on the time before collision. It takes account of the vehicle dynamics, the speed of your vehicle and the one in front, the environmental conditions, the operation of the vehicle (cornering, pedals pressed, etc.) to trigger the alert at the best moment.
Where the speed of your vehicle is too high approaching another vehicle, the first level of alert may not be displayed: the level 2 alert may be displayed directly. Furthermore, the level 1 alert is never displayed with the "Close" threshold. Poor weather conditions (very heavy rain, accumulation of snow in front of the radar and the camera) may hinder the operation of the system, with the display of an operating fault message. The system remains out of service until the message disappears.

Programming the alert thresholds
The thresholds for triggering an alert determine how you wish to be warned of the presence of a vehicle moving or stationary ahead of you, or a pedestrian in your traffic lane. You can select one of three thresholds: - "Distant", to be warned early (cautious
driving). - "Normal". - "Close", to be warned later.

With the audio system

In the "Personalisation-configuration" menu, activate/deactivate "Auto. emergency braking". Then modify the alert threshold.

With the touch screen

In the vehicle settings menu, activate/ deactivate "Collision risk alert and automatic braking".

Then modify the alert threshold. Press on "Confirm" to save the change.

241

Driving
Active Safety Brake

If the radar and the camera have confirmed the presence of a vehicle or a pedestrian, this warning lamp flashes when the system is operating.
Important: if operation of the automatic emergency braking is triggered, you should take back control of your vehicle and brake with the pedal to add to or finish the automatic braking.
The driver can take back control of the vehicle at any time by sharply turning the steering wheel and/or pressing the accelerator pedal.

O peration of the system may be felt by slight vibration in the brake pedal. If the vehicle comes to a complete stop, the automatic braking is maintained for 1 to 2 seconds. If your vehicle has a manual gearbox, in the event of the automatic emergency braking bringing the vehicle to a complete stop, the engine may stall. If your vehicle has an automatic gearbox, in the event of the automatic emergency braking bringing the vehicle to a complete stop, the vehicle will move off again; press the brake pedal.

This system, also called automatic emergency braking, aims to reduce the speed of impact or avoid a frontal collision by your vehicle (between 3 and 87 mph (5 and 140 km/h) where the driver fails to react. U sing a radar and a camera, this system acts on the vehicle's braking system.
242

If automatic emergency braking is not activated, you are alerted by the fixed display of this warning lamp accompanied by a message.

Intelligent emergency braking assistance
If the driver does not brake sufficiently to avoid an accident, this system will complete the braking. This emergency braking system will not act if you press the brake pedal.

Driving

Deactivation / Activation of the alert and the braking
By default, the function is automatically activated at every engine start. The deactivation or activation of the function is done in the vehicle configuration menu.

Operating fault
In the event of a fault, you are alerted by the illumination of this warning lamp, accompanied by an audible signal and a message. Contact a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop.

With the audio system
In the "Personalisation-configuration" menu, activate/deactivate "Auto. emergency braking".
With the touch screen
In the vehicle settings menu, activate/ deactivate "Collision risk alert and automatic braking".

There may be interference in the operation of the camera or it not work at all in the following situations: - poor visibility (inadequate street
lighting, falling snow or rain, fog, ...), - dazzle (headlamps of an
approaching vehicle on the other side of the road, low sun, reflection on a wet road, leaving a tunnel, alternating between light and shade, ...), - the area in front of the windscreen: dirty, misty, frosty, snow-covered, damaged or covered by a sticker. The operation of the radar, located in the front bumper, may be disturbed in certain weather conditions: with accumulations of snow, ice, mud, ...

243

Driving

If one of the two sensors (camera or radar) is masked or its visibility is reduced, while the other sensor is able to work normally, the system still operates, but at a lower level of performance. This is not indicated by a message or a warning lamp. To ensure correct operation of the radar radar, do not paint over the paintwork on the vehicle's bumper.

Keep the windscreen in front of the camera clean. Do not allow snow to accumulate on the bonnet or roof of the vehicle as this could mask the camera's view.
Clean the front bumper, removing the snow, mud, ...

244

Driving

Lane departure warning system

Detection - Alert

System that uses a camera to recognise continuous or broken lines on traffic lanes and triggers an alert if the vehicle wanders off line. If the direction indicator is not used at speeds above 37 mph (60 km/h) and there is a risk of one of these lines on the ground being crossed, the system triggers the alert. The system is particularly useful on motorways and fast roads.

You are alerted by the flashing of this warning lamp in the instrument panel, accompanied by an audible signal.
No alert is given while the direction indicators are operating and for approximately 20 seconds after the direction indicators are switched off.

Activation / Deactivation
The system is activated or deactivated via the vehicle configuration menu.
With the audio system

The lane departure warning system cannot in any circumstances replace the need for vigilance on the part of the driver. It is necessary to observe the driving regulations and to take a break every two hours.

To activate the system:
F Press on this buttton, its indicator lamp comes on, the system is activated.
To deactivate the system:
F Press on this buttton, its indicator lamp goes off, the system is deactivated.

245

Driving
With the touch screen

Operating fault

In the Driving menu, activate/deactivate "Lane departure warning".

Depending on your vehicle's equipment:
The indicator lamp in this button flashes.

or
The button flashes and a fault appears. Contact a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop.

The detection may be impeded: - if the markings on the ground are
worn and do not contrast well with the road surface, - if the windscreen is dirty, - in certain severe weather conditions: fog, heavy rain, snow, shade, bright sunlight and direct exposure to the sun (low sun, leaving a tunnel, ...).

246

Driving

Fatigue detection system

It is recommended that you take a break as soon as you feel tired or at least every two hours. Depending on version, the vehicle either has the "Driving time warning system" only, or this combined with the "Fatigue detection system".

The system triggers an alert once it detects that the driver has not taken a break after two hours of driving at a speed above 40 mph (65 km/h).

Driving time warning

The system resets itself if one of the following conditions is met: - engine running, the vehicle has been
stationary for more than 15 minutes, - the ignition has been switched off for a few
minutes, - the driver's seat belt is unfastened and
their door is open.
As soon as the speed of the vehicle drops below 40 mph (65 km/h), the system goes into standby. The driving time is counted again once the speed is above 40 mph (65 km/h).

This alert takes the form of the display of a message encouraging you to take a break, accompanied by an audible signal. If the driver does not follow this advice, the alert is repeated hourly until the vehicle is stopped.

The system cannot in any circumstances replace the need for vigilance on the part of the driver. Do not take the wheel if you are tired.

Activation / Deactivation
The system is activated or deactivated via the vehicle configuration menu.
With the audio system
In the "Personalisation-configuration" menu, activate/deactivate "Fatigue Detection System".
With the touch screen
In the vehicle settings menu, activate/ deactivate "Fatigue Detection System".

247

Driving
Fatigue detection system
Depending on version, the "Driving time warning system" may be combined with the "Fatigue detection system".

O nce the system considers that the behaviour of the vehicle suggests a certain level of fatigue or inattention by the driver, it triggers the first level of alert.

U sing a camera placed at the top of the windscreen, the system assesses the driver's level of vigilance by identifying variations in trajectory compared to the lane markings. This system is particularly suited to fast roads (speed higher than 40 mph (65 km/h)).

The driver is then alerted by the message "Take care!", accompanied by an audible signal.
After three first level alerts, the system triggers a new alert with the message "Take a break!", accompanied by a more pronounced audible signal.

The system cannot, in any circumstances, replace the need for vigilance on the part of the driver. Do not drive if you are tired or taking medicines that can cause drowsiness.

248

In certain driving conditions (poor road surface or strong winds), the system may give alerts independent of the driver's level of vigilance.
The following situations may interfere with operation of the system or prevent it working: - poor visibility (inadequate lighting
of the roadway, falling snow, heavy rain, dense fog, ...), - dazzle (headlamps of an oncoming vehicle, low sun, reflections on a damp road, leaving a tunnel, alternating shade and light, ...), - windscreen area located in front of the camera: dirty, misted, frostcovered, snow-covered, damaged or covered by a sticker, - lane markings absent, worn, masked (snow, mud) or multiple (roadworks, ...), - close to the vehicle ahead (lane markings not detected), - roads that are narrow, winding, ...

Blind spot monitoring system

This driving assistance system warns the driver of the presence of another vehicle in the blind spot angle of their vehicle (areas masked from the driver's field of vision), as soon as this presents a potential danger.

A warning lamp appears in the door mirror on the side in question: - immediately, when being overtaken, - after a delay of about one second, when
overtaking a vehicle slowly.

This system is designed to improve safety when driving and is in no circumstances a substitute for the use of the interior rear view mirror and door mirrors. It is the driver's responsibility to constantly check the traffic, to assess the distances and relative speeds of other vehicles and to predict their movements before deciding whether to change lane. The blind spot sensor system does not replace the need for vigilance on the part of the driver.

Driving

The alert is given by a warning lamp which comes on in the door mirror on the side in question as soon as a vehicle - car, lorry, bicycle - is detected and the following conditions are fulfilled: - all the vehicles must be moving in the
same direction and on adjacent lanes, - the speed of your vehicle is between 7 and
87 mph (12 and 140 km/h), - when you overtake a vehicle with a speed
difference of less than 6 mph (10 km/h), - when a vehicle overtakes you with a speed
difference of less than 15 mph (25 km/h), - the traffic must be flowing normally, - in the case of an overtaking manoeuvre,
if this is prolonged and the vehicle being overtaken returns to the blind spot, - you are driving on a straight or slightly curved road, - your vehicle is not pulling a trailer, a caravan...

249

Driving

Activation / Deactivation
The system is activated or deactivated via the vehicle configuration menu.
With the audio system

No alert will be given in the following situations: - in the presence of immobile objects
(parked vehicles, barriers, street lamps, road signs...), - with vehicles moving in the opposite direction, - driving on a winding road or in a sharp corner,

- when overtaking (or being overtaken by) a very long vehicle (lorry, coach...) which is at the same time detected at the rear in the blind spot angle and present in the driver's forward field of vision,
- in very heavy traffic: vehicles detected in front and behind are confused with a lorry or an immobile object,
- when overtaking quickly.

To activate the system:
F Press on this buttton, its indicator lamp comes on, the system is activated.

To eactivate the system:
F Press on this buttton, its indicator lamp goes off, the system is deactivated.

250

With the touch screen

Operating fault
Depending on your vehicle's equipment:

In the Driving menu, activate/deactivate "Blind spot monitoring".
The state of the system remains in memory on switching off the ignition.
The system is automatically deactivated when towing with a towbar approved by PEUGEO T.

or
In the event of a fault, these warning lamps flash.
The indicator lamp in this button flashes and a message appears, accompanied by an audible signal.
Have it checked by a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop.

Driving

The system may suffer temporary interference in certain weather conditions (rain, hail...). In particular, driving on a wet surface or moving from a dry area to a wet area can cause false alerts (for example, the presence of a fog of water droplets in the blind spot angle is interpreted as a vehicle). In bad or wintry weather, ensure that the sensors are not covered by mud, ice or snow. Take care not to cover the warning zone in the door mirrors or the detection zones on the front and rear bumpers with adhesive labels or other objects; they may hamper the correct operation of the system.

High pressure jet wash When washing your vehicle, do not place the tip of the lance within 30 cm of the sensors as otherwise there is a risk of damaging them.
251

Driving
Parking sensors

Visual assistance
Rear parking sensors
The system is switched on by engaging reverse gear. This is confirmed by an audible signal. The system is switched off when you come out of reverse gear.
Audible assistance

This system indicates the proximity of an obstacle (examples: pedestrian, vehicle, tree, gate) which comes within the field of detection of sensors located in the bumper. Certain types of obstacle (examples: stake, roadworks cone) detected initially will no longer be detected at the end of the manoeuvre, if they are located in blind spots in the sensors' field of detection.
This system cannot in any circumstances replace the need for vigilance on the part of the driver.

The proximity information is given by an intermittent audible signal, the frequency of which increases as the vehicle approaches the obstacle. The sound emitted by the speaker (right or left) indicates the side on which the obstacle is located. When the distance between the vehicle and the obstacle becomes less than approximately thirty centimetres, the audible signal becomes continuous.

This supplements the audible signal by displaying bars in the screen or the instrument panel which move progressively nearer to the vehicle. When the obstacle is near, the "Danger" symbol is displayed.

252

Driving

Front parking sensors
As an addition to the rear parking sensors, the front parking sensors are triggered when an obstacle is detected in front and the speed of the vehicle is still below 6 mph (10 km/h). The front parking sensors are interrupted if the vehicle stops for more than three seconds in forward gear, if no further obstacles are detected or when the speed of the vehicle exceeds 6 mph (10 km/h).

Deactivation / Activation
Deactivation or activation of the system is done via the vehicle configuration menu.
The system will be automatically deactivated where a towbar or towbarmounted bicycle carrier is fitted (vehicle fitted with a towbar installed as recommended by a PEUGEO T dealer).
With the audio system
In the "Personalisation-configuration" menu, activate/deactivate "Parking assistance".
With the touch screen

Operating fault

When engaging reverse and depending on the vehicle's equipment, in the event of a fault:

This warning lamp comes on and a message appears, accompanied by an audible signal.
The warning lamp in this button flashes and a message appears, accompanied by an audible signal.

Contact a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop.
In bad weather or in winter, ensure that the sensors are not covered with mud, ice or snow. When reverse gear is engaged, an audible signal (long beep) indicates that the sensors may be dirty. Certain sound sources (motorcycle, lorry, pneumatic drill, etc.) may trigger the audible signals of the parking sensor system.

The sound from the speakers (front or rear) indicates whether the obstacle is in front or behind.

In the Driving menu, activate/deactivate "Parking sensors".

High pressure jet wash When washing your vehicle, do not place the tip of the lance within 30 cm of the sensors, as there is a risk of damaging them.
253

Driving
Reversing camera with display in the interior mirror

The image is displayed in the interior mirror.

The visual aid reversing camera is activated automatically when reverse gear is engaged.
The function may be completed with parking sensors.
The reversing camera cannot in any circumstances be a substitute for vigilance on the part of the driver.

The blue lines represent the width of your vehicle including the mirrors. The red line represents a distance of 30 cm from the rear bumper and the thin blue lines respectively 1 m (A) and 2 m (B).

O pening the tailgate or rear door (depending on equipment) can interfere with the display. If a side door is open, allow for the space it occupies. Some deformation of the image is normal.
Check the cleanliness of the camera lens regularly. Clean the reversing camera regularly using a soft, dry cloth.
High pressure jet washing (if muddy, for example) When washing your vehicle, do not place the tip of the lance within 30 cm of the camera as there is a risk of damaging it.

254

Driving

180° rear vision
This system allows the near surroundings of the vehicle to be viewed in the display screen using cameras located at the rear of the vehicle. The parking sensors in the rear and/or front bumper complete the information on the view from above the vehicle (right-hand part). In addition to the view from above the vehicle (right-hand part) several types of view can be displayed (left-hand part): - standard rear view, - 180° rear view, - reconstructed zoom rear view.

The system displays the contextual view (left-hand part) as well as the view from above the vehicle in its close surroundings. By default, automatic mode is activated. In this mode, the system chooses the best view to display (standard or zoom) according to the information received from the parking sensors. The 180° view is only available through the menus.
Principle of image reconstruction

U sing the rear camera, the system records the vehicle's surroundings during a manoeuvre. An image from above your vehicle in its close surroundings is reconstructed (represented between the blue brackets) in real time and as the manoeuvre progresses. This representation facilitates the alignment of your vehicle when parking and allows you to see all of the obstacles close to the vehicle. This reconstructed view is automatically erased if the vehicle remains stationary for too long.

This system is a visual aid and cannot in any circumstances replace the need for vigilance on the part of the driver. The images provided by the cameras may appear distorted by the surroundings (exterior conditions, driving mode, ...). The presence of areas in shadow, bright sunlight, or poor lighting conditions may make the image dark and reduce contrast.

The display disappears above approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). The system is automatically deactivated about 7 seconds after coming out of reverse or on opening a door or the boot.

255

Driving
Rear views
E ngage reverse gear to activate the camera, located on the tailgate or rear door.

"180° view"

"Standard view"

"Zoom view" (reconstructed)

180° view makes it possible to reverse out of a parking space while being able to see the arrival of vehicles, pedestrians or cyclists. This view is not recommended for carrying out a complete manoeuvre. It is made up of the following:
The area to the rear of your vehicle is displayed in the screen. The blue outline represents the width of your vehicle (with mirrors): its orientation depends on the position of the steering wheel. The red line represents a distance of 30 cm from the rear bumper and the two blue lines, 1 m and 2 m respectively.

The camera records the surroundings during a manoeuvre in order to create a reconstruction of the view from above the rear of the vehicle in its close surroundings, allowing the vehicle to be manoeuvred among the obstacles nearby. This view is available with AU TO view or by selecting of the view in the change view menu.
The rear parking sensors also provide information on the vehicle's surroundings. O bstacles may appear further away than they are in reality. It is important to check the side views using the mirrors during the manoeuvre.

256

Driving

"AUTO mode"

A message is displayed advising you to check your vehicle's surroundings before starting the manoeuvre.
Activation
Activation is automatic on engaging reverse. The function is displayed in the touch screen. To close the window displayed, press on the red cross at the top left of the screen.

O n display of the sub-menu, select one of the four views:
"Standard view".
"180° view".
"Zoom view".

This mode is activated by default. U sing sensors in the rear bumper, the automatic view allows a change from the rear view to the view from above as an obstacle is approached during a manoeuvre.
Quick start mode
You can choose the display mode at any time by pressing on this area.

"AU TO mode".

Check the cleanliness of the camera lenses regularly. Periodically clean the reversing camera with a soft dry cloth.
High pressure jet wash (if muddy, for example) When washing your vehicle, do not place the tip of the lance within 30 cm of the camera lenses, as otherwise there is a risk of damaging them.

This mode displays, as quickly as possible, the contextual view (left-hand part) and the view from above the vehicle.

The system is automatically deactivated when towing a trailer or carrying a bicycle on the towbar (vehicle fitted with a towbar installed as recommended by the manufacturer).

257

Driving

Under-inflation detection
System which automatically checks the pressures of the tyres while driving.

The system monitors the pressures in the four tyres, once the vehicle is moving. It compares the information given by the four wheel speed sensors with reference values, which must be reinitialised every time the tyre pressures are adjusted or a wheel changed. The system triggers an alert as soon as it detects a drop in the inflation pressure of one or more tyres.

The under-inflation detection system does not replace the need for vigilance on the part of the driver. This system does not avoid the need to check the tyre pressures (including the spare wheel) every month as well as before a long journey. Driving with under-inflated tyres impairs road holding, extends braking distances and causes premature tyre wear, particularly under arduous conditions (high loading, high speed, long journey).

The inflation pressures defined for your vehicle can be found on the tyre pressure label. For more information on the Identification markings, refer to the corresponding section. Tyre pressures should be checked when the tyres are "cold" (vehicle stopped for 1 hour or after a journey of less than 6 miles (10 km) at moderate speeds). O therwise (when hot), add 0.3 bar to the pressures shown on the label.

Driving with under-inflated tyres increases fuel consumption.

Snow chains
The system does not have to be reinitialised after fitting or removing snow chains.
Spare wheel
The steel spare wheel does not have an under-inflation detection sensor.

258

Driving

Under-inflation alert

This is given by fixed illumination of this warning lamp, accompanied by an audible signal and, depending on equipment, the display of a message.
F Reduce speed immediately, avoid excessive steering movements and sudden braking.
F Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
The loss of pressure detected does not always cause visible bulging of the tyre. Do not satisfy yourself with just a visual check.

F In the event of a puncture, use the temporary puncture repair kit or the spare wheel (depending on equipment),
or F if you have a compressor, such as the one
in the temporary puncture repair kit, check the pressures of the four tyres when cold, or F if it is not possible to make this check immediately, drive carefully at reduced speed.
The alert is maintained until the system is reinitialised.

Reinitialisation
It is necessary to reinitialise the system every time one or more tyre pressures are adjusted, and after changing one or more wheels.
Before reinitialising the system, ensure that the pressures of the four tyres are correct for the use of the vehicle and in line with the recommendations on the tyre pressure label. The under-inflation alert can only be relied on if the reinitialisation of the system has been done with the pressures in the four tyres correctly adjusted. The under-inflation detection system does not give a warning if a pressure is incorrect at the time of reinitialisation.

Initialisation of the system is done with the ignition on and the vehicle stationary.
The new pressure settings registered are considered to be reference values by the system.
259

Driving
With the audio system

Operating fault

In the "Personalisation-configuration" menu, select "Under-inflation initialisation".
With the touch screen

The flashing and then fixed illumination of the under-inflation warning lamp accompanied by illumination of the Service warning lamp indicates a fault with the system.
In this case, under-inflation monitoring of the tyres is no longer assured. Have the system checked by a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop.

In the Driving menu, select "Under-inflation initialisation".
Press on "Yes" to Confirm the command, initialisation is confirmed by an audible signal and a message.

Before doing anything to the system, the pressures of the four tyres must be checked and the system reinitialised.

260

Fuel tank
Capacity of the tank: approximately 69 litres.
Opening
- You must switch off the engine. - If your vehicle has Keyless E ntry and
Starting, unlock the vehicle. -O pen the filler flap.

Practical information

Refuelling
Additions of fuel must be of at least 8 litres to be registered by the fuel gauge. O pening the filler cap may result in an inrush of air. This vacuum is entirely normal and results from the sealing of the fuel system.
F Take care to select the pump that delivers the correct fuel type for your vehicle's engine (reminder on a label on the inside of the filler flap).

F Remove the filler cap, then place it on the carrier located on the filler flap.
F Introduce the nozzle and push it in fully (pushing on the metal non-return valve A).
F Fill the tank. Do not continue past the third cut-off of the nozzle, as this may cause malfunctions.
F Refit the filler cap turning it to the right. F Push the filler flap to close it (your vehicle
must be unlocked).

If your vehicle is fitted with Stop & Start, never refuel with the engine in STO P mode; you must switch off the ignition using the key, or the START/STO P button if your vehicle has Keyless E ntry and Starting.

F If your vehicle has a conventional key, introduce the key into the filler cap, then turn it to the left.

261

Practical information

If your vehicle has sliding side doors, do not open the left hand sliding door as there is a risk of damaging the fuel filler flap when refuelling.

Your vehicle is fitted with a catalytic converter, a device which helps to reduce the level of harmful emissions in the exhaust gases.
If you have put in the wrong fuel for your vehicle, you must have have the tank drained and refilled with the correct fuel before you start the engine.

Diesel misfuel prevention
Mechanical device which prevents filling the tank of a Diesel vehicle with petrol. It avoids the risk of engine damage that can result from filling with the wrong fuel. Located in the filler neck, the misfuel prevention device appears when the filler cap is removed.

Low fuel level
When the low fuel level in the tank is reached, this warning lamp comes on in the instrument panel, accompanied by an audible warning and a message.
When it first comes on, less than 8 litres of fuel remain in the tank. You must refuel as soon as possible to avoid running out.
Fuel supply cut-off
Your vehicle is equipped with a safety device which cuts off the fuel supply in the event of a collision.

When a petrol filler nozzle is introduced into the fuel filler neck of your Diesel vehicle, it comes into contact with the flap. The system remains closed and prevents filling. Do not persist but introduce a Diesel filler nozzle.

262

It is still possible to use a fuel can to fill the tank but this must be done slowly. In order to ensure a good flow of fuel, do not place the nozzle of the fuel can in direct contact with the flap of the misfuel prevention device.

Fuel used for Diesel engines

Practical information

Travelling abroad
As Diesel fuel pump nozzles may be different in other countries, the presence of the misfuel prevention device may make refuelling impossible. Before travelling abroad, we recommend that you check with the PEUGEO T dealer network, whether your vehicle is suitable for the fuel pumps in the country in which you want to travel.

The Diesel engines are compatible with biofuels available at the pumps which meet current and future E uropean standards: - Diesel fuel that meets standard E N 590
mixed with a biofuel that meets standard E N 14214, - Diesel fuel that meets standard E N16734 mixed with a biofuel that meets standard E N14214 (possibly containing up to 10 % Fatty Acid Methyl E ster), - Paraffinic Diesel fuel that meets standard E N15940 mixed with a biofuel that meets standard E N14214 (possibly containing up to 7 % Fatty Acid Methyl E ster).

The use of B20 or B30 fuel meeting standard E N16709 is possible in your Diesel engines. However, this use, even occasional, requires strict application of the special servicing conditions referred to as "Arduous conditions". For more information, contact a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop. The use of any other type of (bio)fuel (vegetable or animal oils, pure or diluted, domestic fuel...) is strictly prohibited (risk of damage to the engine and fuel system). O nly the use of Diesel fuel additives that meet the standard B715000 is authorised.

263

Practical information

Snow chains
In wintry conditions, snow chains improve traction as well as the behaviour of the vehicle when braking.
The snow chains must be fitted only to the front wheels.

U se only the chains designed to be fitted to the type of wheel fitted to your vehicle:

O riginal tyre size

Type of chain.

215/65 R16 215/60 R17 225/55 R17

12 mm links -

You can also use snow socks. For more information on snow chains, contact a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop.

Take account of the legislation in force in your country on the use of snow chains and the maximum running speed authorised.

Advice on installation
F If you have to fit the chains during a journey, stop the vehicle on a flat surface on the side of the road.
F Apply the parking brake and position any wheel chocks to prevent movement of your vehicle.
F Fit the chains following the instructions provided by the manufacturer.
F Move off gently and drive for a few moments, without exceeding 30 mph (50 km/h).
F Stop your vehicle and check that the snow chains are correctly tightened.
Avoid driving with snow chains on roads that have been cleared of snow, to avoid damaging your vehicle's tyres and the road surface. If your vehicle is fitted with alloy wheels, check that no part of the chain or its fixings is in contact with the wheel rim.

It is strongly recommended that before you leave, you practise fitting the snow chains on a level and dry surface.
264

Towing a trailer
Your vehicle is primarily designed for transporting people and luggage, but it may also be used for towing a trailer.

We recommend the use of genuine PEUGEO T towbars and their harnesses that have been tested and approved from the design stage of your vehicle, and that the fitting of the towbar is entrusted to a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop. If the towbar is not fitted by a PEUGEO T dealer, it must still be fitted in accordance with the vehicle manufacturer's instructions.
Driving with a trailer places greater demands on the towing vehicle and the driver must take particular care.
For more information on Driving advice, particularly when towing, refer to the corresponding section.

Practical information
7
265

Practical information

Energy economy mode
System which manages the duration of use of certain functions to conserve a sufficient level of charge in the battery. After the engine has stopped, you can still use functions such as the audio and telematics system, windscreen wipers, dipped beam headlamps, courtesy lamps, etc. for a maximum combined duration of about forty minutes.

Switching to economy mode
A message appears in the instrument panel screen indicating that the vehicle has switched to economy mode and the active functions are put on standby. If a telephone call is being made at this time, it will be maintained for around 10 minutes with the Bluetooth hands-free system of your audio system.

Exiting economy mode
These functions are reactivated automatically next time the vehicle is driven. In order to restore the use of these functions immediately, start the engine and let it run: - for less than ten minutes, to use the
equipment for approximately five minutes, - for more than ten minutes, to use the
equipment for up to approximately thirty minutes. Let the engine run for the duration specified to ensure that the battery charge is sufficient. Do not repeatedly and continuously restart the engine in order to charge the battery. A flat battery prevents the engine from starting. For more information on the 12 V battery, refer to the corresponding section.

Load reduction mode
System which manages the use of certain functions according to the level of charge remaining in the battery. When the vehicle is being driven, the load reduction function temporarily deactivates certain functions, such as the air conditioning, the heated rear screen... The deactivated functions are reactivated automatically as soon as conditions permit.

266

Practical information

Accessories
A wide range of accessories and genuine parts is available from the PEUGEO T dealer network. These accessories and parts are all suitable for your vehicle and benefit from PEUGEO T's recommendation and warranty.

Installation of radio communication transmitters
Before installing any after-market radio communication transmitter, you can contact a PEUGEO T dealer for the specification of transmitters which can be fitted (frequency, maximum power, aerial position, specific installation requirements), in line with the Vehicle E lectromagnetic Compatibility Directive (2004/104/E C).
Depending on the legislation in force in the country, certain safety equipment may be compulsory: high visibility safety vests, warning triangles, breathalyzers, spare bulbs, spare fuses, fire extinguisher, first aid kit, mud flaps at the rear of the vehicle.

The fitting of electrical equipment or accessories which are not recommended by PEUGEO T may result in a failure of your vehicle's electronic system and excessive electrical consumption. Contact a PEUGEO T dealer for information on the range of recommended equipment and accessories.
"Comfort"
Door deflectors, cigarette lighter, boot dividers, coat hanger fixed to head restraint, front and rear parking sensors, styling mudflaps, boot management system, ...
"Transport solutions"
Boot liners, roof bars, bicycle carrier on roof bars, ski carrier, roof box, towbar harness, .... Tow bar, which must be fitted by PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop.

"Styling"
Wheel trims, wheel caps, door sills, gear lever knobs, ...

"Security and safety"
Anti-theft alarm, window engraving, wheel security bolts, child seats, breathalyzer, first aid kit, warning triangle, high visibility jacket, stolen vehicle tracking system, fleet management unit, snow chains, tyre snow socks, front foglamps kit, ...

"Protection"
Mats*, seat covers compatible with lateral airbags, mud flaps, side protection rubbing strips, bumper protectors, loading area protection (on wood or plastic), rear sill finishers, rear mat, ....

* To avoid any risk of jamming of the pedals: - ensure that the mat is positioned and secured correctly, - never fit one mat on top of another.
267

Practical information

"Multimedia"
Smartphone support, table support or semiintegral navigation support, range of audio systems and portable navigation systems, driving recorder, Bluetooth hands-free kit, DVD player, multimedia support, driving aids, vehicle tracking system, ...

Roof bars / Roof rack

By visiting a PEUGEO T dealer, you can also obtain products for cleaning and maintenance (exterior and interior) including ecological products in the "TE CHNATU RE " range, topping-up products (screenwash...), touch-up pens and paint aerosols for the exact colour of your vehicle, refills (cartridge for the temporary puncture repair kit...), ...
For any work on your vehicle, use a qualified workshop that has the technical information, skills and equipment required, all of which a PEUGEO T dealer is able to provide.

To fit the transverse roof bars, use the fixing points provided for this purpose: F open the fixing covers on each bar, F put each fixing in place and lock them on
the roof one by one, F ensure that roof bars are correctly fitted (by
shaking them), F close the fixing covers on each bar. The bars can be interchanged and are adaptable to each pair of fixing points.
Be sure to refer to national legislation in order to comply with the regulations for transporting objects that are longer than the vehicle.

To fit a roof rack, use the fixing points provided for this purpose: F place the roof rack on the roof aligned with
the fixing points and secure each one in turn, F ensure that roof rack is correctly fitted (by shaking it).
Maximum authorised weight on each fixing point, for a loading height not exceeding 40 cm: 25 kg. Maximum weight by vehicle size: - compact (L1) with 8 fixing points:
200 kg - standard (L2) and long (L3) with
10 fixing points: 250 kg If the height exceeds 40 cm, adapt the speed of the vehicle to the profile of the road to avoid damaging the roof rack or roof bars and the fixing points on the roof.

268

Changing a wiper blade

Before removing a front wiper blade

Fitting
F Put the corresponding new wiper blade in place and clip it.
F Fold down the wiper arm carefully.

After fitting a front wiper blade
F Switch on the ignition. FO perate the wiper stalk again to park the
wiper blades.

F Within one minute after switching off the ignition, operate the wiper stalk to position the wiper blades vertically on the windscreen.
Removing
F Raise the corresponding wiper arm. FU nclip the wiper blade and remove it.

Practical information
7
269

RECOMMENDS

PEUGEOT & TOTAL,
A PARTNERSHIP TO DELIVER BETTER PERFORMANCE!
2015 was marked by PEUGEOT's return to Rally-Raid, one of the most difficult motorsport disciplines in the world. To obtain the best performance in these trials, PEUGEOT Sport chose TOTAL QUARTZ for the PEUGEOT 2008 DKR, a lubricant of high technology which protects the engine in the most severe conditions.
TOTAL QUARTZ protects your engine against the effects of time.
TOTAL QUARTZ Ineo First is a high performance lubricant, the result of work done together by PEUGEOT and TOTAL R&D. Specially formulated for the engines in PEUGEOT vehicles, its innovative technology significantly reduces CO2 emissions and keeps your engine clean.

Bonnet

Opening
FO pen the door.

Practical information

Before doing anything under the bonnet, deactivate the Stop & Start system to avoid any risk of injury resulting from an automatic change to START mode.
Do not open the bonnet under very windy conditions. When the engine is hot, handle the exterior safety catch and the stay with care (risk of burns). To avoid damaging electrical units, it is strictly forbidden to use a high pressure jet wash under the bonnet.

F Pull the release lever, located at the bottom of the door aperture, towards you.
F Lift the safety catch, then raise the bonnet.

The cooling fan may start after switching off the engine: take care with articles and clothing that might be caught by the fan blades.

FU nclip the stay from its housing and place it in the support slot to hold the bonnet open.
Closing
F Take the stay out of its support slot. F Clip the stay back into its housing. F Lower the bonnet and release it at the end
of its travel. F Pull on the bonnet to check that it has
latched correctly.

271

Practical information
Diesel engine
1. Screenwash and headlamp wash reservoir. 2. Coolant header tank. 3.E ngine oil filler cap. 4.E ngine oil dipstick. 5. Priming pump*. 6. Brake fluid filler cap. 7. Battery. 8. Remote earth point ("-" terminal). 9. Fusebox. 10. Power steering fluid reservoir. 11. Air filter.
This engine is shown as an example. The locations of the engine oil dipstick and filler cap may vary.
The Diesel fuel system operates under high pressure: - Never carry out any work on this
system yourself. - HDi engines make use of advanced
technology. All maintenance and repairs require specially trained staff, which only a PEUGEO T dealer can provide.
* According to engine. 272

Practical information
Checking levels
Check all of these levels regularly, in line with the manufacturer's service schedule. Top them up if necessary, unless otherwise indicated. If a level drops significantly, have the corresponding system checked by a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop.
Take care when working under the bonnet, as certain areas of the engine may be extremely hot (risk of burns) and the cooling fan could start at any time (even with the ignition off).

Engine oil level
The check is carried out either when the ignition is switched on using the oil level indicator in the instrument panel for vehicles so equipped, or using the dipstick.
To ensure that the reading is correct, your vehicle must be parked on a level surface with the engine having been off for more than 30 minutes.
It is normal to top-up the oil level between two services (or oil changes). PEUGEO T recommends that you check the level, and topup if necessary, every 3 000 miles (5 000 kms).

Checking using the dipstick
The location of the dipstick is shown in the corresponding underbonnet layout view. F Take the dipstick by its coloured grip and
remove it completely. F Wipe the end of the dipstick using a clean
non-fluffy cloth. F Refit the dipstick and push fully down, then
pull it out again to make the visual check: the correct level is between the marks A and B.

A = MAX
B = MIN
If you find that the level is above the A mark or below the B mark, do not start the engine. - If the level is above the MAX mark (risk
of damage to the engine), contact a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop. - If the level is below the MIN mark, you must top-up the engine oil.

273

Practical information

Oil grade
Before topping-up the oil or changing the oil, check that the oil is the correct grade for your engine and conforms to the manufacturer's recommendations.
Topping-up the engine oil level
The location of the oil filler cap is shown in the corresponding underbonnet layout view. FU nscrew the oil filler cap to reveal the filler
aperture. F Add oil in small quantities, avoiding any
spills on engine components (risk of fire). F Wait a few minutes before checking the
level again using the dipstick. F Add more oil if necessary. F After checking the level, carefully refit the
oil filler cap and the dipstick in its tube.
After topping-up the oil, the check when switching on the ignition with the oil level indicator in the instrument panel is not valid during the 30 minutes after topping up.

Engine oil change
Refer to the manufacturer's service schedule for details of the interval for this operation. In order to maintain the reliability of the engine and emission control system, never use additives in the engine oil.
Brake fluid level
The brake fluid level should be close to the "MAX" mark. If it is not, check the brake pad wear.
Changing the fluid
Refer to the manufacturer's service schedule for details of the interval for this operation.
Fluid specification
The brake fluid must conform to the manufacturer's recommendations.
Power steering fluid level
The power steering fluid level should be close to the "MAX" mark. With the engine cold, unscrew the cap to check the level.

Coolant level
The coolant level should be close to the "MAX" mark but should never exceed it. When the engine is warm, the temperature of the coolant is regulated by the fan.
The cooling fan may start after switching off the engine: take care with articles and clothing that might be caught by the fan blades.
In addition, as the cooling system is pressurised, wait at least one hour after switching off the engine before carrying out any work. To avoid any risk of scalding, unscrew the cap by two turns to allow the pressure to drop. When the pressure has dropped, remove the cap and top up the level.
Check the coolant level regularly, according to the use made of your vehicle (every 3 000 miles or 5 000 kms / 3 months); if necessary, top-up using coolant recommended by the manufacturer. Topping-up the coolant between services is normal.

274

The check and top-up must be done with the engine cold. A low coolant level presents the risk of serious damage to your engine.
If the ambient temperature is high, it is recommended that the engine be allowed to idle for 1 to 2 minutes after the vehicle comes to a stop, to facilitate its cooling.
Changing the coolant
The coolant does not have to be replaced at routine services.
Fluid specification
The coolant must conform to the manufacturer's recommendations.

Practical information

Screenwash and headlamp wash fluid
In the case of vehicles fitted with headlamp washers, the low fluid level is indicated by an audible signal and a message in the instrument panel screen. Top up the reservoir when you next stop the vehicle.

Diesel additive level (Diesel engine with particle filter)
A low additive level is indicated by illumination of this warning lamp, accompanied by an audible warning and a message in the instrument panel screen.

Fluid specification
For optimum cleaning and to avoid freezing, this fluid must not be topped up with or replaced with plain water.

Topping-up
This additive must be topped-up by a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop without delay.

In wintry conditions, the use of an ethyl alcohol or methanol base fluid is recommended.

Used products
Avoid prolonged contact of used oil or fluids with the skin. Most of these fluids are harmful to health or indeed very corrosive.

Do not discard used oil or fluids into sewers or onto the ground. Take used oil to a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop (France) or to an authorised waste disposal site.

275

Practical information

Checks
U nless otherwise indicated, check these components in accordance with the manufacturer's service schedule and according to your engine. O therwise, have them checked by a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop.

12 V battery
The battery does not require any maintenance. However, check regularly that the terminals are correctly tightened (versions without quick release terminals) and that the connections are clean. For more information and the precautions to take before starting work on the 12 V battery, refer to the corresponding section.
Versions equipped with Stop & Start are fitted with a 12 V lead-acid battery of specific technology and specification. Its replacement should be carried out only by a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop.

Air filter and passenger compartment filter
Refer to the manufacturer's service schedule for details of the replacement intervals for these components. Depending on the environment (e.g. dusty atmosphere) and the use of the vehicle (e.g. city driving), replace them twice as often if necessary. A clogged passenger compartment filter may have an adverse effect on the performance of the air conditioning system and generate undesirable odours.
Oil filter
Replace the oil filter each time the engine oil is changed. Refer to the manufacturer's service schedule for details of the replacement interval for this component.

Particle filter (Diesel)
The start of saturation of the particle filter is indicated by the temporary illumination of this warning lamp accompanied by a message in the multifunction screen.
As soon as the traffic conditions permit, regenerate the filter by driving at a speed of at least 40 mph (60 km/h) until the warning lamp goes off. If the warning lamp stays on, this indicates a low additive level. For more information on Checking levels, refer to the corresponding section.
O n a new vehicle, the first particle filter regeneration operations may be accompanied by a "burning" smell, which is perfectly normal. Following prolonged operation of the vehicle at very low speed or at idle, you may, in exceptional circumstances, notice the emission of water vapour at the exhaust on acceleration. This does not affect the behaviour of the vehicle or the environment.

276

Practical information

Manual gearbox
The gearbox does not require any maintenance (no oil change). Refer to the manufacturer's service schedule for the checking interval for this component.
Automatic gearbox

Parking brake
If excessive travel or a loss of effectiveness of this system is noticed, the parking brake must be checked, even between two services.

Brake disc wear
For information on checking brake disc wear, contact a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop.

Checking this system must be done by a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop.

The gearbox does not require any maintenance (no oil change). Refer to the manufacturer's service schedule for the checking interval for this component.
Electronic gearbox
The gearbox does not require any maintenance (no oil change). Refer to the manufacturer's service schedule for the checking interval for this component.

Brake pads
Brake wear depends on the style of driving, particularly in the case of vehicles used in town, over short distances. It may be necessary to have the condition of the brakes checked, even between vehicle services. U nless there is a leak in the circuit, a drop in the brake fluid level indicates that the brake pads are worn.

O nly use products recommended by PEUGEO T or products of equivalent quality and specification. In order to optimise the operation of units as important as those in the braking system, PEUGEO T selects and offers very specific products. After washing the vehicle, dampness, or in wintry conditions, ice can form on the brake discs and pads: braking efficiency may be reduced. Make light brake applications to dry and defrost the brakes.

277

Practical information
AdBlue® and SCR system for BlueHDi Diesel engines
The AdBlue® is held in a special tank with a capacity of about 22 litres: this provides a driving range of about 12 500 miles (20 000 km), after which an alert is triggered warning you when the reserve remaining is enough for just 1 500 miles (2 400 km).

To assure respect for the environment and conformity with the new E uro 6 emissions standard, without adversely affecting the performance or fuel consumption of Diesel engines, PEUGEO T has taken the decision to equip its vehicles with an effective system that associates SCR (Selective Catalytic Reduction) with a particle filter (FAP) for the treatment of exhaust gases.

When filling the tank, the filling rate must not exceed 40 litres per minute.
During each scheduled service of your vehicle by a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop, the AdBlue® tank is refilled in order to allow normal operation of the SCR system.

Presentation of the SCR system
U sing a fluid called AdBlue® containing urea, a catalytic converter turns up to 85% of nitrogen oxides (NO x) into nitrogen and water, which are harmless to health and the environment.

If the estimated mileage between two services is greater than 12 500 miles (20 000 km), we recommend that you go to a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop to have the necessary top-up carried out.

278

O nce the AdBlue® tank is empty, a system required by regulations prevents starting of the engine. If the SCR is faulty, the level of emissions from your vehicle will no longer meet the E uro 6 standard: your vehicle becomes polluting. In the event of a confirmed fault with the SCR system, you must go to a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop as soon as possible: after a running distance of 650 miles (1 100 km), a system will be triggered automatically to prevent engine starting.

Practical information

Topping-up the AdBlue®
Filling the AdBlue® tank is an operation included in every routine service on your vehicle by a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop. Nevertheless, given the capacity of the tank, it may be necessary to top-up the fluid between services, more particularly if an alert (warning lamps and a message) signals the requirement. You can go to a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop. If you envisage topping-up yourself, please read the following warnings carefully.
Important If your vehicle's AdBlue® tank is completely empty (which is confirmed by the alert messages and the impossibility of starting the engine) you must add at least 3.8 litres (so two 1.89 litre bottles).

Precautions in use
AdBlue® is a urea-based solution. This liquid is non-flammable, colourless and odourless (kept in a cool area). In the event of contact with the skin, wash the affected area with soap and water. In the event of contact with the eyes, wash (irrigate) the eyes with large amounts of water or with an eye wash solution for at least 15 minutes. If a burning sensation or irritation persists, get medical attention. If swallowed, immediately wash out the mouth with clean water and then drink plenty of water. In certain conditions (high ambient temperature, for example), the risk of release of ammonia cannot be excluded: do not inhale the fluid. Ammonia vapour has an irritant effect on mucous membranes (eyes, nose and throat).
Keep AdBlue® out of the reach of children, in its original bottle. Never transfer AdBlue® to another container: it would lose its purity.

U se only AdBlue® fluid that meets the ISO 22241 standard.
Never dilute AdBlue® with water. Never pour AdBlue® into the Diesel fuel tank.

The supply in a non-drip bottle simplifies topping-up. You can obtain 1.89 litre (half a U S gallon) bottles from a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop.

Never top-up from an AdBlue® dispenser reserved for heavy goods vehicles.

279

Practical information

Recommendations on storage
AdBlue® freezes at about -11°C and deteriorates above 25°C. It is recommended that bottles be stored in a cool area and protected from direct sunlight. U nder these conditions, the fluid can be kept for at least a year. If the additive has frozen, it can be used once it has completely thawed out.

Procedure
Before starting the top-up procedure, ensure that the vehicle is parked on a flat and level surface.
F Switch off the ignition and remove the key, or if your vehicle has one, press the START/STO P button to switch off the engine.

Never store bottles of AdBlue® in your vehicle.

F Turn the blue cap a 6th of a turn anticlockwise.
F Lift off the cap.

Do not dispose of AdBlue® bottles in the household waste. Place them in a container provided for this purpose or take them to your dealer.
In wintry conditions, ensure that the temperature of the vehicle is above -11°C. O therwise the AdBlue® may be frozen and so cannot be poured into its tank. Park your vehicle in a warmer area for a few hours to allow the top-up to be carried out.

F For access to the AdBlue® tank, open the left-hand front door.
F From below, pull the black cover.

280

FO btain a bottle of AdBlue®. After first checking the use-by date, read carefully the instructions on use on the label before pouring the contents of the bottle into your vehicle's AdBlue® tank.

If any additive is split or splashed, wash immediately with cold water or wipe with a damp cloth. If the additive has crystallised, clean it off using a sponge and hot water.
F Refit the blue cap to the tank and turn it a 6th of a turn clockwise, to its stop.

F After emptying the bottle, wipe away any spillage around the tank filler using a damp cloth.

Freezing of the AdBlue®
AdBlue® freezes at temperatures below around -11°C. The SCR system includes a heater for the AdBlue® tank, allowing you to continue driving in very cold conditions.

F Refit the black cover, starting at the top. F Close the door.

Practical information
Important: when topping-up after running out of additive, signalled by the message "Top up emissions additive: Starting prevented", you must wait for about 5 minutes before switching on the ignition, without opening the driver's door, unlocking the vehicle, introducing the key into the ignition switch, or placing the key of the "Keyless Entry and Starting" system inside the vehicle. Switch on the ignition, then wait for 10 seconds before starting the engine.
7

281

In the event of a breakdown

Warning triangle (stowing)

This safety equipment should be used in addition to the hazard warning lamps. Its presence in the vehicle is mandatory.

Placing the triangle in the road

Before leaving your vehicle to set up and install the triangle, switch on the hazard warning lamps and put on your high visibility vest.

Tool box
Access
The tool box is located under the left-hand front seat.

F Place the triangle behind the vehicle, as required by the legislation in force in your country.
Refer to the manufacturer's instructions on unfolding and assembly supplied with the triangle.
The triangle is available as an accessory; contact a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop.

As a safety measure, the bars 1 and 2 prevent the box escaping from its housing, if it is not correctly secured.

282

Removing

Opening

In the event of a breakdown
F To take it past bar 1, raise the box slightly then push it fully in.

F Press the latches A and slide them inwards to release the box.
F Lift the box slightly then pull it as far as it will go to take it past bar 1.

FU nclip the fixings B on the cover, then open it for access to the tools.
Stowing
F Refit the cover on the box and clip the fixings B.

FO nce the box is fully home in its housing, push it against the floor carpet then slide the latches A outwards to secure it.
Pull on the box to check that it is secure in its housing.

F Then, lift the box upwards to take it past bar 2.

FO ffer up the box with the front inclined upwards.
F To take it past bar 2, push the box in and down.

8
283

In the event of a breakdown
If your vehicle is equipped with a temporary puncture repair kit

If your vehicle is equipped with a spare wheel

These tools are specific to your vehicle and can vary according to equipment. Do not use them for other purposes.

1. 12 V compressor. To temporarily repair a tyre using an integral sealant cartridge and adjust the tyre pressure.
2. Towing eye.

1. Wheelbrace. For removing the wheel bolts and raising/ lowering the jack.
2. Jack. For raising the vehicle.
3. Wheel bolt cap/wheel trim removal tools. If your vehicle is so equipped, for removing the wheel bolt head covers on alloy wheels or the wheel trim on steel wheels.
4. Security bolt socket For adapting the wheelbrace to the special "security" bolts.
5. Towing eye.

284

Temporary puncture repair kit

This kit consists of a compressor and a sealant cartridge. It allows the temporary repair of a tyre. You are then able to go to the nearest garage. It is designed to repair most punctures which could affect the tyre, located on the tyre tread or shoulder. Its compressor can be used to check and adjust the pressure of the tyre.

List of tools
These tools are specific to your vehicle and can vary according to equipment. Do not use them for other purposes.

In the event of a breakdown

Access to the kit
This kit is stowed in the tool box. For more information on the Tool box, refer to the corresponding section.

1. 12 V compressor. To temporarily repair a tyre using an integral sealant cartridge and adjust the tyre pressure.
2. Towing eye.
For more information on Towing, refer to the corresponding section.

The tyre inflation pressures are given on this label.

The vehicle's electric system allows the connection of a compressor for long enough to inflate a tyre after a puncture repair or for inflating a small inflatable accessory.

285

In the event of a breakdown
Description of the kit

A. "Sealant" or "Air" position selector. B.O n "I" / off "O" switch. C. Deflation button. D. Pressure gauge (in bars and psi). E. Compartment housing a cable with an
adaptor for a 12 V socket.

F. Sealant cartridge. G. White pipe with cap for repair. H. Black pipe for inflation. I. Speed limit sticker.
The speed limit sticker I must be affixed to the vehicle's steering wheel to remind you that a wheel is in temporary use. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph (80 km/h) when driving with a tyre repaired using this type of kit.

286

Repair procedure
1. Sealing
F Switch off the ignition.

In the event of a breakdown

F Turn the selector A to the "sealant" position.
F Check that the switch B is in position "O".

FU ncoil the white pipe G fully. FU nscrew the cap from the white pipe. F Connect the white pipe to the valve of the
tyre to be repaired.

F Connect the compressor's electric plug to the vehicle's 12 V socket.
F Start the vehicle and leave the engine running.

Avoid removing any foreign bodies which have penetrated into the tyre.

Take care, this product is harmful if swallowed and causes irritation to the eyes. Keep this product out of the reach of children.

Do not start the compressor before connecting the white pipe to the tyre valve: the sealant product would be expelled through the pipe.

287

In the event of a breakdown

F Remove the kit and screw the cap back on the white pipe. Take care to avoid staining your vehicle with traces of fluid. Keep the kit to hand.

2. Inflation

F Switch on the compressor by moving the switch B to position "I" until the tyre pressure reaches 2.0 bars. The sealant is injected into the tyre under pressure; do not disconnect the pipe from the valve during this operation (risk of splashing).
If after around 5 to 7 minutes the pressure is not attained, this indicates that the tyre is not repairable; contact a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop for assistance.

F Drive immediately for approximately three miles (five kilometres), at reduced speed (between 15 and 35 mph (20 and 60 km/h)), to plug the puncture.
F Stop to check the repair and the tyre pressure using the kit.

F Turn the selector A to the "Air" position.
FU ncoil the black pipe H fully. F Connect the black pipe to the valve of the
wheel.

288

In the event of a breakdown
Removing the cartridge
F Stow the black pipe. F Detach the angled base from the white pipe. F Support the compressor vertically.

F Connect the compressor's electric plug to the vehicle's 12 V socket.
F Start the vehicle again and leave the engine running.
As soon as possible, go to a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop. You must inform the technician that you have used this kit. After inspection, the technician will advise you on whether the tyre can be repaired or if it must be replaced.

F Adjust the pressure using the compressor (to inflate: switch B in position "I"; to deflate: switch B in position "O" and press button C), in accordance with the vehicle's tyre pressure label (located on the left hand door aperture). A loss of pressure indicates that the puncture has not been fully plugged; contact a PEUGEO T dealer or qualified workshop for assistance.
F Remove and stow the kit. F Drive at reduced speed (50 mph [80 km/h]
max) limiting the distance travelled to approximately 120 miles (200 km).

FU nscrew the cartridge from the bottom.
Beware of discharges of fluid. The expiry date of the fluid is indicated on the cartridge. The sealant cartridge is designed for single use; even if only partly used, it must be replaced. After use, do not discard the cartridge into the environment, take it to an authorised waste disposal site or a PEUGEO T dealer. Do not forget to obtain a new sealant cartridge, available from PEUGEO T dealers or from a qualified workshop.

289

In the event of a breakdown
Checking /adjusting tyre pressures
You can also use the compressor without injecting any product, to check and if necessary adjust your tyre pressures.

F Turn the selector A to the "Air" position.
FU ncoil the black pipe H fully. F Connect the black pipe to the tyre valve.

F Connect the compressor's electrical connector to the vehicle's 12 V socket.
F Start the vehicle and let the engine run. F Adjust the pressure using the compressor
(to inflate: switch B in position "I"; to deflate: switch B in position "O" and press button C), according to the vehicle's tyre pressure label. F Remove the kit then stow it.

Should the pressure of one or more tyres be adjusted, it is necessary to reinitialise the under-inflation detection system. For more information on Underinflation detection, refer to the corresponding section.

290

Changing a wheel
Access to the tooling

List of tools
These tools are specific to your vehicle and can vary according to the level of equipment. Do not use them for other purposes.

In the event of a breakdown
For more information on Towing, refer to the corresponding section.

The tools are stowed in the tool box.

For more information on the Tool box, refer to the corresponding section.

1. Wheelbrace. For removing the wheel bolts and raising/ lowering the jack.
2. Jack. For raising the vehicle.
3. Wheel bolt cap/wheel trim removal tool. If your vehicle is so equipped, for removing the wheel bolt head covers on alloy wheels or the central wheel trim on steel wheels.
4. Socket for the security bolts. For adapting the wheelbrace to the special "security" bolts.
5. Towing eye.

The jack must only be used to change a wheel with a damaged tyre. The jack does not require any maintenance. The jack conforms to E uropean legislation, such as defined in the Machinery Directive 2006/42/CE .
8
291

In the event of a breakdown
Access to the spare wheel

Removing

F Access to the spare wheel is from the rear. FO pen the side-hinged rear doors or the
tailgate, according to the configuration of your vehicle.

F If your vehicle is fitted with a towbar, raise the rear of the vehicle using the jack (must be at jacking point B) to allow sufficient space to remove the spare wheel.

F Access the carrier bolt, located on the rear door sill.

To avoid any unwanted opening of the electric side door(s), deactivate the "Hands-Free Access" function in the vehicle configuration menu. For more information on the Handsfree sliding side door, refer to the corresponding section.
292

F Turn the bolt anti-clockwise using the wheelbrace (about 14 turns) until the carrier is low enough to allow the carrier hook to be disengaged.

Refitting

In the event of a breakdown

F Release the carrier from the hook, take the spare wheel and place it next to the wheel to be changed.

F Position the wheel facing the carrier. F Progressively return the wheel to the
basket by pushing alternately at left and right until it is clear of the hook fixing area. FE ngage the carrier on the hook, then tighten the bolt using the wheelbrace until the basket is fully home.

8
293

In the event of a breakdown

Removing a wheel
Parking the vehicle
Immobilise the vehicle where it does not block traffic: the ground must be level, stable and not slippery. If your vehicle has a manual gearbox, engage first gear then switch off the ignition to block the wheels.

If your vehicle has an automatic gearbox, place the gear selector at position P then switch off the ignition to block the wheels.
If your vehicle has an electronic gearbox, place the gear selector at position A then switch off the ignition to block the wheels.
Apply the parking brake and check that the warning lamp is on in the instrument panel. The occupants must get out of the vehicle and wait where they are safe. Never go underneath a vehicle raised using a jack; use an axle stand.

F If your vehicle has steel wheels, remove the wheel trim using tool 3.
F If your vehicle has alloy wheels, remove the cap from each wheel bolt using tool 3.
F If your vehicle has security wheel bolts, fit the security bolt socket 4 to the wheelbrace 1 to slacken the security bolt.
F Slacken (without removing) the other wheel bolts using just the wheelbrace 1.

F Position the foot of the jack on the ground, ensuring that it is directly below the vehicle's jacking point A or B, the one closest to the wheel to be changed.
Do not use: - the jack for any other purpose than
lifting the vehicle, - a jack other than the one supplied
by the manufacturer.

294

In the event of a breakdown

FE xtend the jack 2, using the hand wheel, until its head comes into contact with the jacking point A or B used, with the contact surface A or B on the vehicle correctly engaged with the central part of the head of the jack.
F Raise the vehicle using the wheelbrace 1, until there is sufficient space between the wheel and the ground to admit the spare (not punctured) wheel easily.

F Remove the bolts and store them in a clean place.
F Remove the wheel.

E nsure that the jack is stable. If the ground is slippery or loose, the jack may slip or drop Risk of injury! E nsure that the jack is positioned only at one of the jacking points A or B under the vehicle, making sure that the vehicle's contact surface is centred on the head of the jack. O therwise there is a risk of damage to the vehicle and/or of the jack dropping - Risk of injury!

295

In the event of a breakdown
Fitting a wheel

F Put the wheel in place on the hub. F Screw in the bolts fully by hand. F If your vehicle is so equipped, tighten the
security bolt using the wheelbrace 1 fitted with the security socket 4. F Pre-tighten the other bolts using the wheelbrace 1 only.

F Lower the vehicle fully. F Fold the jack 2 and detach it.

296

F If your vehicle is so equipped, tighten the security bolt using the wheelbrace 1 fitted with the security socket 4.
F Tighten the other bolts using the wheelbrace 1 only.
F Stow the tools in the tool box.
Tyre under-inflation detection
The steel spare wheel does not have a sensor.

In the event of a breakdown

After changing a wheel
Stow the punctured wheel in the carrier. Have the tightening of the bolts and the pressure of the spare wheel checked by a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop without delay. Have the punctured wheel repaired and refitted to the vehicle as soon as possible.

If your vehicle has tyre under-inflation detection, check the tyre pressures and reinitialise the system.

The tyre inflation pressures are given on this label.

For more information on Underinflation detection, refer to the corresponding section.

Wheel with large wheel trim
When refitting the wheel, refit the wheel trim by placing its cut-out at the valve, and press round its edge with the palm of your hand.

297

In the event of a breakdown

Changing a bulb
Types of bulb
Various types of bulb are fitted to your vehicle. To remove them:
Type A

Type C

Type E

All glass bulb: pull gently as it is fitted by pressure.
Type B
Bayonet bulb: press on the bulb then turn it anticlockwise.
298

Halogen bulb: release the retaining spring from its housing.
Type D

Xenon bulb: xenon bulbs must be changed by a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop as there is a risk of electrocution.

Halogen bulb: turn the bulb anti-clockwise.
Halogen bulbs must be changed after the headlamp has been off for several minutes (risk of serious burns). Do not touch the bulb directly with your fingers, use lint-free cloths.

When each operation has been completed, check the operation of the lighting.

Front lamps
Halogen headlamps
For more information on Changing a bulb and in particular the types of bulb, refer to the corresponding section.

Xenon headlamps
For more information on Changing a bulb and in particular the types of bulb, refer to the corresponding section.

In the event of a breakdown
Front fog lamps
Type D, H11-55W

1. Sidelamps. Type A, W5W-5W
2. Main beam headlamps. Type C, H1-55W
3. Dipped beam headlamps. Type C, H7-55W
4. Daytime running lamps. Type A, W21W LL-21W
5. Direction indicators. Type B, PY21W-21W (amber)
For H7 type bulbs with lugs... take care to observe their correct installation so as to ensure the best lighting performance.

1. Main beam headlamps. Type C, H1-55W
2. Dipped beam headlamps. Type E, D8S 25W
3. Direction indicators. Type B, PY21W-21W (amber)

In some weather conditions (e.g. low temperature or humidity), the presence of misting on the internal surface of the glass of the headlamps and rear lamps is normal; it disappears after the lamps have been on for a few minutes.

299

In the event of a breakdown
Daytime running lamps / sidelamps

Direction indicator side repeater
Type A, WY5W-5W (amber)

If fitted to your vehicle, contact a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop for the replacement of this type of LE D lamp and light guide. A replacement kit for the LE Ds is available from PEUGEO T dealers.

- Push the repeater towards the rear and disengage it.
- When refitting, engage the repeater towards the front and then bring it towards the rear.
Amber coloured bulbs (direction indicators and side repeaters) must be replaced with bulbs of identical specification and colour.

The headlamps have polycarbonate lenses with a protective coating: F do not clean them using a dry
or abrasive cloth, nor with a detergent or solvent product, F use a sponge and soapy water or a pH neutral product, F when using a high pressure washer on persistent marks, do not keep the lance directed towards the lamps or their edges for too long, so as not to damage their protective coating and seals.
Changing a bulb should only be done after the headlamp has been switched off for several minutes (risk of serious burns). F Do not touch the bulb directly with
your fingers, use a lint-free cloth. It is imperative to use only antiultraviolet (U V) type bulbs to avoid damaging the headlamp. Always replace a failed bulb with a new bulb with the same type and specification.

300

Dipped beam headlamps (halogen headamps)
Type C, H7-55W

Daytime running lamps (halogen headlamps)
Type A, W21W LL-21W

In the event of a breakdown
Sidelamps (halogen headlamps)
Type A, W5W

F Press the upper clip on the cover then tip it rearwards to remove it.
F Press the lower clip on the electrical connector and remove the assembly of connector and bulb.
F Pull the bulb out and change it. To refit, carry out these operations in reverse order.

F Press the upper clip on the cover then tip it rearwards to remove it.
F Press the two side clips on the electrical connector and remove the assembly of connector and bulb.
F Pull out the bulb and change it. To refit, carry out these operations in reverse order.

F Press the upper clip on the cover then tip it rearwards to remove it.
F Press the two side clips on the electrical connector and remove the assembly of connector and bulb.
F Pull the bulb out and change it. To refit, carry out these operations in reverse order.

When refitting the connector and bulb in the lamp, push the assembly into its housing until it clicks into place.

301

In the event of a breakdown
Main beam headlamps (halogen headlamps)
Type C, H1-55W

Direction indicators (halogen headlamps)
Type B, PY21W-21W (amber)

F Press the upper clip on the cover then tip it rearwards to remove it.
F Turn the bulb holder a quarter turn anticlockwise.
F Remove the bulb holder. F Change the failed bulb. To refit, carry out these operations in reverse order.

Be aware that the area behind the righthand headlamp (facing forwards) may be hot, with the risk of burns (overflow pipe).

Faster flashing of a direction indicator warning lamp (left or right) indicates a failed bulb on that side.

302

Dipped beam headlamps (xenon headlamps)
Type E, D8S 25W

Main beam headlamps (xenon headlamps)
Type C, H1-55W

In the event of a breakdown
Direction indicators (xenon headlamps)
Type B, PY21W-21W (amber)

Replacement of D8S xenon bulbs must be done by a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop as there is a risk of electrocution. It is recommended that both D8S bulbs be replaced at the same time, in the event of the failure of one of them.

F Press the upper clip on the cover then tip it rearwards to remove it..
F Press the lower clip on the electrical connector and remove the assembly of connector and bulb.
F Pull the bulb out and change it. To refit, carry out these operations in reverse order.

F Press the upper clip on the cover then tip it rearwards to remove it.
F Turn the bulb holder a quarter turn anticlockwise.
F Change the failed bulb. To refit, carry out these operations in reverse order.

When refitting the connector and bulb in the lamp, push the assembly into its housing until it clicks into place.

Faster flashing of a direction indicator warning lamp (left or right) indicates a failed bulb on that side.

303

In the event of a breakdown
Front foglamps
Type C, H11-55W

F Below the front bumper, unscrew the fixing screws for the deflector A.
F Remove the deflector A.

F Press the locking clip and disconnect the connector.
F Turn the bulb holder a quarter turn anticlockwise.
F Remove the bulb holder. F Change the failed bulb. To refit, carry out these operations in reverse order.

You can also go to a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop for the replacement of these bulbs.
304

Rear lamps (side-hinged rear doors)
For more information on Changing a bulb and in particular, the types of bulbs, refer to the corresponding section.

F Identify the failed bulb then open the rear doors.

In the event of a breakdown

1. Brake lamps / sidelamps. Type B, P21/5W-21/5W
2. Direction indicators. Type B, PY21W-21W (amber)
3. Reversing lamps. Type B, P21W-21W
4. Foglamps / sidelamps. Type B, P21/4W-21/4W.
For vehicles with interior trim, contact a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop to have the work done.

F From inside, remove the ventilation grille, if your vehicle has one.
F From outside, unscrew the two lamp fixing screws.

F Spread the three lugs slightly, then extract the bulb holder.
F Remove the failed bulb by pressing lightly on it, then turning it a quarter turn clockwise.
F Change the bulb. To reassemble, carry out these operations in reverse order.

F While holding the lamp in place, press the clip on the inside then carefully remove the lamp.
F Disconnect the electrical connector.

8
305

In the event of a breakdown
Third brake lamp (side-hinged doors)
Type A, W5W-5W

Number plate lamps (side-hinged doors)
Type A, W5W-5W

FO pen the left hand rear door.

F Remove the plastic cover using a small screwdriver.
FU sing a screwdriver through the aperture, push the lamp towards the outside.
F Disconnect the electrical connector. F Remove the lamp. F Turn the bulb holder a quarter turn anti-
clockwise. F Change the failed bulb. To refit, press on the lamp to clip it in place.

F Insert a thin screwdriver into one of the cutouts in the lens.
F Push it outwards to unclip it. F Remove the lens. F Change the failed bulb.
To refit, press on the lens to clip it in place.

306

Courtesy lamps (front and rear)
Type A, W5W-5W
FU nclip the lens by inserting a thin screwdriver into the cut-outs at each side of the lamp.
F Pull the bulb out and change it. F Clip the lens in place and ensure that it is
secure.

In the event of a breakdown
8
307

In the event of a breakdown

Rear lamps (tailgate)
For more information on Changing a bulb and in particular, the types of bulbs, refer to the corresponding section.

F Identify the failed bulb then open the boot.

F From inside, remove the cover, if your vehicle has one.

F While holding the lamp in place, press the clip on the inside then carefully remove the lamp.
F Disconnect the electrical connector.

1. Brake lamps / sidelamps. Type B, P21/5W-21/5W
2. Direction indicators. Type B, PY21W-21W (amber)
3. Reversing lamps. Type B, P21W-21W
4. Foglamps / sidelamps. Type B, P21/4W-21/4W
For vehicles with interior trim, contact a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop to have the work done.
308

F From the outside, press on the inner clips on the plastic finisher then tip it towards the outside to remove it.
FU nscrew the two lamp fixing screws.

F Spread the three lugs slightly, then extract the bulb holder.
F Remove the failed bulb by pressing lightly on it, then turning it a quarter turn clockwise.
F Change the bulb.
To reassemble, carry out these operations in reverse order.

Third brake lamp (tailgate)
Type A, W5W-5W
FO pen the tailgate.

In the event of a breakdown
Number plate lamps (tailgate)
Type A, W5W-5W

FU nclip the trim at each end by turning it upwards.
F Pull on the trim to disengage the central clips, then remove it.
FU sing a screwdriver through the aperture, push the lamp towards the outside.
F Disconnect the electrical connector. F Remove the lamp. F Turn the bulb holder a quarter turn anti-
clockwise. F Change the failed bulb.

F Insert a thin screwdriver into one of the cutouts in the lens.
F Push it outwards to unclip it. F Remove the lens. F Change the failed bulb.

To refit, carry out these operations in reverse order. To refit the lamp and trim, press on them to clip them in place.

To refit, press on the lens to clip it in place.

309

In the event of a breakdown
Courtesy lamps (front and rear)
For the replacement of this type of LE D lamp and light guide, contact a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop. A replacement kit for the LE Ds is available from PEUGEO T dealers.
310

Changing a fuse
Access to the tools

Changing a fuse
Before changing a fuse: F the cause of the failure must be identified
and rectified, F all electrical consumers must be switched
off, F the vehicle must be immobilised with the
ignition off, F identify the failed fuse using the tables and
layout drawings in the following pages.

The extraction tweezer is located behind the fusebox cover, on the dashboard pillar.
F U nclip the cover by pulling at the top left, then right.
F Disengage the cover completely and turn it over, F Take the tweezer from its housing.

To replace a fuse, you must: F use the special tweezer to extract the fuse
from its housing and check the condition of its filament. F always replace the failed fuse with a fuse of the same rating (same colour); using a different rating could cause faults (risk of fire). If the fuse fails again soon after replacement, have the vehicle's electrical system checked by a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop.

In the event of a breakdown

Good

Failed

Tweezer

The replacement of a fuse not shown in the tables below may cause a serious malfunction of your vehicle. Contact a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop.

311

In the event of a breakdown
Installing electrical accessories
Your vehicle's electrical system is designed to operate with standard or optional equipment. Before installing other electrical equipment or accessories on your vehicle, contact a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop.

Dashboard fuses
The fusebox is placed in the lower dashboard (left-hand side).
Access to the fuses

PEUGEO T will not accept responsibility for the cost incurred in repairing your vehicle or for rectifying malfunctions resulting from the installation of accessories not supplied and not recommended by PEUGEO T and not installed in accordance with its instructions, in particular when the combined consumption of all of the additional equipment connected exceeds 10 milliamperes.

FU nclip the cover by pulling at top left, then right.

For more information on installing a towbar or equipment of the TAXI type, contact a PEUGEO T dealer.

312

Version 1 (Eco)
The fuses described hereafter vary according to the equipment in your vehicle.

Fuse N° F1 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8
F10/F11
F13
F14 F17 F19 F21
F22
F23 F24 F25 F29 F31 F32
F34
F35
F36

In the event of a breakdown

Rating (A) 10 15 20 20 10 20 30
10
5 5 3 3
3
5 5 5 20 15 15
5
5
5

Functions
E lectric power steering, clutch switch Horn. Front/rear screenwash pump. Front/rear screenwash pump. Rear 12 V accessory socket. Single or double rear wipers. Front and rear, exterior, interior locks. Front air conditioning controls, radio controls, gear lever, headup display. Alarm, emergency and assistance calls. Instrument panel. Steering mounted controls. "Keyless E ntry and Starting" system or ignition switch.
Rain and sunshine sensor, multifunction detection camera.
Seat belt unfastened or not fastened display screen. Touch screen, reversing camera and parking sensors. Airbags. Audio system, touch screen, CD player, navigation. Audio system (battery +). Front 12 V accessory socket.
Blind spot monitoring system, door mirror electric controls.
Heated washer jets, headlamp beam height control.
Torch charger, rear courtesy lamp.

8
313

In the event of a breakdown
Version 2 (Full)
The fuses described hereafter vary according to the equipment in your vehicle.
314

Fuse N° F1 F5 F7 F8
F10/F11 F12 F17 F18 F21 F22
F23
F24 F25 F26
F27
F28
F30A or B F31 F33 F35 F36

Rating (A) 3 5 10 20 30 3 10 5 3 3
5
5 5 3
3
10
15 5 15 5 20

Functions
"Keyless E ntry and Starting" system or ignition switch. Touch screen, reversing camera and parking sensors. Rear air conditioning controls, Hi-Fi amplifier. Single or double rear wiper. Front and rear, exterior, interior locks. Alarm. Rear 12 V accessory socket. E mergency and assistance calls. Torch charger, rear courtesy lamp. G love box lamp, rear courtesy lamps.
Blind spot monitoring system, door mirror electric controls.
Steering mounted controls. Headlamp beam height control. Seat belt unfastened or not fastened display screen.
Rain and sunshine sensor, multifunction detection camera.
Front air conditioning controls, radio controls, gear lever, headup display. Audio system (battery +). Airbags. Front 12 V accessory socket. Instrument panel. Audio system, touch screen, CD player, navigation.

In the event of a breakdown

Engine compartment fuses
The fusebox is located in the engine compartment near the battery.
Access to the fuses
F Release the two latches A. F Remove the cover. F Change the fuse. F When you have finished, close the cover
carefully then engage the two latches A, to ensure correct sealing of the fusebox.

The fuses described hereafter vary according to the equipment in your vehicle.

Fuse N° F12 F14
F15
F17 F19 F20 F21 F22 F23 F24

Rating (A) 5 25
5
10 30 15 20 15 15 15

Functions
Heated washer jets. Front and rear screenwash pump. Front radar and emergency braking, electric power steering. Built-in systems interface. Front wiper motor. Front and rear screenwash pump. Headlamp wash pump. Horn. Right hand main beam headlamp. Left hand main beam headlamp.

315

In the event of a breakdown
12 V battery
Procedure for starting the engine using another battery or charging a discharged battery.
General points
Lead-acid starter batteries
Batteries contain harmful substances such as sulphuric acid and lead. They must be disposed of in accordance with regulations and must not, in any circumstances, be discarded with household waste. Take used remote control batteries and vehicle batteries to a special collection point.
Versions equipped with Stop & Start are fitted with a 12 V lead-acid battery of specific technology and specification. Its replacement should be carried out only by a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop.

Access to the battery
The battery is located under the bonnet. FO pen the bonnet using the interior release
lever, then the exterior safety catch. F Secure the bonnet stay.

Protect your eyes and face before handling the battery. All operations on the battery must be carried out in a well ventilated area and away from naked flames and sources of sparks, so as to avoid the risk of explosion or fire. Wash your hands afterwards.
If your vehicle has an automatic gearbox, do not try to start the engine by pushing the vehicle.

F Remove the plastic cover on the (+) terminal.
The battery (-) terminal is not accessible. A remote earth point is provided at the front of the vehicle.
For more information on the Bonnet and the Engine, refer to the corresponding section(s).

316

In the event of a breakdown

Starting using another battery
When your vehicle's battery is discharged, the engine can be started using a slave battery (external or on another vehicle) and jump lead cables or a battery booster.
Never try to start the engine by connecting a battery charger. Never use a 24 V or higher battery booster. First check that the slave battery has a nominal voltage of 12 V and a capacity at least equal to that of the discharged battery. The two vehicles must not be in contact with each other. Switch off the electrical consumers on both vehicles (audio system, wipers, lighting, ...). E nsure that the jump lead cables do not pass close to moving parts of the engine (cooling fan, belts, ...). Do not disconnect the (+) terminal when the engine is running.

F Wait until the engine returns to idle then disconnect the jump lead cables in the reverse order.
F Refit the plastic cover to the (+) terminal, if your vehicle has one.
F Allow the engine to run for at least 30 minutes, by driving or with the vehicle stationary, so that the battery reaches an adequate state of charge.

F Raise the plastic cover on the (+) terminal, if your vehicle has one.
F Connect the red cable to the positive terminal (+) of the flat battery A (at the metal elbow) then to the positive terminal (+) of the slave battery B or the booster.
F Connect one end of the green or black cable to the negative terminal (-) of the slave battery B or the booster (or earth point on the other vehicle).
F Connect the other end of the green or black cable to the earth point C on the broken down vehicle.
F Start the engine of the vehicle with the good battery and leave it running for a few minutes.
FO perate the starter on the broken down vehicle and let the engine run.
If the engine does not start straight away, switch off the ignition and wait a few moments before trying again.

Some functions, including Stop & Start, are not available if the battery is not sufficiently charged.
8
317

In the event of a breakdown

Charging the battery using a battery charger
For optimum service life of the battery, it is essential to maintain an adequate state of charge. In some circumstances it may be necessary to charge the battery: - if you use your vehicle essentially for short
journeys, - if the vehicle is to be taken off the road for
several weeks. Contact a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop.
If you envisage charging your vehicle's battery yourself, use only a charger compatible with lead-acid batteries of a nominal voltage of 12 V.

Follow the instructions for use provided by the manufacturer of the charger. Never reverse polarities.
It is not necessary to disconnect the battery.
F Switch off the ignition. F Switch off all electrical consumers (audio
system, lighting, wipers, ...).

F Connect the charger B cables as follows: - the positive (+) red cable to the (+) terminal of the battery A, - the negative (-) black cable to the earth point C on the vehicle.
F At the end of the charging operation, switch off the charger B before disconnecting the cables from the battery A.
Never try to charge a frozen battery. If the battery has been frozen, have it checked by a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop, who will check that the internal components have not been damaged and the casing is not cracked, which could cause a leak of toxic and corrosive acid.

If this label is present, it is essential to use only a 12 V charger, to avoid causing irreversible damage to the electrical components related to the Stop & Start system.

F Switch off the charger B before connecting the cables to the battery, so as to avoid any dangerous sparks.
FE nsure that the charger cables are in good condition.
F Raise the plastic cover, if your vehicle has one, on the (+) terminal.

318

In the event of a breakdown

Disconnecting the battery Quick release terminal

In order to maintain an adequate state of charge for starting the engine, it is recommended that the battery be disconnected if the vehicle is taken out of service for a long period. Wait 2 minutes after switching off the ignition before disconnecting the battery. F close the windows and the doors before
disconnecting the battery, F switch off all electrical consumers (audio
system, wipers, lighting, ...), F switch off the ignition and wait for four
minutes. Having exposed the battery, it is only necessary to disconnect the (+) terminal.

Disconnecting the (+) terminal
F Raise the lever A fully to release the clamp B.
Reconnecting the (+) terminal
F Position the open clamp B of the cable on the positive post (+) of the battery.
F Press down on the clamp to position it correctly on the battery post.
F Lock the clamp by lowering the lever A.

Do not force the lever as locking will not be possible if the clamp is not positioned correctly; start the procedure again.

Following reconnection of the battery
After reconnecting the battery, switch on the ignition and wait 1 minute before starting to allow initialisation of the electronic systems. However, if minor problems persist following this operation, contact a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop. Referring to the corresponding section, you must yourself reinitialise or reset certain systems, such as: - the remote control or electronic key
(depending on version), - the electric windows, - the date and time, - the radio preset stations.

The Stop & Start system may not be operational during the trip following the first engine start. In this case, the system will only be available again after a continuous period of immobilisation of the vehicle, a period which depends on the ambient temperature and the state of charge of the battery (up to about 8 hours).

319

In the event of a breakdown
Battery capacity

Vehicle length Compact (L1) Standard (L2)
Long (L3)

Rating in Ah (Ampere hours)
480
640
720 / 800

Towing
Procedure for having your vehicle towed or for towing another vehicle using a removable towing eye.
Access to the tools

Always replace the battery by one of equivalent specification.

If your vehicle is fitted with a manual gearbox, put the gear lever into neutral.
If your vehicle has an automatic or electronic gearbox, place the gear selector at position N.
The failure to observe this special point may lead to damage to components of the braking system and the lack of braking assistance on restarting the engine.

The towing eye is stowed in the tool box.
For more information on the Tool box, refer to the corresponding section.

320

Towing your vehicle

Towing another vehicle

FO n the front bumper, press the cover (as shown above) to unclip it.
F Screw the towing eye in fully. F Install the towing arm. F Switch on the hazard warning lamps on the
towed vehicle. F Move off gently and drive slowly over a
short distance only.

FO n the rear bumper, press the cover (as shown above) to unclip it.
F Screw the towing eye in fully. F Install the towing arm. F Switch on the hazard warning lamps on the
towed vehicle. F Move off gently and drive slowly over a
short distance only.

In the event of a breakdown

General recommendations
O bserve the legislation in force in your country. E nsure that the weight of the towing vehicle is higher than that of the towed vehicle. The driver must remain at the wheel of the towed vehicle and must have a valid driving licence. When towing a vehicle with all four wheels on the ground, always use an approved towing arm; rope and straps are prohibited. The towing vehicle must move off gently. When towing a vehicle with the engine off, there is no longer any power assistance for braking or steering. In the following cases, you must always call on a professional recovery service: - vehicle broken down on a motorway
or fast road, - four-wheel drive vehicle, - when it is not possible to put the
gearbox into neutral, unlock the steering, or release the parking brake, - towing with only two wheels on the ground, - where there is no approved towing arm available...

321

In the event of a breakdown

Running out of fuel (Diesel)

O n vehicles fitted with Diesel engines, the fuel system must be primed if you run out of fuel. For all versions other than BlueHDi, refer to the corresponding engine compartment view.

1.6 HDi engine
(except BlueHDi)

For more information on Diesel misfuel prevention, refer to the corresponding section.
If the engine does not start first time, don't keep trying but start the procedure again from the beginning.

F Add at least five litres of Diesel fuel to the tank.
FO pen the bonnet. F If necessary, unclip the styling cover for
access to the priming pump. F Squeeze and release the priming pump
repeatedly until resistance is felt (there may be resistance at the first press). FO perate the starter to start the engine (if the engine does not start at the first attempt, wait around 15 seconds before trying again). F If the engine does not start after a few attempts, operate the priming pump again then start the engine. F Refit the styling cover and clip it in place. F Close the bonnet.

BlueHDi engine
F Fill the fuel tank with at least five litres of Diesel.
F Switch on the ignition (without starting the engine).
F Wait around 6 seconds and switch off the ignition.
F Repeat the operation 10 times. FO perate the starter to run the engine.
Other engines
F Add at least five litres of Diesel fuel to the tank.
FO pen the bonnet. F If necessary, unclip the styling cover for
access to the priming pump. F Squeeze and release the priming pump
repeatedly until resistance is felt (there may be resistance at the first press). FO perate the starter to start the engine (if the engine does not start at the first attempt, wait around 15 seconds before trying again). F If the engine does not start after a few attempts, operate the priming pump again then start the engine. F Refit the styling cover and clip it in place. F Close the bonnet.

322

Dimensions (in mm)
These dimensions have been measured on an unladen vehicle.
Mirrors folded

Compact (L1)

Side-hinged doors

Tailgate

Standard (L2) Long (L3)

* Increased payload. ** Payload increased with high body. *** Depending on the country of sale.

Technical data
9
323

Technical data

E ngines
Engine characteristics
The engine characteristics (capacity, maximum power, maximum power speed, fuel, CO 2 emissions...) for your vehicle are given in the registration document, as well as in sales brochures. These characteristics correspond to the values type-approved on a test bed, under conditions defined in E uropean legislation (Directive 1999/99/E C). For more information, contact a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop.

Weights
Weights and towed loads
The maximum weights and towed loads for your vehicle are given are given in the registration document, as well as in sales brochures. These values are also present on the manufacturer's plate or label. For more information, contact a PEUGEO T dealer or a qualified workshop.
The kerb weight is equal to the unladen weight + driver (75 kg). The G TW and towed load values indicated apply up to a maximum altitude of 1 000 metres; the towed load mentioned must be reduced by 10 % for every additional 1 000 metres. The weight of the braked trailer can be increased, within the G TW limit, on condition that the G VW of the towing vehicle is reduced by the same amount. The recommended nose weight is the vertical load on the towbar ball (removable with or without tools).

GVW : gross vehicle weight, the maximum authorised vehicle weight. GTW : gross train weight, the maximum authorised weight of vehicle plus trailer.
324

High ambient temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle to protect the engine; when the ambient temperature is higher than 37 °C, limit the towed weight.
Towing with a lightly loaded vehicle can adversely affect roadholding. Braking distances are increased when towing a trailer. Never exceed 60 mph (100 km/h) when towing (comply with the legislation in force in your country).
If the ambient temperature is high, it is recommended that the engine be allowed to idle for 1 to 2 minutes after the vehicle comes to a stop, to facilitate its cooling.

EU RO 6 Diesel engines

Engine

Engine code

Gearbox

Engine oil capacity with filter replacement (litres)

1.6 litre

BHV

Manual

BlueHDi 95 (DV6FDU )

(5-speed)

5.6

Length L1, L2, L3 L2*, L3*

Technical data

Unbraked trailer weight (kg) 8-9 seats

Trailer nose weight (kg)
8-9 seats
72

L1, L2, L3

1.6 litre

BHS

E TG 6

BlueHDi 95 S&S

(DV6FDU )

electronic (6-speed)

5.6

750

L2*, L3*

1.6 litre BlueHDi 115

BHX

Manual

5.6

S&S

(DV6FCU )

(6-speed)

* Increased payload.

L1, L2, L3 L2*, L3*

72
9
80
325

Technical data

Engine

Engine code

Gearbox

Engine oil capacity with filter replacement (litres)

2 litre BlueHDi

AHX

150 S&S

(DW10FD)

Manual (6-speed)

6.1

Length L1, L2, L3 L2*, L3*

E AT6

2 litre BlueHDi

AHH

180 S&S

(DW10FC)

automatic

5.1

(6-speed)

L1, L2, L3 L2*, L3*

Unbraked trailer weigt (kg) 8-9 seats

Trailer nose weight (kg)
8-9 seats
92

100 750
80

* Increased payload. 326

Identification markings
Various visible markings for the identification of your vehicle.

Technical data

D. Tyre/paint label. This label on the middle door pillar, driver's side, contains the following information: - the tyre inflation pressures, laden and unladen, - the tyre sizes (including the tyre load index and speed rating), - the inflation pressure for the spare wheel, - the paint colour code.

A. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) under the bonnet. This number is engraved on the chassis near the right hand front wheel arch.
B. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) on the windscreen lower cross member. This number is indicated on a selfadhesive label which is visible through the windscreen.

C. Manufacturer's label. This self-destroying label on the middle door pillar, right or left hand side, contains the following information: - the manufacturer's name, - the E uropean whole vehicle type approval number, - the vehicle identification number (VIN), - the maximum authorised weight (gross vehicle weight), - the maximum authorised weight with trailer (gross train weight), - the maximum front axle weight, - the maximum rear axle weight.

The tyre pressures must be checked when the tyres are cold, at least once a month.
If the tyre pressures are too low, this increases fuel consumption.

327

Audio and Telematics

Emergency or assistance call
PEUGEOT Connect SOS

In an emergency, press this button for more than 2 seconds. Flashing of the green LE D and a voice message confirm that the call has been made to the "PEUGEO T Connect SO S" call centre*.

If an impact is detected by the airbag control unit, and independently of the deployment of any airbags, an emergency call is made automatically.

Pressing this button again immediately cancels the request. The green LE D goes off. Pressing this button for more than 8 seconds cancels the request at any time.
The green LE D remains on (without flashing) when communication is established. It goes off at the end of the call.
"PEUGEO T Connect SO S" immediately locates your vehicle, starts communication with you in your language**, and where necessary sends the appropriate public emergency services**. In countries where the service is not available, or when the locating service has been expressly declined, the call is sent directly to the emergency services (112) without the vehicle location .

If you benefit from the PEUGEO T Connect Packs offer with the SO S and assistance pack included, there are additional services available to you in your MyPEUGEO T personal space, via the Internet website for your country.
* Subject to the general conditions for the service available from dealers and to technological and technical limitations.
** Depending on the geographical cover of "PEUGEO T Connect SO S", "PEUGEO T Connect Assistance" and the official national language selected by the owner of the vehicle. The list of countries covered and PEUGEO T CO NNE CT services is available from dealers or at www.peugeot.co.uk.

328

Audio and Telematics

Operation of the system
When the ignition is switched on, the green LE D comes on for 3 seconds indicating that the system is operating correctly.
If the orange LE D flashes then goes off: there is a system fault.

PEUGEOT Connect Assistance
Press this button for more than 2 seconds to request assistance if the vehicle breaks down. A voice message confirms that the call has been made**.
Pressing this button again immediately cancels the request. The cancellation is confirmed by a voice message.

If you purchased your vehicle outside the PEUGEO T dealer network, we invite you to have a dealer check the configuration of these services and, if desired, modified to suit your wishes. In a multi-lingual country, configuration is possible in the official national language of your choice.

The orange LE D is on continuously: the backup battery must be replaced. In either case, the emergency and assistance calls may not function. Contact a qualified repairer as soon as possible.
A fault with the system does not prevent the vehicle being driven.

Geo-location
You can deactivate geo-location by simultaneously pressing the "PEUGEO T Connect SO S" and "PEUGEO T Connect Assistance" buttons, followed by a press on "PEUGEO T Connect Assistance" to confirm. To reactivate geo-location, simultaneously press the "PEUGEO T Connect SO S" and "PEUGEO T Connect Assistance" buttons again, followed by a press on "PEUGEO T Connect Assistance" to confirm.

For technical reasons and in particular to improve the quality of "PEUGEO T CO NNE CT services" services to customers, the manufacturer reserves the right to carry out updates to the vehicle's on-board telematic system.
** Depending on the geographical cover of "PEUGEO T Connect SO S", "PEUGEO T Connect Assistance" and the official national language selected by the owner of the vehicle. The list of countries covered and PEUGEO T CO NNE CT services is available from dealers or at www.peugeot.co.uk.

.
329

Audio and Telematics
PEUGEO T Connect Nav
GPS satellite navigation - Connectivity - Multimedia audio - Bluetooth® telephone

First steps Steering mounted controls Menus Voice commands Navigation Connected navigation Connectivity Radio Media Telephone Settings Frequently asked questions

Contents 332 334 335 336 342 358 368 378 390 402 412

The system is protected in such a way that it will only operate in your vehicle.
The link below gives access to O SS (O pen Source Software) codes for the system. http://www.psa-peugeot-citroen.com/oss

As a safety measure and because it requires sustained attention by the driver, the pairing of a Bluetooth mobile telephone with the Bluetooth hands-free system of your audio system must be done with the vehicle stationary and the ignition on. The display of the energy economy mode message signals that a change to standby is imminent. For more information on the Energy economy mode refer to the corresponding section.

.
331

Audio and Telematics

First steps
With the engine running, a press mutes the sound. With the ignition off, a press turns the system on.
Volume.

U se the buttons either side of the touch screen for access to the menus, then press the virtual buttons in the touch screen. All of the touch areas of the screen are white. E ach menu is displayed in one or two pages (primary page and secondary page).

The touch screen is of the "capacitive" type. To clean the screen, use a soft, non-abrasive cloth (spectacles cloth) with no additional product. Do not use sharp objects on the screen. Do not touch the screen with wet hands.

Primary page

23 °C

87.5 MHz
FM/87.5 MHz 87.5MHz

12:13

Secondary page

332

Short-cuts: using the virtual buttons in the upper band of touch screen, it is possible to go directly to the selection of audio source, the list of stations (or titles, depending on the source), message notifications, emails, mapping updates and, depending on services, navigation notifications.

23 °C

Audio and Telematics

531 kHz

12:13

In the "Settings" menu you can create a profile for just one person or a group of people with common points, with the possibility of entering a multitude of settings (radio presets, audio settings, navigation history, contact favourites, ...); these settings are taken into account automatically.

Select the audio source (depending on version): - FM / DAB* / AM* stations. - Smartphone via MirrorLinkTM or CarPlay®. -U SB memory stick. - Media player connected to the auxiliary
socket (jack, cable not supplied). - Telephone connected by Bluetooth* and
using Bluetooth* audio streaming.
* Depending on equipment.

In very hot conditions, the volume may be limited to protect the system. It may go into standby (screen and sound off) for at least 5 minutes. The return to normal takes place when the temperature in the passenger compartment drops.

.
333

Audio and Telematics

Steering mounted controls

Voice commands: Short press, system voice commands. Long press, smartphone voice commands via the system.

Increase volume. Mute / Restore the sound.

Decrease volume.

Media (short press): change the multimedia source. Telephone (short press): call. Call in progress (short press): access to telephone menu. Telephone (long press): reject an incoming call, end call, access to telephone menu.

Radio (rotate): automatic search for the previous / next station. Media (rotate): previous / next track, move in a list. Short press: Confirm a selection. O ther than selection, access to presets.
Radio: display the list of stations. Media: display the list of tracks. Radio, press and hold: update the list of stations received.

334

Menus
Connected navigation

23 °C

12:13

Connectivity

23 °C

531 kHz

12:13

Audio and Telematics

Radio Media

23 °C

87.5 MHz
FM/87.5 MHz 87.5MHz

12:13

E nter navigation settings and choose a destination. U se services available in real time, depending on equipment.
Telephone

O perate certain applications on a smartphone connected via MirrorLinkTM or CarPlay®. Check the state of Bluetooth and Wi-Fi connections.
Settings

Select an audio source, a radio station, display photographs.
Driving

23 °C

531 kHz

12:13

23 °C

12:13

Connect a telephone by Bluetooth®, read messages and emails and send quick messages.

E nter settings for a personal profile and/ or adjust the settings for sound (balance, ambience, ...), and the display (language, units, date, time, ...).

Activate, deactivate, adjust the settings for certain vehicle functions.

.
335

Audio and Telematics
Voice commands
Steering mounted controls
Pressing this button activates the voice commands function.
To ensure that voice commands are always recognised by the system, please observe the following recommendations: - speak in a normal tone without
breaking up words or raising your voice. - always wait for the "beep" (audible signal) before speaking. - for best operation, it is recommended that the windows and opening roof (if fitted) be closed to avoid interference from extraneous noises. - before making a voice command, ask other passengers to not speak.

First steps
E xample of a "voice command" for navigation: "Navigate to address "11 Regent Street, London"". E xample of a "voice command" for the radio and media: "Play artist "Madonna"".
E xample of a "voice command" for the telephone: "Call David Miller".
The voice commands, with a choice of 12 languages (E nglish, French, Italian, Spanish, G erman, Dutch, Portuguese, Polish, Turkish, Russian, Arabic, Brazilian), are made using the language previously chosen and set in the system.

Information - Using the system
Press the Push To Talk button and tell me what you'd like after the tone. Remember you can interrupt me at any time by pressing this button. If you press it again while I'm waiting for you to speak, it'll end the conversation. If you need to start over, say "cancel". If you want to undo something, say "undo". And to get information and tips at any time, just say "help". If you ask to me do something and there's some information missing that I need, I'll give you some examples or take you through it step by step. There's more information available in "novice" mode. You can set the dialogue mode to "expert" when you feel comfortable.

The voice commands in Arabic for: "Navigate to address" and "Display PO I in the city", are not available.

336

Audio and Telematics

Global voice commands
These commands can be made from any screen page after pressing the voice command or telephone button located on the steering wheel, as long as there is no telephone call in progress.

"Voice command" Help Voice command help Navigation help Radio help Media help Telephone help Set dialogue mode as <...> Select profile <...> Yes No

Help message

There are lots of topics I can help you with. You can say: "help with phone", "help with navigation", "help with media" or "help with radio". For an overview on how to use voice controls, you can say "help with voice controls".

Select "beginner" or "expert" mode. Select profile 1, 2 or 3.
Say "yes" if I got that right. O therwise, say "no" and we'll start that again.

.
337

Audio and Telematics
"Navigation" voice commands
These commands can be issued from any screen page after pressing the voice command or telephone button on the steering wheel, as long as there is no telephone call in progress.

"Voice command"

Help message

Navigate home Navigate to work Navigate to preferred address <...> Navigate to contact <...> Navigate to address <...> Show nearby POI <...> Remaining distance Remaining time Arrival time Stop route guidance

To start guidance or add a stopover, say "navigate to" and then the address or contact name. For example, "navigate to address 11 Regent Street, London", or "navigate to contact, John Miller". You can specify if it's a preferred or recent destination. For example, "navigate to preferred address, Tennis club", "navigate to recent destination, 11 Regent Street, London". O therwise, just say, "navigate home". To see points of interest on a map, you can say things like "show hotels in Banbury" or "show nearby petrol station". For more information you can ask for "help with route guidance".
To get information about your current route, you can say "tell me the remaining time", "distance" or "arrival time". Try saying "help with navigation" to learn more commands.

Depending on the country, give the destination instructions (address) in the language used by the system. 338

Audio and Telematics
"Radio Media" voice commands
These commands can be issued from any screen page after pressing the voice command or telephone button on the steering wheel, as long as there is no telephone call in progress.

"Voice command"

Help message

Tune to channel <...>

You can pick a radio station by saying "tune to" and the station name or frequency. For example "tune to channel Talksport" or "tune to 98.5 FM". To listen to a preset radio station, say "tune to preset number". For example "tune to preset number five".

What's playing

To display the details of the current "track", "artist" and "album", you can say "What's playing"

Play song <...> Play artist <...> Play album <...>

U se the command "play" to select the type of music you'd like to hear. You can pick by "song", "artist", or "album". Just say something like "play artist, Madonna", "play song, Hey Jude", or "play album, Thriller".

Media voice commands are available only for a U SB connection.

.
339

Audio and Telematics
"Telephone" voice commands
If a telephone is connected to the system, these voice commands can be issued from any main screen page after pressing the telephone button on the steering wheel, as long as there is no telephone call in progress. If there is no telephone connected by Bluetooth, a voice message announces: "Please first connect a telephone" and the voice session will be closed.

"Voice command"

Help message

Call contact <...>* Dial <...>* Display contacts* Display calls* Call (message box | voicemail)*

To make a phone call, say "call" followed by the contact name, for example: "Call David Miller". You can also include the phone type, for example: "Call David Miller at home". To make a call by number, say "dial" followed by the phone number, for example, "Dial 107776 835 417". You can check your voicemail by saying "call voicemail". To send a text, say "send quick message to", followed by the contact, and then the name of the quick message you'd like to send. For example, "send quick message to David Miller, I'll be late". To display the list of calls, say "display calls". For more information on SMS, you can say "help with texting".

* This function is available only if the telephone connected to the system supports downloading of contacts and recent calls and if the download has been done.
340

Audio and Telematics
"Test message" voice commands
If a telephone is connected to the system these voice commands can be issued from any main screen page after pressing the telephone button on the steering wheel, as long as there is no telephone call in progress. If no telephone has been connected by Bluetooth, a voice message announces: "Please first connect a telephone" and the voice session will be closed.

"Voice command"

Help message

Send text to <...> Listen to most recent message*

To hear your messages, you can say "listen to most recent message". When you want to send a text, there's a set of quick messages ready for you to use. Just use the quick message name and say something like "send quick message to Bill Carter, I'll be late". Check the phone menu for the names of the supported messages.
Please say "call" or "send quick message to", and then select a line from the list. To move around a list shown on the display, you can say "go to start", "go to end", "next page" or "previous page". To undo your selection, say "undo". To cancel the current action and start again, say "cancel".

The system only sends predefined "Quick messages".
* This function is only available if the telephone connected to the system supports downloading of contacts and recent calls and if the download has been done.

.
341

Audio and Telematics
Navigation
Level 1

23 °C

Level 2
12:13

23 °C
1

12:13

Level 3

342

Level 1 Navigation
Navigation

Level 2

Navigation

World map
Around the vehicle Around home Around the destination 2D mode

Level 3

Audio and Telematics
Comments
Select the orientation of the map; north up, vehicle direction up or perspective.

Display the traffic information available.

Manually locate an area on the world map or enter the latitude and longitude coordinates.

Display the location criteria selected.
Switch to a 2D map. Zoom out. Zoom in. Start navigation to the current address. Save the current address. Zoom out. Zoom in.

.
343

Audio and Telematics Level 1

Level 2

23 °C
1

12:13

23 °C

12:13

Level 3 Point of interest on map
2 3456 7

344

Level 1

Level 2 Stations Car park Danger area Map color

Navigation

POI on map

View map

Level 3
2 Travel 3 Active life 4 Commercial 5 Public 6 G eographic
Select all Confirm
7 Modify city
Weather Petrol Station Car park Traffic Danger area Select PO I

Audio and Telematics
Comments
Activate or deactivate the content available (stations, car parks, risk areas and danger areas).
Select day or night mode for display of the map.

Select the PO Is available.

Select or deselect all. Save your choice or selection. Select or modify a city.

Display on the map the content available in nonconnected mode.

Select from the PO Is available.

Zoom out. Zoom in.

345

Audio and Telematics Level 3
346

Level 4

Level 5 Filling stations located Car parks around the vehicle

Level 3 Zoom in Around the vehicle O n the route At the destination Weather

Level 4 Confirm

Filling stations

Car park

Level 5

Audio and Telematics
Comments Zoom in around the city selected.

Select a location option.

Filling stations around the vehicle Filling stations on the route Filling stations at the destination Car parks around the vehicle Car parks on the route Car parks at the destination

Weather information transmitted in TMC mode.
Display the list of PO Is.
Zoom out. Zoom in.

.
347

Audio and Telematics Level 3
348

Level 4 Select POI

Level 5 Traffic observed
List of danger areas

Level 3 Traffic Danger area Select PO I

Level 4

Level 5 Traffic observed List of danger areas

Audio and Telematics
Comments Traffic information sent in real time. Display the list of danger areas (roadworks, breakdowns, accidents, ...). Configure a category of PO I to display.

.
349

Audio and Telematics Level 1
1
Navigation menu
350

Level 2

My destinations

Find a point of interest

11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18

Level 3

Level 1 Navigation

Level 2

1 Secondary page

Enter address

Confirm

8 Recent
Navigation
9 Preferred 1 Secondary page
My destinations 10 Contact

11 Travel

Navigation

12 Active life

13 Commercial 1 Secondary page
14 Public

Points of interest
15 Geographic

Navigation

16 Point of interest 17 Address

1 Secondary page 18 Local / Connected
Search
Confirm

Level 3
My home My work

Audio and Telematics Comments Select the country. Save the current address. Confirm the current address.
Display the lists of destinations and start navigation.
Delete one or more destinations.

List of categories available. After selection of category, select the point of interest.

Search for a point of interest.
E nter a point of interest.
E nter the address of a point of interest. E nter settings for the PO I search mode in a local or connected database depending on the services subscribed to. Confirm the entry.

.
351

Audio and Telematics Level 1
1
Navigation menu
352

Level 2 Guidance criteria

Route and waypoints

Settings

21 22 23 24 25

Level 3 Add waypoint Route and waypoints
Settings

Level 1

Level 2 Fast

Navigation

Short

1 Secondary page
Guidance criteria

Compromise Ecological See on map

Confirm

19 Waypoints

Navigation

20 Route
Add waypoint

1 Secondary page

Preview

Routes / waypoints

Finish

21 Aspects

Navigation

22 Options

23 Alerts 1 Secondary page
24 Vocal

Settings

25 Mapping

Confirm

Level 3 Add a waypoint

Audio and Telematics
Comments
Select the guidance criteria (motorways, tolls and how traffic is taken into account).
Display the route selected using the criteria. Save your selections. Display the waypoints saved. Display details of the route. Add a waypoint from a list offered. Display the map. Press to calculate the route. Delete one or more waypoints. Move a waypoint in the list.

E nter choices and select the volume for the voice and stating the names of streets.

Save the selections adopted.

353

Audio and Telematics

Choosing a new destination
Towards a new destination
Press Navigation to display the primary page.
Press the "MENU" button to go to the
1 secondary page.
Select "Enter address".
Select the "Country".
E nter the "City", the "Street" and the "Number" and confirm by pressing on the suggestions displayed. Press "Confirm" to select the "Guidance criteria".
And / O r Select "See on map" to select the "Guidance criteria".
Press "Confirm" to start navigation.
354

To use the navigation system, it is necessary to enter the "City", the "Street" and the "Number" using the virtual keypad, or to take them from the list of "Contacts" or from the "History" of addresses.
Without confirmation of the street number, you will be guided to one end of the street.

Towards a recent destination
Press Navigation to display the primary page.
Press the "MENU" button to go to the
1 secondary page.
Select "My destinations".
Select the "Recent" tab.
8
Select the address chosen in the list to display the "Guidance criteria".
Press "Confirm" to start navigation.

Select "Position" to see the point of arrival geographically.

Audio and Telematics

Towards "My home" or "My work"
Press Navigation to display the primary page.

Towards a contact
Press Navigation to display the primary page.

Towards points of interest (POI)
Points of Interest (PO I) are listed in different categories.

Press the "MENU" button to go to the
1 secondary page.
Select "My destinations".
Select the "Preferred" tab.
9
Select "My home".
Or Select "My work".
Or Select a previously saved favourite destination.

Press the "MENU" button to go to the
1 secondary page.
Select "My destinations".
Select the "Contact" tab.
10
Select a contact in the list offered to start navigation.

1
Or

Press Navigation to display the primary page.
Press the "MENU" button to go to the secondary page.
Select "Points of interest".
Select the "Travel", or "Leisure" or "Commercial" or "Public" or "Geographic" tab.
Select "Search" to enter the name and address of a PO I.
Press "Confirm" to start calculation of the route.

.
355

Audio and Telematics

Towards a point on the map

Towards GPS coordinates

Press Navigation to display the primary page.

E xplore the map by sliding a finger on the screen.

Select the destination by pressing on the map.
Tap the screen to place a marker and display the sub-menu. Press this button to start navigation.

Press this button to display the world O r map. U sing the grid, select by zoom the desired country or region.

Press this button to enter the G PS

coordinates.

Press this button to save the address

And

displayed

A long press on a point opens a list of PO Is nearby.

A marker is displayed in the middle of the screen, with the "Latitude" and "Longitude" coordinates. Press this button to start navigation.
Press this button to save the address displayed.
Press this button to enter the value for "Latitude" using the virtual keypad.
Press this button to enter the value for "Longitude" using the virtual keypad.

356

TMC (Traffic Message Channel)
TMC (Traffic Message Channel) is a E uropean standard on the broadcasting of traffic information via the RDS system on FM radio, transmitting traffic information in real time. The TMC information is then displayed on a G PS Navigation system map and taken into account straight away during navigation, so as to avoid accidents, traffic jams and closed roads.
The display of danger areas depends on the legislation in force and subscription to the service.

Audio and Telematics
.
357

Audio and Telematics
Connected navigation
Depending on the equipment level of the vehicle
Network connection provided by the vehicle
OR
Network connection provided by the user
358

23 °C

12:13

Audio and Telematics

Connected navigation connection

As a safety measure and because it requires sustained attention by the driver, using a smartphone when driving is prohibited. All operations must be done with the vehicle stationary.

Network connection provided by the user
USB connection
Connect the U SB cable. The smartphone is in charge mode when connected by U SB cable.

For access to connected navigation, you can use the connection provided by the vehicle via the "Emergency or assistance call" services or use your smartphone as a modem. Activate and enter settings for sharing the smartphone connection.

Bluetooth connection Activate the Bluetooth function on the telephone and ensure that it is visible to all (see the "Connectivity" section).
Wi-Fi connection Select a Wi-Fi connection found by the system and connect to it (see the "Connectivity" section).

Network connection provided by the vehicle
The system is automatically connected to the modem included for the "E mergency or assistance calls" services and does not require a connection provided by the user via their smartphone.

Restrictions of use: - With CarPlay®, connection sharing is
only with a Wi-Fi connection. - With MirrorLinkTM, connection
sharing is only with a U SB connection.
The quality of services depends on the quality of the network connection.

O n the arrival of "TO MTO M TRAFFIC", the services are available.
The services offered with connected navigation are as follows. A connected services pack: - Weather, - Filling stations, - Car park, - Traffic, - PO I, local search. A Danger area pack.

The principles and standards are constantly changing. For communication between your smartphone and the system to operate correctly, we recommend that you keep your smartphone's operating system up to date, and the time and date on your smartphone and the system correct.

.
359

Audio and Telematics Level 1

23 °C

Level 2
12:13

23 °C
1

12:13

23 °C

12:13 12:13

Level 3 Point of interest on map
26 27 28 29 30
7

360

Level 1 Navigation

Level 2

Navigation TOMTOM TRAFFIC
Navigation

Weather Stations Car park Traffic Danger area Map color

POI on map

View map

Level 3
26 Commercial 27 G eographic 28 Leisure 29 Public 30 Travel
Confirm
7 Modify city

Audio and Telematics
Comments Select the orientation of the map; north up, vehicle direction up or perspective. O n connection of the system to a network, "TO MTO M TRAFFIC" is displayed instead of "TMC", for use of all of the options available, in real time.
Select the options. The map display the route chosen, depending on options.
Select the display mode for the map.

Select the PO Is available.

Save the options.

Select or change a city.

Zoom out. Zoom in.

361

Audio and Telematics Level 3
362

Level 4

Level 5

Weather information

Filling stations located

Sort by spaces

Level 3 Select city Around the vehicle O n the route At the destination Weather
Filling stations
Car park

Level 4 Confirm

Level 5

Audio and Telematics Comments Select or change a city.
Select or change a city.

Weather information
Filling stations around the vehicle Filling stations on the route Filling stations at the destination
31 By distance 32 By price
Car parks around the vehicle Car parks on the route Car parks at the destination Sort by distance Sort by spaces Sort by price

Display the weather forecast for the day or the following days.
Display the list of filling stations and the associated information (address, prices, fuels, ...).
Display the list of car parks and the associated information (address, distance, spaces available, price, ...).
Zoom out. Zoom in.

.
363

Audio and Telematics Level 3
364

Level 4

Level 5 Traffic observed
List of danger areas Select POI

Level 3 Traffic Danger areas Points of interest

Level 4
Points of interest

Level 5 Traffic observed List of danger areas Select PO I

Audio and Telematics
Comments Display traffic information in real time: type, description and duration (in minutes).
Display danger areas (roadworks, breakdowns, accidents, ...) in real time.
Display the list of PO Is for the location selected.

.
365

Audio and Telematics

Display the weather
Press Navigation to display the primary page.

Settings specific to connected navigation
Press Navigation to display the primary page.

Press this button to display the list of services.
Select "View map".

Press the "MENU" button to go to the
1 secondary page.
Select "Settings".

Select "Weather".

Select "Options".
22

Press this button to display the first level of information.
Press this button to display the detailed weather information.

Activate or deactivate:
- "Allow declaration of danger areas"
- "Guidance to final destination on foot"
- "Authorise sending information"

The temperature displayed at 6 o'clock in the morning will be the maximum temperature for the day. The temperature displayed at 6 o'clock in the evening will be the minimum temperature for the night.

Select "Alerts".
23
Activate or deactivate "Warn of danger zones".

366

For access to connected navigation, you have to select the option: "Authorise sending information".
The display of danger zones is conditioned by the legislation in force and subscription to the service.

Declaration of "Danger areas"
To distribute information on the declaration of danger zones, you should check the option: "Allow declaration of danger areas".
Press Navigation to display the primary page.
Press the "Declare a new danger area" button located in the upper bar of the touch screen.
Select the option "Type" to choose the type of "Danger area".
Select the "Speed" option and enter it using the virtual keypad.
Press "Confirm" to save and distribute the information.

You can download updates to the system, danger zones and mapping, from the brand's website. The download procedure can be found in the same place.

Audio and Telematics
.
367

Audio and Telematics
Connectivity
Functionalities available according to equipment. Level 1

23 °C

531 kHz

12:13

Level 2 Networks

368

Level 3 Bluetooth connection

Wi-Fi network connection

Connections and subscriptions to services

Share Wi-Fi connection

Functionalities available according to equipment. Level 2

Connectivity

2 All

1 Secondary page
Bluetooth connection

3 Connected
Search

Connectivity
1 Secondary page
Wi-Fi network connection

4 Secured 5 Not secured 6 Stored

Connectivity
1 Secondary page
Manage connection

Connectivity
1 Secondary page
Share Wi-Fi connection

7 Activation 8 Settings

Level 3

Audio and Telematics

Comments Display all telephones, connected or disconnected. Display all connected telephones.
Start a search for a device to connect.
Display secured Wi-Fi networks.
Display non-secured Wi-Fi networks.
Display remembered Wi-Fi networks.

Display the state of the subscription to connected services, the state of the network connection and the connection mode.

Activate or deactivating the sharing of the Wi-Fi connection.
Select a Wi-Fi network found by the system and connect to it.
Save settings.

.
369

Audio and Telematics

Bluetooth connection®
As a safety measure and because it requires sustained attention by the driver, the pairing of a Bluetooth mobile telephone with the Bluetooth handsfree system of your audio system must be done with the vehicle stationary and the ignition on.
Activate the Bluetooth function on the telephone and ensure that it is "visible to all" (telephone configuration).
Procedure from the telephone
Select the name of the system in the list of devices detected.
In the system, accept the connection request from the telephone.
To complete the pairing, whichever procedure used (from the telephone or from the system), ensure that the code is the same in the system and in the telephone. 370

Procedure from the system
Press on "Telephone" to display the secondary page.
Press on the "OPTIONS" button to
1 go to the secondary page.
Press on "Bluetooth connection".
Select "Search". The list of detected telephones is displayed.
If the pairing procedure fails, it is recommended that you deactivate and then reactivate the "Bluetooth" function in your telephone.
Select the name of the chosen telephone in the list.

Connection sharing
The system offers to connect the telephone with 3 profiles: - "Telephone" (hands-free kit, telephone
only), - "Streaming" (wireless play of audio files
on the telephone), - "Mobile internet data".
The "Mobile internet data" profile must be activated for connected navigation (where the vehicle does not have "E mergency and assistance call" services), having first activated sharing of this connection on your smartphone.
Select one or more profiles.
Press on "Confirm".

Depending on the type of telephone, you may be asked to accept or not the transfer of your contacts and messages.

Audio and Telematics

Wi-Fi connection
Network connection by the smartphone Wi-Fi.
Press "Connectivity" to display the primary page.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to
1 the secondary page.
Select "Wi-Fi network connection".

Sharing the Wi-Fi connection
Creation of a local Wi-Fi network by the system.
Press Connectivity to display the primary page.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to
1 the secondary page.
Select "Share Wi-Fi connection".

Managing connections
Press Connectivity to display the primary page.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to
1 the secondary page.
Select "Manage connection".

Select the "Secured", "Not secured" or "Stored" tab.
Select a network.
U sing the virtual keypad, enter the "Key" for the Wi-Fi network and the "Password". Press "Confirm" to start the connection.
The Wi-Fi connection and the sharing of the Wi-Fi connection are exclusive.

Select the "Activation" tab to
7 activate or deactivate sharing of the Wi-Fi connection. And / O r
Select the "Settings" to change the
8 name of the system network and the password. Press "Confirm".
To protect from any piracy and provide maximum security for your systems, it is recommended that you use a security code or complex password.

With this function you can view the access to connected services, the availability of connected services and modify the connection mode.

.
371

Audio and Telematics
MirrorLinkTM smartphone connection

372

23 °C

531 kHz

12:13

Audio and Telematics

As a safety measure and because it requires the sustained attention of the driver, using a smartphone when driving is prohibited. O peration must be with the vehicle stationary.
The synchronisation of a smartphone allows applications on a smartphone that are adapted to the MirrorLinkTM technology to be displayed in the vehicle's screen. The principles and standards are constantly evolving. For the communication process between the smartphone and the system to work correctly, the smartphone must be unlocked; update the operating system of your smartphone as well as the date and time in the smartphone and the system. For the list of eligible smartphones, connect to the brand's internet website in your country.

As a safety measure, applications can only be viewed with the vehicle stationary; display is interrupted once the vehicle is moving.
The "MirrorLinkTM" function requires the use of a compatible smartphone and applications.
When connecting a smartphone to the system, it is recommended that Bluetooth® be started on the smartphone
Connect a U SB cable. The smartphone charges when connected by a U SB cable.
From the system, press on "Connectivity" to display the primary page.
Press "MirrorLinkTM" to start the application in the system.

O nce connection is established, a page is displayed with the applications already downloaded to your smartphone and adapted to MirrorLinkTM technology.
Access to the different audio sources remains accessible in the margin of the MirrorLinkTM display, using touch buttons in the upper bar. Access to the menus for the system is possible at any time using the dedicated buttons
There may be a wait for the availability of applications, depending on the quality of your network.

Depending on the smartphone, it may be necessary to activate the "MirrorLinkTM" function.
During the procedure, several screen pages relating to certain functions are displayed. Accept to start and end the connection.

.
373

Audio and Telematics Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

374

23 °C

531 kHz

12:13

Level 1

Level 2

Connectivity MirrorLinkTM

Level 3

Audio and Telematics
Comments
G o to or return to the applications already downloaded to your smartphone and adapted to MirrorLinkTM technology.
G o to a menu list depending on the application chosen. "Back": abandon the current operation, go up one level. "Home": go to or return to the "Car mode" page on your smartphone.
G o to the primary page of the "Connectivity" menu.

.
375

Audio and Telematics
CarPlay® smartphone connection

376

23 °C

531 kHz

12:13

Audio and Telematics

As a safety measure and because it requires the sustained attention of the driver, using a smartphone when driving is prohibited. O peration must be with the vehicle stationary.

The synchronisation of a

smartphone allows applications on a

smartphone that are adapted to the

CarPlay® technology to be displayed

in the vehicle's screen, having first

activated the CarPlay® function in your

smartphone.

As the principles and standards

are constantly changing, it is

recommended that you keep your

smartphone's operating system

updated.

For the list of eligible smartphones, go

to the brand's internet website in your

country.

Connect a U SB cable. The smartphone charges when connected by a U SB cable.
Press "Telephone" to display the CarPlay ® interface.
Connect a U SB cable. The smartphone charges when connected by a U SB cable. In the system, press "Connectivity" to display the primary page.
Press "CarPlay" to display the CarPlay® interface.

O n connecting the U SB cable, the CarPlay® function deactivates the system's Bluetooth® mode.

.
377

Audio and Telematics
Radio Media
Level 1

Level 2

23 °C

87.5 MHz
FM/87.5 MHz 87.5MHz

12:13

1 234

378

23 °C

87.5 MHz
FM/87.5 MHz 87.5MHz

12:13

23 °C

531 kHz
AM/531 kHz Po kHz

12:13

123 4
Radio stations

Level 1
Radio Media Source

Radio Media

Frequency / Presets

Radio Media

Band

Radio Media

List

Radio USB iPod AUX Bluetooth Frequency Presets FM DAB AM

Level 2

Radio stations

Audio and Telematics Comments

Select change of source.

Carry out an automatic or manual search for radio stations. Make a long press on an empty location to preset a station.
Press Band to change waveband.

O pen the list of radio stations and press on a radio station to select it.

.
379

Audio and Telematics Level 1
1
Radio-media options
380

Level 2 Audio settings

56789
Radio settings

Radio stations

12 13 14 15

Audio settings
56789
Audio settings
56789

Level 1

5 Ambience

Level 2

6 Distribution
Radio Media
7 Sound 1 Secondary page
8 Voice
Audio settings
9 Ringtone

Confirm

Radio Media

10 General

1 Secondary page 11 Announcements

Radio settings

Confirm

12 FM

13 DAB

Radio Media

14 AM

1 Secondary page 15 Presets

Radio stations

Frequency

Audio and Telematics
Comments Select the sound ambience. Sound distribution by the Arkamys® system. Adjust the volume or activate volume linked to speed. Adjust the voice volume. Adjust the ringtone volume. Save settings.
Activate or deactivate settings.
Save settings.

Display the list of radio stations for the band selected.

Select a preset radio station. E nter a frequency manually. Change the screen display mode. U pdate the list according to reception.

.
381

Audio and Telematics Level 1
1
Radio-media options
382

Level 2
USB
16 17 18 19 20
Photos
21

Level 1

16 Albums

Radio Media

17 Artists

1 Secondary page 18 Genres

Music files

19 Playlists

20 Folders
Radio Media
1 Secondary page 21 USB
Managing photos

Level 2

Audio and Telematics Comments
Choose a selection mode.
Display photos. The system supports the following image formats: .gif, .jpg, .jpeg, .bmp, .png, .raw and .tiff with a maximum file size of 10 Mb per image.

.
383

Audio and Telematics

Radio
Selecting a station
Press Radio Media to display the menu.
Press "Frequency".
2
Press one of the buttons for an automatic search for radio stations.
Or Move the cursor for a manual search for frequencies up or down.
Or Press Radio Media to display the primary page.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to
1 the secondary page.
Select "Radio stations" in the secondary page.
384

Press "Frequency".
2
E nter the values using the virtual keypad. First enter the units then click on the decimals zone to enter the figures after the decimal point.
Press "Confirm".

Preset a station
Select a radio station or frequency (refer to the corresponding section).
Press "Presets".
2
Make a long press on one of the buttons to preset the station.

Radio reception may be affected by the use of electrical equipment not approved by the brand, such as a U SB charger connected to the 12 V socket. The exterior environment (hills, buildings, tunnel, car park, below ground...) may prevent reception, even in RDS station tracking mode. This phenomenon is normal in the propagation of radio waves and is in no way indicative of a fault with the audio system.

Audio and Telematics

Activate/ Deactivate RDS
Press Radio Media to display the primary page.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to
1 the secondary page.
Select "Radio settings".
Select "General".
10
Activate/deactivate "Station follow".
Press "Confirm".
RDS, if activated, allows you to continue listening to the same station by automatic retuning to alternative frequencies. However, in certain conditions, coverage of an RDS station may not be assured throughout the entire country as radio stations do not cover 100 % of the territory. This explains the loss of reception of the station during a journey.

Display text information
The "radiotext" function allows information transmitted by the radio station and related to the station or the song playing to be displayed.
Press Radio Media to display the primary page.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to
1 the secondary page.
Select "Radio settings".
Select "General".
10
Activate / Deactivate "Display radio text".
Press "Confirm".

Play TA messages
The TA (Traffic Announcement) function gives priority to TA alert messages. To operate, this function needs good reception of a radio station that carries this type of message. While traffic information is being broadcast, the current media is automatically interrupted so that the TA message can be heard. Normal play of the media previously playing is resumed at the end of the message.
Select "Announcements".
11
Activate / Deactivate "Traffic announcement".
Press "Confirm".

.
385

Audio and Telematics

DAB radio (Digital Audio Broadcasting)
Terrestrial Digital Radio
Display of the name of the current station and "multiplex" being listened to, also called an "ensemble".

Previous "Multiplex". Previous radio station.
Display of options: if active but not available, the display will be greyed out. if active and available, the display will be clear.
Secondary page.
Switch between the page with the presets and the page with the frequencies.
386

Select audio source.
Display "Radiotext" for the current station.
Next "multiplex". Next radio station.
Display of the list of radio stations.
Change of band.
If the current "DAB" station is not available on "FM" the "DAB/FM" option is greyed out.

Audio and Telematics

Digital radio
Digital radio provides higher quality reception. The different multiplexes offer a choice of radio stations arranged in alphabetical order.
Press Radio Media to display the primary page.
Select the audio source.
Press "Band" to select the "DAB"
3 waveband.

DAB / FM auto tracking
"DAB" does not cover 100% of the territory. When the digital radio signal is poor, "DAB/FM auto tracking" allows you to continue listening to the same station, by automatically switching to the corresponding "FM" analogue station (if there is one).
Press Radio Media to display the primary page.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to
1 the secondary page.
Select "Radio settings".
Select "General".
10
Activate / Deactivate "Station follow".
Press "Confirm".

If "DAB / FM auto tracking" is activated, there is a difference of a few seconds when the system switches to "FM" analogue radio with sometimes a variation in volume. O nce the digital signal is restored, the system automatically changes back to "DAB".
If the "DAB" station being listened to is not available on "FM" ("DAB/FM" option greyed out), or "DAB/FM auto tracking" is not activated, the sound will cut out while the digital signal is too weak.
.
387

Audio and Telematics

Media
USB player

Auxiliary (AUX) socket

Selecting the source
Press Radio Media to display the primary page.
Select "Source".

Choose the source.

Insert the U SB memory stick into the U SB port or connect the U SB device to the U SB port using a suitable cable (not supplied).
The system builds playlists (in temporary memory), an operation which can take from a few seconds to several minutes at the first connection. Reduce the number of non-music files and the number of folders to reduce the waiting time. The playlists are updated every time the ignition is switched off or connection of a U SB memory stick. The lists are memorised: if they are not modified, the subsequent loading time will be shorter.

This source is only available if "Auxiliary input" has been checked in the audio settings.
Connect the portable device (MP3 player...) to the auxiliary Jack socket using an audio cable (not supplied).
First adjust the volume of your portable device (to a high level). Then adjust the volume of your audio system. Display and management of the controls are via the portable device.

Bluetooth® audio streaming
Streaming allows you to listen to music from your telephone.
The Bluetooth profile must be activated. First adjust the volume on your portable device (to a high level). Then adjust the volume of your audio system.
If play does not start automatically, it may be necessary to start the audio playback from the telephone. Control is from the portable device or by using the audio system buttons.

O nce connected in streaming mode, the telephone is considered to be a media source.

388

Audio and Telematics

Connecting Apple® players
Connect the Apple® player to the U SB port using a suitable cable (not supplied). Play starts automatically.
Control is via the audio system.
The classifications available are those of the portable device connected (artists / albums / genres / playlists / audiobooks / podcasts). The default classification used is by artist. To modify the classification used, return to the first level of the menu then select the desired classification (playlists for example) and confirm to go down through the menu to the desired track.
The version of software in the audio system may not be compatible with the generation of your Apple® player.

Information and advice
The audio equipment will only play audio files with ".wma, .aac, .flac, .ogg and .mp3" file extensions and with a bit rate of between 32 Kbps and 320 Kbps. It also supports VBR (Variable Bit Rate) mode. No other type of file (.mp4, ...) can be played. ".wma" files must be of the standard wma 9 type. The sampling rates supported are 32, 44 and 48 KHz.

The system supports U SB mass storage devices, BlackBerry® devices or Apple® players via U SB ports. The adaptor cable is not supplied. Control of the peripheral device is with the audio system controls. O ther peripherals, not recognised on connection, must be connected to the auxiliary socket using a Jack cable (not supplied) or via Bluetooth streaming, depending on compatibility.

It is advisable to restrict file names to 20 characters, without using of special characters (e.g.: " " ? ; ù) to avoid any playing and displaying problems.

U se only U SB memory sticks formatted FAT 32 (file allocation table).
It is recommended that the U SB cable for the portable device is used.

.
389

Audio and Telematics
Telephone
Level 1

23 °C

531 kHz

12:13

1
Known devices

23 °C

531 kHz

12:13

390

Level 2
Contacts and favourites
4567
Recent calls
8 9 10 11

Level 3
12 13 14

Level 1
Telephone Bluetooth
2
Contact

Level 2
4 All 5 Telephone 6 Address 7 Favourites
Search

Create

8 All

Telephone

9 Incoming

Bluetooth

10 Outgoing

Calls

11 Missed

Level 3
Confirm
12 Telephone 13 Address 14 E mail
Confirm

Audio and Telematics Comments
View contacts according to presentation choices. Select a contact or a favourite saved in the system via the profile selected to start the call.
Sort the contacts by Surname-First name or First name-Surname. U pdate the contacts from the telephone. Search for a contact in the directory.
Create a new contact in the system.

View calls according to choice of presentation. Select a contact to start the call.

View details for the contact.

391

Audio and Telematics Level 1
1
Settings - Bluetooth
392

Level 2 Bluetooth connection

Messages

Level 1

Telephone

15 All

Secondary page

16 Connected

Bluetooth connection

Telephone

17 All

1 Secondary page 18 Received

Messages

19 Sent

20 Received

Telephone

21 Sent

1 Secondary page

22 Not read

Mailbox

Level 2

Audio and Telematics Comments Display all telephones, connected or disconnected, recognised by the system. Display all connected telephones. Start the search for a device to connect.
Display messages according to the choice made.
Display emails according to the choice made.
.
393

Audio and Telematics Level 1
1
Settings - Bluetooth
394

Level 2 Options
23 24 25 26
Quick messages
27 28 29 30

Options
23 24 25 26

Level 1

23 Security

Telephone

24 Voicemail

1 Secondary page 25 Ringtone

Options

26 Statistics

Confirm

27 Delayed

Telephone

28 My arrival

1 Secondary page 29 Not available

Quick messages

30 Other

Create

Level 2

Audio and Telematics Comments Make driving safe. E nter and save the number for the telephone voicemail. Adjust the ringtone volume. Display data for the telephone connected. Save the options.
Select a quick message from the categories, as required.
Create a quick message.
.
395

Audio and Telematics

Pairing a Bluetooth® telephone

Procedure from the system
Press Telephone to display the primary page.
Press Connect telephone.

Activate the Bluetooth function on the telephone and ensure that it is "visible to all" (telephone configuration).
Procedure from the telephone
Select the system name in the list of devices detected.
In the system, accept the connection request from the telephone.

O r. Select "Search". The list of telephones detected is displayed.
If the pairing procedure fails, it is recommended that you deactivate and then reactivate the "Bluetooth" function in your telephone.
Select the name of the chosen telephone in the list.

To complete the pairing, whichever procedure used (from the telephone or from the system), ensure that the code is the same in the system and in the telephone.
396

Connection sharing
The system offers to connect the telephone with 3 profiles: - Telephone (hands-free kit, telephone
only), - Streaming (wireless play of audio files on
the telephone), - Mobile internet data.
The "Mobile internet data" profile must be activated for connected navigation, having first activated sharing of this connection on your smartphone.
Select one or more profiles.
Press "Confirm".
Depending on the type of telephone, you may be asked to accept or not the transfer of your contacts and messages.

Audio and Telematics

Automatic reconnection
O n return to the vehicle, if the last telephone connected is present again, it is automatically recognised and within about 30 seconds of switching on the ignition, the connection is established without any action on your part (Bluetooth activated).

To modify the connection profile: Press Telephone to display the primary page.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to
1 the secondary page.
Select "Bluetooth connection" to display the list of paired devices.
Press the "details" button.

Select one or more profiles.

Press on "Confirm".

The ability of the system to connect with just one profile depends on the telephone. All three profiles may connect by default.
The services available depend on the network, the SIM card and the compatibility of the Bluetooth devices used. Check in your telephone's manual and with your service provider for the services available to you.
The profiles compatible with the system are HFP, O PP, PBAP, A2DP, AVRCP, MAP and PAN.

G o to the brand's website for more information (compatibility, additional help, ...).

.
397

Audio and Telematics

Managing paired telephones
This function allows the connection or disconnection of a peripheral device as well as the deletion of a pairing.
Press Telephone to display the primary page.

Deleting a telephone
Select the basket at top right of the screen to display a basket alongside the telephone chosen.
Press the basket alongside the telephone chosen to delete it.

Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to
1 the secondary page.
Select "Bluetooth connection" to display the list of paired peripheral devices.
Press on the name of the telephone chosen in the list to disconnect it. Press again to connect it.

Receiving a call
An incoming call is announced by a ring and a superimposed display in the screen.
Make a short press on the steering mounted TEL button to accept an incoming call.
And Make a long press
on the steering mounted TEL button to reject the call.
Or Select "End call".

398

Audio and Telematics

Making a call
U sing the telephone is not recommended while driving. Park the vehicle. Make the call using the steering mounted controls.
Calling a new number
Press Telephone to display the primary page.
E nter the phone number using the digital keypad.
Press "Call" to start the call.

Calling a contact
Press Telephone to display the primary page.
O r make a long press
on the steering mounted TEL button.
Select "Contact".
2
Select the desired contact from the list offered. Select "Call".

Calling a recently used number
Press Telephone to display the primary page. Or Make a long press
on the steering mounted button.
Select "Calls".
3
Select the desired contact from the list offered.

It is always possible to make a call directly from the telephone; as a safety measure, first park the vehicle.

.
399

Audio and Telematics

Managing contacts / entries
Press Telephone to display the primary page.

Managing messages
Press Telephone to display the primary page.

Select "Contact".
2
Select "Create" to add a new contact.

Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to
1 the secondary page.
Select "Messages" to display the list of messages.

In the "Telephone" tab, enter the
12 telephone numbers for the contact.
In the "Address" tab, enter the
13 addresses for the contact.
In the "Email" tab, enter the email
14 addresses for the contact.
The "Email" function allows email addresses to be entered for a contact, but the system is not able to send emails.

Select the "All" or "Received" or "Sent" tab.
Select the detail of the message chosen in one of the lists
Press "Answer" to send a quick message stored in the system.
Press "Call" to start the call.
Press "Play" to hear the message.

The access to "Messages" depends on the compatibility of the smartphone and the integral system. Depending on the smartphone, access to your messages or email may be slow.
The services available depend on the network, the SIM card and the compatibility of the Bluetooth devices used. Check in the manual for your telephone and with your service provider for the services available to you.

400

Audio and Telematics

Managing quick messages
Press Telephone to display the primary page.
Press on the "OPTIONS" button to
1 go to the secondary page.
Select "Messages" to display the list of messages.
Select the "Delayed" or "My arrival" or "Not available" or "Other" tab with the possibility of creating new messages.
Press "Create" to write a new message.
Select the message chosen in one of the lists.
Press "Transfer" to select the addressee(s).
Press "Play" to play the message.

Press this button to "Modify" the new quick message(s) created.

Managing email
Press Telephone to display the primary page.

The "Modify" function does not apply to quick messages already present in the system.

Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to
1 the secondary page.
Select "Email" to display the list of messages.

Select the "Received" or "Sent" or "Not read" tab.

Select the email chosen in the list. Press "Play" to hear the email.

Access to "Email" depends on the compatibility of the smartphone and the integral system.
.
401

Audio and Telematics
Settings
Level 1

23 °C

12:13

Level 2 Audio settings
34567

Audio settings
34567
Audio settings
34567

402

Level 1
Settings Audio settings

3 Ambience 4 Distribution 5 Sound 6 Voice 7 Ringtone
Confirm

Settings Turn off screen

Settings

Profile (1, 2, 3)

Level 2

Audio and Telematics Comments Select the sound ambience. Sound distribution by the Arkamys© system. Adjust the volume or activate volume linked to speed. Adjust the voice volume. Adjust the ringtone volume. Save the settings. Function allowing the display to be switched off. Pressing the screen reactivates it.
Activate the profile selected.
.
403

Audio and Telematics Level 1
1
Settings and tools
404

Level 2 Screen configuration

System settings

10 11 12
Languages

13 14 15 16

Level 3 Screen configuration

Information

Level 1 Settings
1 Secondary page
Screen configuration

Level 2
8 Animation 9 Brightness
Confirm

10 Units

Settings

Secondary page

11 Factory settings

System settings

12 System info

Confirm

13 All

Settings

14 Europe

1 Secondary page 15 Asia

Languages

16 America

Confirm

Level 3
Distance and fuel consumption Temperature Reinitialize View

Audio and Telematics
Comments Activate or deactivate settings. Adjust the level of brightness. Save the settings.
Set the units used for distance, fuel consumption and temperature.
Return to the factory settings.
View the versions of the different modules (system, mapping, risk areas) installed in the system as well as the updates available.
Save the settings.

Select the language then confirm.

Having selected the language, save the setting.

405

Audio and Telematics Level 1
1
Settings and tools
406

Level 2 Setting the time-date

Setting of the profiles
19 20 21 22

Level 3

Level 1

Level 2

17 Date

Settings

1 Secondary page

Setting the time-date

18 Time

Confirm

19 Profile 1

Settings

20 Profile 2

Secondary page

21 Profile 3

Setting of the profiles

22 Common profile

Confirm

Level 3 Date
Date format:
Time
Time Zone Time format: Synchronisation with G PS (U TC):

Audio and Telematics Comments E nter the date and select the date format.
Set the time. Define the time zone. Select the time format: 12h / 24h. Activate or deactivate synchronisation with G PS. Save the settings.

E nter settings for the profiles.

Save the settings.
.
407

Audio and Telematics

Audio settings
Press Settings to display the primary page.
Select "Audio settings".

3
Or
4
Or
5
Or
6
Or
7

Select "Ambience" "Position" "Sound" "Voice" "Ringtone".

Press "Confirm" to save the settings.

408

The sound distribution (or spatialisation with the Arkamys© system) is audio processing that allows the quality of the sound to be adapted according to the number of passengers in the vehicle. Available only with the 6-speaker configuration.
The audio Ambience settings (6 ambiences available) as well as the Bass, Medium and Treble settings are different and independent for each sound source. Activate or Deactivate "Loudness".
The settings for "Position" (All passengers, Driver and Front only) are common to all sources.
Activate or Deactivate "Touch tones", "Volume linked to speed" and "Auxiliary input".
O n-board audio: Arkamys© Sound Staging optimises the distribution of sound in the passenger compartment.

Profile settings
As a safety measure and because it requires the sustained attention of the driver, changes to settings must only be done with the vehicle stationary.
Press Settings to display the primary page.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to
1 the secondary page.
Select "Setting of the profiles".
Select "Profile 1", "Profile 2",
19 "Profile 3" or "Common profile".
Press this button to enter a name for the profile using the virtual keypad
Press "Confirm".

Audio and Telematics

Press this button to add a photograph to the profile.
Insert a U SB memory stick containing the photograph in the U SB port. Select the photograph.
Press "Confirm" to accept the transfer of the photograph.
Press "Confirm" again to save the settings.
The location for the photograph is square; the system deforms the original photograph if in another format.

Press this button to initialise the profile selected.
Initialisation of the profile selected activates the English language by default.

Select a "Profile" (1 or 2 or 3) to
2 associate the "Audio settings" with it.
Select "Audio settings".

3
Or
4

Select "Ambience". "Distribution".

Or
5
Or
6
Or
7

"Sound". "Voice". "Ringtone".

Press "Confirm" to save the settings.

409

Audio and Telematics

Modifying system settings
Press Settings to display the primary page.

Press Settings to display the primary page.

Select the language
Press Settings to display the primary page.

Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to
1 the secondary page.
Select "Screen configuration".

Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to
1 the secondary page.
Select "System settings".

Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to
1 the secondary page.
Select "Languages" to change the language.

Select "Animation".
8
Activate or deactivatre "Automatic scrolling".
Select "Brightness".
9
Adjust the brightness of the screen.

Select "Units" to change the units
10 for distance, fuel consumption and temperature.
Select "Factory settings" to return
11 to the initial settings.

Setting the date
Press Settings to display the primary page.

Returning the system to factory settings activates the E nglish language by default.
Select "System info" to display the
12 versions of the different modules installed in the system.

Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to
1 the secondary page.
Select "Setting the time-date".

410

Audio and Telematics

Select "Date".
17
Press this button to define the date.
Press "Confirm".

Setting the time
Press Settings to display the primary page.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to
1 the secondary page.
Select "Setting the time-date".

Select the display format of the date.
Adjustment of the time and date is only available if synchronisation with G PS is deactivated. The change between winter and summer time is done by changing the time zone.

Select "Time".
18
Press this button to adjust the time using the virtual keypad.
Press "Confirm".
Press this button to define the time zone.

Select the display format for the time (12h / 24h).
Activate or deactivate synchronisation with G PS (U TC).

Press "Confirm".
The system does not automatically manage the change between winter and summer time (depending on country).

.
411

Audio and Telematics

Frequently asked questions
The following table groups together the answers to the most frequently asked questions concerning your audio system.
Navigation

QUESTION
The route calculation is not successful.

ANSWER
The route settings may conflict with the current location (exclusion of toll roads on a toll motorway).

SOLUTION
Check the route settings in the "Navigation" menu.

The PO Is do not appear. The PO Is have not been selected.

Select the PO Is in the list of PO Is.

The audible warning of "Danger areas" does not work.
The system does not suggest a detour around an incident on the route.

The audible warning is not active. The guidance criteria do not take account of TMC messages.

Activate audible warnings (without the possibility of adjusting the volume) in the "Navigation" menu.
Select a setting for the "Traffic info" function in the list of route settings (Without, Manual or Automatic).

I receive a "Danger area" alert which is not on my route.

O ther than guidance, the system announces all "Danger areas" positioned in a cone located in front of the vehicle. It may provide an alert for "Danger areas" located on nearby or parallel roads.

Zoom in on the map to view the exact position of the "Danger areas". Select "O n the route" to no longer receive alerts other than navigation instructions or to reduce the time for the announcement.

412

Audio and Telematics

QUESTION
Certain traffic jams along the route are not indicated in real time.

ANSWER
O n starting, it is several minutes before the system starts to receive traffic information.

SOLUTION
Wait until the traffic information is being received correctly (display of the traffic information icons on the map).

In certain countries, only major routes (motorways...) are listed for the traffic information.

This phenomenon is normal. The system is dependent on the traffic information available.

The altitude is not displayed.

O n starting, the initialisation of the G PS may take up to 3 minutes to Wait until the system has started up completely

receive more than 4 satellites correctly.

so that there is G PS coverage by at least

4 satellites.

Depending on the geographical environment (tunnel...) or the weather, the conditions of reception of the G PS signal may vary.

This phenomenon is normal. The system is dependent on the G PS signal reception conditions.

.
413

Audio and Telematics

Radio

QUESTION
The quality of reception of the radio station listened to gradually deteriorates or the stored stations do not function (no sound, 87.5 Mhz is displayed...).

ANSWER The vehicle is too far from the transmitter used by the station listened to or there is no transmitter in the geographical area through which the vehicle is travelling.
The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, basement car parks...) block reception, including in RDS mode.

SOLUTION
Activate the "RDS" function by means of the short-cut menu to enable the system to check whether there is a more powerful transmitter in the geographical area.
This phenomenon is normal and does not indicate a fault with the audio system.

The aerial is absent or has been damaged (for example when going Have the aerial checked by a franchised dealer. through a car wash or into an underground car park).

I cannot find some radio stations in the list of stations received.
The name of the radio station changes.

The station is not received or its name has changed in the list.
Some radio stations send other information in place of their name (the title of the song for example). The system interprets this information as the name of the station.

Press on the "U pdate list" button in the "Radio stations" secondary menu.

414

Audio and Telematics

Media
QUESTION
Playback of my U SB memory stick starts only after a very long wait (around 2 to 3 minutes).

ANSWER
Some files supplied with the memory stick may greatly slow down access to reading the memory stick (multiplication by 10 of the catalogue time).

SOLUTION
Delete the files supplied with the memory stick and limit the number of sub-folders in the file structure on the memory stick.

Some characters in the media information are not displayed correctly while playing.

The audio system does not display some types of characters.

U se standard characters to name tracks and folders.

Playing of streaming files The peripheral device connected does not support automatic play. Start the playback from the device. does not start.

The names of tracks and the track length are not displayed on the screen when streaming audio.

The Bluetooth profile does not allow the transfer of this information.

.
415

Audio and Telematics

Telephone
QUESTION I cannot connect my Bluetooth telephone.

ANSWER The telephone's Bluetooth function may be switched off or the telephone may not be visible.
The Bluetooth telephone is not compatible with the system.

SOLUTION Check that your telephone's Bluetooth function is switched on. Check in the telephone settings that it is "visible to all".
You can check the compatibility of your telephone at the brand's website (services).

The volume of the telephone connected in Bluetooth mode is inaudible.

The volume depends both on the system and on the telephone.
The ambient noise level has an influence on the quality of telephone communication.

Some contacts are duplicated in the list.

The options for synchronizing contacts are synchronizing the contacts on the SIM card, the contacts on the telephone, or both. When both synchronizations are selected, some contacts may be duplicated.

Contacts are not shown in Some telephones offer display options. Depending on the settings

alphabetical order.

chosen, contacts can be transferred in a specific order.

Increase the volume of the audio system, to maximum if required, and increase the volume of the telephone if necessary.
Reduce the ambient noise level (close the windows, reduce the booster fan speed, slow down, ...). Select "Display SIM card contacts" or "Display telephone contacts".
Modify the display setting in the telephone directory.

The system does not

The Bluetooth mode does not permit sending SMS text messages

receive SMS text messages. to the system.

416

Audio and Telematics

Settings
QUESTION
In changing the setting of treble and bass the equalizer setting is deselected.

ANSWER
The selection of an equalizer setting imposes the settings for treble and bass and vice-versa.

SOLUTION
Modify the treble and bass or equalizer settings to obtain the desired musical ambience.

In changing the equalizer setting, treble and bass return to zero.

When changing the balance settings, the distribution setting is deselected.
When changing a distribution setting, the balance setting is deselected.

The selection of a distribution setting imposes the balance settings Modify the balance or distribution settings to

and vice-versa.

obtain the desired musical ambience.

.
417

Audio and Telematics

QUESTION
There is a difference in sound quality between the different audio sources.

ANSWER
For optimum sound quality, the audio settings for Loudness, Ambience, Treble, Bass and Volume can be adapted to the different sound sources, which may result in audible differences when changing source.

SOLUTION
Check that the audio settings for Loudness, Ambience, Treble, Bass and Volume are adapted to the sources listened to. Adjust the Balance, Treble and Bass to the middle position, select the "None" musical ambience and set the loudness correction to the "Active" position in CD mode or to the "Inactive" position in radio mode.

With the engine off, the system switches off after a few minutes of use.

When the engine is switched off, the system's operating time depends on the state of charge of the battery. The switch-off is normal: the system switches to economy mode and switches off to prevent discharging of the vehicle's battery.

Start the vehicle's engine to increase the battery charge.

418

PEUGEO T Connect Radio
Connectivity - Multimedia audio - Bluetooth® telephone

Audio and Telematics

First steps Steering mounted controls Menus Connectivity Radio Media Telephone Settings Frequently asked questions

Contents 420 422 423 424 434 446 458 468

.
419

Audio and Telematics

First steps
With the engine running, a press mutes the sound. With the ignition off, a press turns the system on.
Volume.

The touch screen is of the "capacitive" type. To clean the screen, use a soft, nonabrasive cloth (spectacles cloth) with no additional product. Do not use sharp objects on the screen. Do not touch the screen with wet hands.

Primary page

Secondary page

420

23 °C

Audio and Telematics

531 kHz

12:13

In the "Settings" menu you can create a profile for just one person or a group of people with common points, with the possibility of entering a multitude of settings (radio presets, audio settings, contact favourites, ...); these settings are taken into account automatically.

.
421

Audio and Telematics

Steering mounted controls

Voice commands: Long press, smartphone voice commands via the system.

Increase volume.

Mute/ Restore the sound.

Decrease volume.

422

Menus
Connectivity

23 °C

531 kHz

12:13

Radio Media

23 °C

87.5 MHz
FM/87.5 MHz 87.5MHz

12:13

Audio and Telematics

Telephone

23 °C

531 kHz

12:13

O perate certain applications on a smartphone connected via MirrorLinkTM or CarPlay®. Check the state of Bluetooth and Wi-Fi connections.
Settings

Select an audio source, a radio station, display photographs.

Connect a telephone by Bluetooth®, read messages and emails and send quick messages.

Driving

23 °C

12:13

E nter settings for a personal profile and/ or adjust the settings for sound (balance, ambience, ...), and the display (language, units, date, time, ...).

Activate, deactivate, adjust the settings for certain vehicle functions.

.
423

Audio and Telematics
Connectivity
Functionalities available according to equipment. Level 1

23 °C

531 kHz

12:13

Level 2 Networks

424

Level 3 Bluetooth connection

Wi-Fi network connection

Connections and subscriptions to services

Share Wi-Fi connection

Functionalities available according to equipment. Level 2

Connectivity

2 All

1 Secondary page
Bluetooth connection

3 Connected
Search

Connectivity
1 Secondary page
Wi-Fi network connection

4 Secured 5 Not secured 6 Stored

Connectivity
1 Secondary page
Manage connection

Connectivity
1 Secondary page
Share Wi-Fi connection

7 Activation 8 Settings

Level 3

Audio and Telematics

Display the state of the subscription to connected services, the state of the network connection and the connection mode.

Activate or deactivating the sharing of the Wi-Fi connection.
Select a Wi-Fi network found by the system and connect to it.
Save settings.

.
425

Audio and Telematics

Bluetooth® connection
As a safety measure and because it requires sustained attention by the driver, the pairing of a Bluetooth mobile telephone with the Bluetooth handsfree system of your audio system must be done with the vehicle stationary and the ignition on.
Activate the Bluetooth function on the telephone and ensure that it is "visible to all" (telephone configuration).
Procedure from the telephone
Select the name of the system in the list of devices detected.
In the system, accept the connection request from the telephone.
To complete the pairing, whichever procedure used (from the telephone or from the system), ensure that the code is the same in the system and in the telephone. 426

Procedure from the system
Press "Telephone" to display the secondary page.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to
1 the secondary page.
Press "Bluetooth connection".

Select "Search". The list of detected telephones is displayed.

Press "Confirm".

If the pairing procedure fails, it is recommended that you deactivate and then reactivate the "Bluetooth" function in your telephone.

Select the name of the chosen telephone in the list.

Depending on the type of telephone, you may be asked to accept or not the transfer of your contacts and messages.

Audio and Telematics

Managing connections
Press Connectivity to display the primary page.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to
1 the secondary page.
Select "Manage connection".

With this function you can view the access to connected services, the availability of connected services and modify the connection mode.

.
427

Audio and Telematics
MirrorLinkTM smartphone connection

428

23 °C

531 kHz

12:13

Audio and Telematics

As a safety measure, applications can only be viewed with the vehicle stationary; display is interrupted once the vehicle is moving.
The "MirrorLinkTM" function requires the use of a compatible smartphone and applications.
When connecting a smartphone to the system, it is recommended that Bluetooth® be started on the smartphone.
Connect a U SB cable. The smartphone charges when connected by a U SB cable.
From the system, press on "Connectivity" to display the primary page.
Press "MirrorLinkTM" to start the application in the system.

.
429

Audio and Telematics Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

430

23 °C

531 kHz

12:13

Level 1

Level 2

Connectivity MirrorLinkTM

Level 3

.
431

Audio and Telematics
CarPlay® smartphone connection

432

23 °C

531 kHz

12:13

Audio and Telematics

As a safety measure and because it requires the sustained attention of the driver, using a smartphone when driving is prohibited. O peration must be with the vehicle stationary.

The synchronisation of a

smartphone allows applications on a

smartphone that are adapted to the

CarPlay® technology to be displayed

in the vehicle's screen, having first

activated the CarPlay® function in your

smartphone.

As the principles and standards

are constantly changing, it is

recommended that you keep your

smartphone's operating system

updated.

For the list of eligible smartphones, go

to the brand's internet website in your

country.

Connect a U SB cable. The smartphone charges when connected by a U SB cable.
Press "Telephone" to display the CarPlay® interface.
Connect a U SB cable. The smartphone charges when connected by a U SB cable. In the system, press "Connectivity" to display the primary page.
Press "CarPlay" to display the CarPlay® interface.

O n connecting the U SB cable, the CarPlay® function deactivates the system's Bluetooth® mode.

.
433

Audio and Telematics
Radio Media
Level 1

Level 2

23 °C

87.5 MHz
FM/87.5 MHz 87.5MHz

12:13

1 233

434

23 °C

87.5 MHz
FM/87.5 MHz 87.5MHz

12:13

23 °C

531 kHz
AM/531 kHz Po kHz

12:13

1 234
Radio stations

Level 1
Radio Media Source

Radio Media

Frequency / Presets

Radio Media

Band

Radio Media

List

Radio USB iPod AUX Bluetooth Frequency Presets FM DAB AM

Level 2

Radio stations

Audio and Telematics Comments

Select change of source.

Carry out an automatic or manual search for radio stations. Make a long press on an empty location to preset a station.
Press Band to change waveband.

O pen the list of radio stations and press on a radio station to select it.

.
435

Audio and Telematics Level 1
1
Radio-media options
436

Level 2 Audio settings

56789
Radio settings

Radio stations

12 13 14 15

Audio settings
56789
Audio settings
56789

Level 1

5 Ambience

Level 2

6 Distribution
Radio Media
7 Sound 1 Secondary page
8 Voice
Audio settings
9 Ringtone

Confirm

Radio Media

10 General

1 Secondary page 11 Announcements

Radio settings

Confirm

12 FM

13 DAB

Radio Media

14 AM

1 Secondary page 15 Presets

Radio stations

Frequency

Display the list of radio stations for the band selected.

Select a preset radio station. E nter a frequency manually. Change the screen display mode. U pdate the list according to reception.

.
437

Audio and Telematics Level 1
1
Radio-media options
438

Level 2
USB
16 17 18 19 20
Photos
21

Level 1

16 Albums

Radio Media

17 Artists

1 Secondary page 18 Genres

Music files

19 Playlists

20 Folders
Radio Media
1 Secondary page 21 USB
Managing photos

Level 2

.
439

Audio and Telematics

Press "Frequency".
2
E nter the values using the virtual keypad. First enter the units then click on the decimals zone to enter the figures after the decimal point.
Press "Confirm".

Preset a station
Select a radio station or frequency (refer to the corresponding section).
Press "Presets".
2
Make a long press on one of the buttons to preset the station.

Audio and Telematics

.
441

Audio and Telematics

DAB radio (Digital Audio Broadcasting)
Terrestrial Digital Radio
Display of the name of the current station and "multiplex" being listened to, also called an "ensemble".

Audio and Telematics

Media
USB player

Auxiliary (AUX) socket

Selecting the source
Press Radio Media to display the primary page.
Select "Source".

Choose the source.

O nce connected in streaming mode, the telephone is considered to be a media source.

444

Audio and Telematics

It is advisable to restrict file names to 20 characters, without using of special characters (e.g.: " " ? ; ù) to avoid any playing and displaying problems.

U se only U SB memory sticks formatted FAT 32 (file allocation table).
It is recommended that the U SB cable for the portable device is used.

.
445

Audio and Telematics
Telephone
Level 1

23 °C

531 kHz

12:13

1
Known devices

23 °C

531 kHz

12:13

446

Level 2
Contacts and favourites
4567
Recent calls
8 9 10 11

Level 3
12 13 14

Level 1
Telephone Bluetooth
2
Contact

Level 2
4 All 5 Telephone 6 Address 7 Favourites
Search

Create

8 All

Telephone

9 Incoming

Bluetooth

10 Outgoing

Calls

11 Missed

Level 3
Confirm
12 Telephone 13 Address 14 E mail
Confirm

View calls according to choice of presentation. Select a contact to start the call.

View details for the contact.

447

Audio and Telematics Level 1
1
Settings - Bluetooth
448

Level 2 Bluetooth connection

Messages

Level 1

Telephone

15 All

Secondary page

16 Connected

Bluetooth connection

Telephone

17 All

1 Secondary page 18 Received

Messages

19 Sent

20 Received

Telephone

21 Sent

1 Secondary page

22 Not read

Mailbox

Level 2

Audio and Telematics Level 1
1
Settings - Bluetooth
450

Level 2 Options
23 24 25 26
Quick messages
27 28 29 30

Options
23 24 25 26

Level 1

23 Security

Telephone

24 Voicemail

1 Secondary page 25 Ringtone

Options

26 Statistics

Confirm

27 Delayed

Telephone

28 My arrival

1 Secondary page 29 Not available

Quick messages

30 Other

Create

Level 2

Audio and Telematics

Pairing a Bluetooth® telephone

As a safety measure and because it requires sustained attention by the driver, the pairing of a Bluetooth mobile telephone with the Bluetooth handsfree system of your audio system must be done with the vehicle stationary and the ignition on.

Procedure from the system
Press Telephone to display the primary page.
Press Connect telephone.

To complete the pairing, whichever procedure used (from the telephone or from the system), ensure that the code is the same in the system and in the telephone.
452

Connection sharing
The system offers to connect the telephone with 3 profiles: - Telephone (hands-free kit, telephone
only), - Streaming (wireless play of audio files on
the telephone), - Mobile internet data.
Select one or more profiles.
Press "Confirm".
Depending on the type of telephone, you may be asked to accept or not the transfer of your contacts and messages.

Audio and Telematics

Select one or more profiles.

Press on "Confirm".

G o to the brand's website for more information (compatibility, additional help, ...).

.
453

Audio and Telematics

Managing paired telephones
This function allows the connection or disconnection of a peripheral device as well as the deletion of a pairing.
Press Telephone to display the primary page.

Deleting a telephone
Select the basket at top right of the screen to display a basket alongside the telephone chosen.
Press the basket alongside the telephone chosen to delete it.

454

Audio and Telematics

Calling a recently used number
Press Telephone to display the primary page. Or Make a long press
on the steering mounted button.
Select "Calls".
3
Select the desired contact from the list offered.

It is always possible to make a call directly from the telephone; as a safety measure, first park the vehicle.

.
455

Audio and Telematics

Managing contacts / entries
Press Telephone to display the primary page.

Managing messages
Press Telephone to display the primary page.

Select "Contact".
2
Select "Create" to add a new contact.

Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to
1 the secondary page.
Select "Messages" to display the list of messages.

456

Audio and Telematics

Press this button to "Modify" the new quick message(s) created.

Managing email
Press Telephone to display the primary page.

The "Modify" function does not apply to quick messages already present in the system.

Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to
1 the secondary page.
Select "Email" to display the list of messages.

Select the "Received" or "Sent" or "Not read" tab.

Select the email chosen in the list. Press "Play" to hear the email.

Access to "Email" depends on the compatibility of the smartphone and the integral system.
.
457

Audio and Telematics
Settings
Level 1

23 °C

12:13

Level 2 Audio settings
34567

Audio settings
34567
Audio settings
34567

458

Level 1
Settings Audio settings

3 Ambience 4 Distribution 5 Sound 6 Voice 7 Ringtone
Confirm

Settings Turn off screen

Settings

Profile (1, 2, 3)

Level 2

Audio and Telematics Level 1
1
Settings and tools
460

Level 2 Screen configuration

System settings

10 11 12
Languages

13 14 15 16

Level 3 Screen configuration

Information

Level 1 Settings

Secondary page

Screen configuration

Level 2
8 Animation 9 Brightness
Confirm

10 Units

Settings
11 Factory settings 1 Secondary page

System settings

12 System info

Confirm

13 All

Settings

14 Europe

1 Secondary page 15 Asia

Languages

16 America

Confirm

Level 3
Distance and fuel consumption Temperature Reinitialize View

Select the language then confirm.

Having selected the language, save the setting.

461

Audio and Telematics Level 1
1
Settings and tools
462

Level 2 Setting the time-date

Setting of the profiles
19 20 21 22

Level 3

Level 1

Level 2

17 Date

Settings

1 Secondary page

Setting the time-date

18 Time

Confirm

19 Profile 1

Settings

20 Profile 2

Secondary page

21 Profile 3

Setting of the profiles

22 Common profile

Confirm

Level 3 Date
Date format:
Time
Time Zone Time format: Synchronisation with G PS (U TC):

E nter settings for the profiles.

Save the settings.
.
463

Audio and Telematics

Audio settings
Press Settings to display the primary page.
Select "Audio settings".

3
Or
4
Or
5
Or
6
Or
7

Select "Ambience" "Position" "Sound" "Voice" "Ringtone".

Press "Confirm" to save the settings.

464

Audio and Telematics

Press this button to initialise the profile selected.
Initialisation of the profile selected activates the English language by default.

Select a "Profile" (1 or 2 or 3) to
2 associate the "Audio settings" with it.
Select "Audio settings".

3
Or
4

Select "Ambience". "Distribution".

Or
5
Or
6
Or
7

"Sound". "Voice". "Ringtone".

Press "Confirm" to save the settings.

465